Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
.i._ .t-."
'-
, iI
'i!
,::,.. i.
:'
I
r'
'./ '"{,
.'i .:
..
i,'
. ,-5
;'
'.'*": -';:
i
i
'1"
CONTENTS
I.
I
GENEML
I.
PROGRA]4I"IING
I.
)
20
20
ZU
20
(G
FUNCTION)
2l
24
24 25
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.L Positioning (c00) 4.2 Single Direction Positioning (c60) 4.3 Linear Interpolation (G01) 4.4 Circular Inrerpolarion (c02, G03) 4.5 Helical Cutting (c02, c03) 4.6 Equal Lead Thread Curring (c33)
FEED FUNCTIONS
26
27
29 31 32 32 32 32
32
5.
5.
I Rapid Traverse 5.2 Cutting Feed Rate 5.2.I Tangential speed constant control 5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp 5.2.3 Feed per minute (G94) 5.2.4 Feed per revolution (c95) 5.2.5 One-digit F code feed .
5.3
Override 5.3. 1 Feed rate overri-de 5.3.2 Rapid traverse override 5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration 5.4. 1 Automatic acceler ation/deceleration after interpolation 5.5 Speed Control at Corn ers of Blocks
....+
33 33 33
34
34 34 35 35 36
37
(G04)
5.5.3 CutLing mode (c64) 5,5.4 Tapping mode (c63) 5.5.5 Automatic corner override 5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop (c04) 6.1 Automatic
REFERENCE POINT
37 37
37
(G62)
38
4I
L? 42
Reference Point Return (G28, G29) 6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28) 6.I.2 Automatic return from reference point (C29) 6.2 Reference Point Return Check (G27) 6.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point Return (G30)
COORDINATE SYSTEM G59)
43
43
44 45 45 45 47 48
7.
7.L Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, G54 to 7.I.1 Setting work coordinate sysrem (c92) 7.1.2 Setting work coordinate system (G54 to cs 9) 7.f.3 Selecting work coordinate systern (G54 co G59)
7.1.4 Changing work eoordinate system by program command (csa to csg) 7.f.5 Setting and display of work zero point offset amount
G18,
49 50
Gt9)
5l
52 53
53
B.
f Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91) 8.2 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21) 8.3 Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type
Decimal Point Programming
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
s3
54
9. I
56
56
s6
56 57 57 57
IO. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) 10.1 Tool Selection Command LO.2 Tool Life Management ...
63 64 65 67 67 67
12.
1 Tape Start ..e. 12.2 Leader Section and Label Skip . L2.3 Program Start L2.4 Program Section I2.4.1 Main program and sub program 12.4.2 Program number 12.4,3 Sequence number and block 12.4.4 0ptional block skip 12.4.5 Word and address L2.4.6 Basic addresses and command value ranse
Tape End Tape Format 12.8 ";'.2 Tape Codes ... 12.9
68
68
72
IJ /5
77 78 79
L2.7
;:H:H
;:;'t::
::
::
::
::
::::::
::
.:::
::
::::..:::::::::::
::
::::.::
::
79
79
79
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING I3.1 Canned Cycles (c73, Gl4, G76, G80 to 13.2 External Motion Function (G80, GB I)
I4.
COMPENSA,TION FUNCTION .
80
GB9)
80
95
14.
I Tool Length Offset (c43, C44, G49) L4.I.1 Tool length offset A... 14. f. 2 Tool length offset B . . . L4.2 Cutter Cornpensation B (c39 to G42) 14.2.I Cut,ter compensation function. 14.2.2 Offset amount (H code) 14.2.3 Offset vector L4.2.4 Plane selection and vector ... 14.2.5 Corner offset cj-rcular interpolation (G39) L4.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40) 14.2.7 Cutter comDensation left (G41)
96
vo
96 98
99 99
100
i00
100
....
f01
101
loz
14.2.8 Currer compensarion right (c42) L4.2.9 General notes on offset L4.2.10 Program example 14.3 Cutter Compensation C (G40 to c42) 14.3.1 Cutter compensation function . i4.3.2 Offset amount (It code) 14.3.3 Offset veclor 14.3.4 Plane selection and vector ... 14.3.5 c40, c4l, and G42 . L4,3.6 Details of cutter compensation C ... L4.4 Changing of Tool Offset Amounr (Prograrnmable Dara Inpur) (G10) 14.5 Scaling (c50, c51) 14.6 Coordinate Systern Roration (c68, c69) 14.6.1 Command fcrmat . 14.6.2 Relationship to other functions 15.
15.
MEASUREI"IENT FUNCTIONS
f07
107
f07
107
i08
108 110 140
l4l
L42 L44
T47
I47
L49
16.
16.
A ... I Custom Macro Cou'unand 16.1.1 M98 (Single call) 16.1.2 Subprogram call using M code 16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code f6.1.4 G66 (Modal call) 16.1.5 Argunent specification 16.2 Custom Macro Body . L6.2.1 Variables. 16.2.2 Kind of variables 16.2.3 lulacro instrucrions (G65) 16.2.4 Notes on custom macro Example of Custbm Macro 1 6. 3 .4. . . 16.3. f Bolt hole circle 16.3.2 Pocket machining 16.3.3 Interface signal ... ..;.. f6.3.4 Shearing machine ... 16.3.5 Program examples ... 16.4 Pattern Data Input Functj-on ... 16.4. I Pattern menu display 16.4.2 Pattern data display 16.4.3 Character-to-codes correspondence table
CUSTOM MACRO
... ..
L62
f63
163
L64
166 167 167
169 169
172 L75
17.
CUSTO}I MACRO
17. I Macro Ca11 Corunand (Custom Macro Command) I 7 . l. I Simple calls .1. . . 17. 1.2 Modal call . I 7. 1.3 Macro call using G codes 17.1.4 Custoro macro call with M code 17.f.5 Subprogram call with M code 17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code
B ...
I77
179
17 9
L82
183 183 184
17.I.7
17.
1.8 Multiplex calls I7.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodlr L7.2. I Custom macro body format 17.2.2 Variables 17.2.3 Types of varlables . 17.2.4 Arithnetic commands .
Dif ference between 1"198 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body call) ...
184 184
185
i86
186 187
f89
200
17.2.5 Control c,onnands ... 17 .2.6 Macro and CNC statements ... 17.2.7 Codes and words used in custom macro I7.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body 17 .4 Limitations .. i8. 10/11 TAPE FORMAT ... 18.1 Difference Points of Tape Format 18.2 Address and Range of Command Values f8.3 Key Position . 18.4 Each Address Restrictions 18.5 Setting of Setting Parameters . 18.6 Cautions of Each Function III.
I.
OPEMTION INTRODUCTION
203
208
2LI 2IL
2fl
2r3
2L3 2L3
.'. . . . 2I4
2L4 2L4
2I4
2T7
2. OPERATION DEVICES 2.1 CRT/MDI Panel z.I.L MDI keyboard . 2.L.2 Function buttons 2.2 Machine Operator's Panel 2.3 Tape Reader .. 2.3.I Portable ?' reader .. tape 2.3.2 Note for handling tape reader .. 2.4 FANUC casserre BI/B?/E| 2.5 FANUC PPR . 3.
POWER
237
23L
'236
ON/OFF
/,') . )---
4. MANUAL OPERATION 4.L l"lanual Ref erence Point Return 4.2 l'Ianua1 Continuous Feed 4.3 STEP Feed 4.4 Manual Handle Feed 4.5 Manual Absolute 0N and OFF . 5.
AUTOMATIC OPEMTION 5.1 Operation Mode . 5. 1.1 Memory operation 5.L.2 MDI operation . . 5. f.3 MDI operation-B 5.2 Starting Automatic Operation . 5.3 Executing Automatic Operation 5.4 Stopping Automatic Operation 5.4.I Program stop (M00) .2 Optional- scop (M01 ) 5 ^4 5.4.3 Program end (M02, M30) 5.4.4 Feed hold 5.4.5 Reset 5.5 Program Re-Start 5.6 l'lanual Handle Interruption . 5.6-l Handle interrupt operation 5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt 5.6.3 High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis
260
263
263
264 265
6.
t A1l Axes I'lachine Lock . 6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
6.
TEST OPERATION
... ...
zot
267 267
268
269
7.
7.1
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
269
zoY
7.2 Overtravel
8.
o
270
1 Preparation for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation 2 Registering Prograrn to Memory 9.2.1 Registering with MDI key 9.2.2 Registering from NC tape 9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory 9.4 Program Number Search 9.5 Deleti-ng a Program 9,6 Deleting A11 Programs 9.7 Punching a Program 9.8 Punching A1l Programs . 9.9 Sequence Number Search 9. l0 Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape . 9.11 Inserti-on, Changing and Deleting the Word 9.1i.1 Word search 9.11.2 Inserting a word 9.11.3 Changing a word 9.1 .4 Deleting a word ..:.. ol .5 Deleting up to an EOB . 9.11.6 Deleting blocks a 12 Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
o
REGISTMTION)
271 27L
27r 27r
271
271 272
272
273
zt J
273
,1
/,
275
.r'7 a
28r
282
q o o
MDI
. . .1
o
q a
14 Menu Prograrnming . . 15 Program Loading by TEACH IN Mode 16 Conversational Programming with Graphic 9. 16.I Prograroming . 9. 16.2 Confirmation of program . . . 9 . f6.3 Editing of program . . . 17 Nurnber of Regist.ered Programs . 18 Part Program Storage Length
Function
290 290
29I
291
292
IO.
10.
I Offset Amount l0.l.l Setting and display of t,oo1 offset values (function key: offset ) ... L0.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: PAMI'I ) ... I0.3 Custom Macro Variable f0.4 System Parameter 10.4. I Parameter dlsplay i0.4.2 Parameter setting ..
294 294
294 295
297 291 291
298
Pitch Error
Compensation
Data
1.
I 1.
DISPLAY
IL.2 11.3 Command Value Display (Function key: PRGRM ) lI.4 Display for Program Check Il.5 Current Position Display (Function key: POS ) 11.6 Display of Run Tirne and Parts Count 11.6.1 Actual position screen 1 I . 6. 2 Parameter setting screen Il.7 Alarm Display (Function key: ALARM ) .. If.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Displav
303
JUJ
303
305
306 . .t. . . . .
.
307
309
309
3
10
tI.9
311 311
Clock
3r3
314 314
JI4
T2.
DATA OUTPUT
13. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 13.1 What is a File 13.2 File Heading f3.3.3
CNC
/82/FI)
315
3r5
315
13.3 Data Output Operation 13. 3. I CNC prQran output f3.3.2 Offset data output
3r6 3i6
317
parameter output 13.4 Data Input Operation t3.4.1 CNC program input 13.4.2 Offset data input 13.4.3 CNC parameter input 13.5 File Deletion Precautions L 3. 6 i3.6.1 Request for cassette replacement 13.6.2 Cassette adaptor lamp conditions
3r7
3L7
13.7 Floppy Cassette Di-rectory Display I3.7. I Display ... 13.7.2 File input/output 13.7.3 Other precautions L4. GRAPHIC FUNCTION 14.1 Drawing Range I4.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter .. 14.2.1' Setting procedure of graphie parameter .. L4.2.2 Details of graphic parameter . L4.2.3 Tool path drawing .
I5.
323
325
327 327
328 329
JJU
I5.1 Outline
16.
332
JJJ
1A I
???
L6.2 Operation
333
IV.
MAINTENANCE
l. I
337 337
JJ I
337
2.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2,
')
4 CNC Status Displav 2.5 Display of Position Deviation 2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point V.
APPENDIXES
General 2 Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control 3 NC System Check (No E.ools required)
34L 34L
5+J
1 2 3 4
54
349
3s2
351 357 360
1. 2. 3.
363 364
TAPE JOINING
STATUS WI{EN TURNING THE POWER ON, WI{EN RESET
36s
367
I.
LIST
367
IN
PROGRAM
496
497 514
5
LIST
10 LIST
OF OPERATION
1I LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
r6
:
il
bt
F:i' fi'l
I I
i l\
GENERAL
This manual describes the programming, operation, and daily maintenance for 0-MB and 00-MB. This manual includes all optional functions. For the functions unique to each CNC system, see APPENDIX 11 I'LIST 0F SPECIFICATIONS". For which options are provided with your system, see machine tool builder I s
,
manual.
Sometimes, the specification and usage of the system may be different to t.he specification of the rnachine side operation panel. So, see the machine tool builderts manual without, fail.
according
1.1
When machining
the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program, then operate the CNC machine by using the program. l) First, prepare the prograrn from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine too1, Then punch the paper tape to be read the program into the CNC system. How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter II. 2) Paper tape is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the workpieces and tools on the machine, and operate the tools aceording to the programming. Finally, execute the machining actua11y. How to operate the CNC system is described in the Chapter III.
OPERATION. PROGRA}frIING.
Part drawing
Paper tape
CNC
MACHINE TOOL
CHAPTER
II
PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER
III
OPERATION
Before the actual programming, make the machining plan for how to machj-ne the
parc.
Machining plan l. Determination of workpieces machining range 2. Method of mounting workpieces on the nachine tool 3. Machining sequence in every cutting process 4. Cutting tools and cutting conditions Decide the cutting method in every cutt.ing process
t. ::i,
4':i.
-3-
\-\_ Cutting
procedure
Cutting
------\
process
I
Face cutting
a
L
Side cutting
Hole machining
1. CuEting nethod
: 2. Cutting tool :
Rough
Semi
Finish
Tools
4, Tool
path
Face cutting
Prepare the program of the tool path and cutting condition according to the workpiece figure, for each cutEing.
I'
-4-
r:.
rl
il
The function of an
CNC machine tool system depends not only.on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system' the CNC, the operatorrs panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function, programming, and operation relating to all connbinations. This manual generally describes these fron the stand-polnt of the CNC. So, for details on a particul.ar CNC machlne tool, refer to the manual issued by the rnachine tool bullder, which should take precedence over this manual.
2)
This rnanual addresses as many subjects as posslble. But it would become too voluminous to point out everything that should not or cannot be done. Functlons which are not specifically stated as possible are impossible.
3) Notes refer to detailed and speeific items. So, when a irote is encountered, terms used in it sometimes are not explained. In this case, first skip the note' then return to it after having read over the manual for details.
-5-
II
PROGRAMMING
lr
il
1.
INTRODUCTION
l) Tool movement along workpiece parts figure Interpolation (See II-4) The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constltuting the workplece parts flgure. (See Note) a) Tool movement along stralght line
G03X
--
--
--;
of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs ls called the interpolation. Syutbols of the Progratmed commands G01, GO2, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
The function
Control unit X axis
a) Movement along
staight line
colY
_; X-Y-;
\n
Tool movement
,ll -'
Y axis
G03X
-Y-
Note)
workpiece.
the table rnay be moved without moving the tool in an actual machine, thJ.s manual assumes that the tool noves with respect to the
Though
-9-
ilil,
2) Feed
ilfr Irll
Feed
Itf
lrll ti':
Iii
I
'
Table
Movement
of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 150 uun/min, specify the following in the
F150. 0
Program:
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed funetion.
3) Part drawing and tool movenent a) Reference point (fixed position on rnachine) An NC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Nornally, tool change and prograurming of absolute zero point as described later are performed *t this position. This position is called the reference point.
The t,ool can be moved to reference poi_nt in two ways: i) Manual reference point return (See III-4.1) Reference point return is perforrned by manual button operation. ii) Automatic reference point return (See II-6.1) Reference point return is performed in accordance with progranme,
In general, manual reference point return is performed flrst after th, pov{er is turned on. In order to move the tool to reference point fo: tool change thereafter, the function of automatic reference poin return is used.
commands.
-10-
(
coordinate system specified by
b) Coordinate system on part drawing and --- Coordinate svstem (See III-8)
NC
Program
Command
Part drarving
Coordinate system
lviachine NC
tool
There are t\ro types of coordinate systems. i) Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are used. ii) Coordinate system specified by NC The coordinate systen is prepared on the rnachine tool tab1e. Thi.s can be achieved by prograrnning the distance from the present position of
of tool
t Distance to zero point of coordinate system to be set
a workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay as follows:
hlhen
- lt -
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the NC in accordance with the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cut a work piece into a shape on the drawing. Therefore' in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems must be set at the same position. To set the two coordinate systems at the same positlon, simple methods sha11 be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machlnings. Some examples are shown below: i) Using a standard point of the work.
Bring the Eool center to the standard point. And set the coordinate system specified by NC at this position.
Fixed
distancc
ii
ii)
Mountl"ng a workpiece
directly against the jig. Meet the tool center to the reference point. And set the coordinate system point specified by CNC at this position. Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined point from the reference point.
! tl
t'
I
iii)
shall
be
-L2-
c) How
to indicate command dimensions for moving the tool Absolute, incremental commands (See II-8.1) Coordinate values of comrnand for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute or incremental designation. i) Absolute coordinate values The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero point of the coordinate system, i.e. to the position of the coordinate values.
Tool
A (1s,60,40)
(1030,20)
Specify the tool movement from point A to point B by using the coordinate values of point B as follows:
G90X10.0Y30. 0220.0;
ii)
Incremental coordinate values Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position.
i..
e.i
v|,:
*:j;
#
__J
30
u$, ,/
movement
0;
_13_
4) Cutting speed
ll
,p^'% ,,1w,:.,*
i-----(2/
IL
L---
7//)
rool
Workpiece
----J
--t
I
The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in rpm unit. For example, when a workpiece having a diameter of 100 nn should be machined at a cutting speed of 80 nrm/nln, the cutting speed in rpm un.it is calculated to be approx. 250 rprn from N = 1000 V/nD. Therefore, specify the following:
S
250;
ATC magazine
I^lhen
necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool and the number 1s specified in the program, the NC selects the corresponding
is performed, it
is
tool. For example, when No.01 is assigned to a drilling tool and the tool is stored at No.0l of the ATC magazine, the tool can be selected by specifying:
T01
-L4-
g
F
6) Command for machi.ne operations ----- Miscellaneous function (See II-11) When machinlng is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed coolant. For this purpose, on-off operations of spindle motor and
Spindle rotation
Coolant
/l
onloff
Workpiece
The function of specifying rhe on-off operations of the components of the machine is called the miscellaneous function. In general, the function i-s specified by an M code. For example, when M03 is specified, the spindle is rotated clockwise at the
7) Program
configuration (See II-12) A group of commands givpn to the NC for operating the machine is called the program. By specif)'ing the conmands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle notor is turned on and off. In the program, specify the conmands in the sequence of act.ual tool movements.
Block
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number for discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number for discriminating each program is cal1ed the program number The block and the program have the following configurations.
*-
ft
*.
_ 15 _
a)
Block
Block
cR
numDer
preparatory
Interpolation
funltion
function
End of
block
Each block consists of a sequence number for indicating the NC operatlon sequence at the beginnlng of the block, and a CR code for lndicating the end of the block. b) Prograrn
Program number
Block
BIock
Bloc.k
M3O CR
end of program
Normally, a program number is speclfied after the CR code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02, M30) is specified at the end of the program.
-15-
'r.
c)
Mrin program
I
I
-----l
I I
M98Pl@1
I I
I
-io'oo'
I
Scbpiogrrm#l
----r
Program for hole
#l
M98P'1002
I
I
-/ --
Ntsg
Subprogram #2
M98P1001
I I
I
---l- or ooz
----"1
Lryg_
_ ____J
Hole
Hob *1
#l
'\c
Hole
#2
Hole #2
When
machining of the same pattern appears at many portlons of a program, a Program for the pattern is created. This is calfed the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program ls ca1led the naln program. When a subprogram execution comnand appears during execution of the maln program, conutrands of the subprogran are executed. When execution of the subprogran is finished, the sequence returns to the main program.
8) Tool figure and tool motion by program (See II-14.1) a) Machining using the end of cutter Tool length compensation function. Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program in accordance wlth the tools.
Standard tool
-t
I
-t7-
Therefore, a standard tool is selected, anci the difference between the position of the nose of the standard tool and the position of the nose of eaeh tool used is measured in advance. B,v setting the rneasrrred value in the NC (data display and setting: see III-11), rnachining can be performed without alterjng the program even whcn the tool is changed. . This function is ca1led the tc'o]. length conpensation. b) Machining rrsJng the side of cutter Cutter radius compensation (See rr-14) Because a cutter has a radlrrs, the cente!- of the cutter path goes around the workpiece vrith the cutter radius deviated.
Cutter
If raditrs of cutters are stored in menory, the tool can be uroved by cutter radius apart from the machining part figure. Thls function is ca1led cutter radius compensation.
-18-
9) Tool movement range ----- Stroke check An area whieh the tool cannot enter can be specified by parameters. This functlon is called the stroke check.
I L_---l
I
l---
Tutte
r__
____r
L- .t'
7/////U//////////Z///////t
2
tl -Jl tTr'
l,al,
Rererencepoint
4V 2',, '44 t,
.- -t-i
*V
LJ
LJ
',
:l - ---{
//rl-z7zzzrlzzzzrlz,.zzrzrrr2,
-19-
2.
CONTROLLED AXES
3 2
axes
Max. 4 axes
axes
(Note)
PMC
by an option.
2.2
Increment System
Maximum stroke
0.001
mm
0.0001 inch
0.00I
mm
0.001
0.0001 inch
99999.999
mm
deg
0.00f
9999.9999 inch
deg
deg
99999.999
In increment
systern 1/I0
ar
Least
command
increment
rur deg
Maximum stroke
0.000f
mm
0.00001 inch
0.000f
0.0001
0.00001 inch
deg
0.0001
Combined use
of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are functions that cannot be used between axes with different unit systems (circular interpolation, cutter radius compensati.on, etc.) For the incremen! system, see the machine tool builder's manual.
2.3
Maximum
-20-
3.
A number following address G determines the meaning of the cerned block. F^1 1^,'i6ft c enl,Ps Are divi ded into the rurruwrug Fr'^ tsr Lwo Lypes.
u Lvsev
- I Y"
Meaning
One-shot G code
Modal G code
same
(Example)
7_. ut Y-.
-. uvvL
t
t G
GO2
CW
c03 c04
G09
CW
Exact stop
00
n^+^ ud Ld ^^*+i-- r!r5 DE L L
GLO
cll
G
17.
GIB
ZX plane selection
Y
cl9
G20
/. n l2nc
ir!l
qp lparr
.'-^L flruLr
mm
on
T**,,f rrrPuL
r\)
uLt
06
1
Input in
c28
00
G29 G30
point return
-2r-
i:.i
i/
il'
llllj
ll,.lt
illit,,
G code
G31
Group
00
Function
iil
,lii, r,j.rlti
i
Skip function
Thread cutting
c33
G39 G40
0l
00
ii.,i' iil
G4i
G42
Cutter compensation left cutter comPensation right Tool length compensation * direction Tool length compensation - direetion Tool length compensation cancel
Scaling cancel
G43 G44
08
c49
G50
l1
G51
Gf1+
S
caling
Work coordinate svstem I selection Work coordinate system 2 selection Work coordinate system 3 selection
L4
c55
Gfo
c58
G59
I,iork coordinate
sY
stem 5 selection
c60
G61
G62
c63
*tat*
c65
GOO
-.*
Ilacro
comman-d-
00
Macro call,
F1acro --*
modal call
\
c68
la LL
LO
G69
LZ -
G code
G73
uruuP
Porb ! svA Arillino ur rrrrrrS
Func t i on
nrrnla L)Lrc
Gl4
tr/O GBO
Fine boring
Canned
c8l
G82
GB3 GB4 GB5
Drilling Drilling
09
c86
G87
solut.e
conmand
not aot
G94
03
lncrement.al command 00
Programming
Foorl nor
minrrt-o
05
c95
Gvd
\
l0
Return to initial
G99
(Note l) G codes marked \ are initial G codes when turning power on. For G20 and G2l, the G code before turning power off remains. G00 or G0l can be selected by parameter setting. ftr^rrn ara (Note 2) T LUUEJ UIF E;rUUy OO aro nnl- mnd: I . Therr ere only effective in the u -^A^rlrsJ ^ block in which they are specified. (Note 3 ) If a G code not listed on the table of G codes is i--..ts+^r v! utru ional tLIPULLEUT G code not specified in the system is commanded, an alarm (llo.0l0) is
(Note 4) A number of G codes can be specified in the same block. l'lhen more than one G code of the same group is specified, the G code specified later (Note 5) If. any G code of group 0t is specified in a canned cycle mode, che canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the GB0 condj-tion is entered. However a G code of group 0i is not affected by any of the (Note 6) A G code is displayed from each group.
canned cycle G codes.
di
sp
lay ed .
is effective.
-23-
4.
ii
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Positioning (G00)
4.1
G00
I
I
A tool
Format
GOO
specifies positioning.
moves
absolute command or to a position specified distance from the current with an incremental comnand at a rapid traverse rate.
IP-;
system
with
pos
an {
;
i t ion
where lP-: Cornbination of optional axis address (of X, y, Z, A, B, C) as x-Y-z-A-.. . This nanual uses this notation hereinafter ; : End of block (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code) This manual uses this notatoin hereinafter. - Non linear interpolation type posltioning Positioning is done with each axis independently. Tool path generally does not become a straight line.
Starting point
o+------J
g-.
Eno potnt
(Note 1) The rapid traverse rate in the G00 coumand is set for each axis independently by the machine tool builder (parameter No. 0518 to No. 0521). Accordingly, the rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a b1ock. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the in-position. (See Note 2). (Note 2)'rln-position" means that the feed motor is withln the specified range. (This range is determined by the roachine tool builder) (Parameter No. 0500 to No. 0503).
-24-
4.2
final
one
point
O+_--__J
End point
to left).
are set by the parameteT (No. 204 - 2O7z An overrin-and--a pos-itionii[direction P0STNI - 4, No. 29: G60X, Y, Z, 4). Even when a commanded positioning direction
G60o
B _\_6_;
coincides with that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point. (s, B, y, 6 = X, Y, Z or which one of additional axis A, B, C, U, V, W. Simultaneous 3 axis is option. )
Overrun
End point
Temporary
no Single Direction Positioning is effected in Z. (Note 3) No Single Direction Positioning is effected in an axis for which no voerrun has been set by the parameter. (Note 4) When the move distance 0 is commanded, the Single Direction PosLtioning is not performed. (Note s) The direction set by the parameter is not effected by mirror image. (Note 6) The Single Direction Positioning does nor apply to the shift motion in the canned cycles of G76 and G87.
-25-
4.3
F; GOl P This comiland i-ctuates the linear interpolation mode. The values of lP define the distance of tool travel which will be conducted in absolute or incremental mode, according to the current status of G90/G91. The feed rate is set to a cutting feed speed commanded by F code and is a modal data.
(Program example) (c91) GOl x200. 0
YI00. 0 F200. 0
Y axis
00.0
X lxis
(Start point)
200.0
The feed rate conmanded by the F code is ueasured along the tool path. not coruranded, the feed rate is regarded as zero. (Note 1) The feed rate of, each axis directlon is as follows. o B Gole B
Feed Feed
If ir is
Fc = *
. t
. t ' f ' t
y=ffi
(Note 2) The feed rate of the roa"r, axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (the unit is decimal point position) G9l cOi B-90. 0 F300.
:
(Start point)
@nd point)
\Rotation
-26-
i,
!
4.4
The
bel-ow
}T }F
c,8 ,33it
Arc on Y-Z plane
,R tr p
^'
crs
r[!]r
tJ
Date to be given
I
Command
Meaning
Plane selection
trI /
Specification of arc on
XY plane
cl8 ci9
L
an.,
c03
Counterclockwise direction
End
(CCW)
position
G91 mode
4
Arc radius
5
Feed rate
The view is from the positive direction of the Z axis (Y axis or X axis) to the negative direction on XY plane (ZX plane or \Z plane) in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system.
ir.
I \\
----\ I
lcor\
"o'
\\co3
G02\
\
G17
-27-
The end point of an arc ls specified by address X, Y or Z, and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the coordinate of the end point which is viewed from the start point of the arc is specifled. The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the X, Y, and Z axes, respeetively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and G9 I, as shor,rn below.
End
point (x, y)
xl
nnin t
| lt
z1
t_
I
j
Center
tart
nni 11i
Center
I-_--l
Start point
I,
The
be signed according to the direction. radius can be specified with address'R instead of specifying the center by I, J ,orK. The command format is as follows:
J , and K must
c02
In this case, two types of arcs (one arc is less than 180o, and the other is more than 180") are considered, as shown in the figure below. hrhen an arc exceeding 180o is commanded, the radius must be specified with a negative value.
For arc (!) (1ess than 180')
c9 (Examp le
q
c03'
).
i8o')
F300. 0;
r=50mm
End point
\-..._
--/
-28-
i!.il!,1:
ir'r.1; I
l:i,,,,";. 'i.
'
'
l, l,t:-t1,
(Program examPles)
Y axis
00
60 40
p'
90 r20 140 The above tool path can be programmed as follows: l) In absolute programming x200.0 Y 40.0 z0 G92 ; c90 c03 x140.0 Y100.0 r-60.0 F300. : # c02 x120.0 Y 60.0 I=50.0 ;
0
X axis 200
G92 X200.0 Y 40.0 Z0 t c90 G03 xr40.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ; c02 xl20.0 Y 60.0 R50.0 ; 2) In incremental programming c9l c03 x-60.0 Y 60.0 r-60.0 F300. ; c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 r-50.0 ; or c91 c03 X-60.0 Y 60.0 R 60.0 F300. i c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 R 50.0 ; The feed rate in circular interpolation is equal to the feed rate specified by the F code, and the feed rate along the arc (the tangegtial feed rate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feed rate. (Note 1) I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted. (Note 2) If X, Y, and Z are all omitted or if the end point is located at the same posi-tion as the start point, and when the center is commanded by I, J, and K, an arc of 360o (a complete circle) is assumed. c02I ; (A complete circle) when nTs-@ an arc of 0o is programmed. GO2R ; (The cutter does not move.) (Note 3) The error between the specified feed rate and the actual tool feed rate ' is *2 - or less. However, this feed rate is measured along the arc after the cutter compensation iS applied. (Note 4) If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified'simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignored. (Note 5) If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm j,s displayed.
4.5
Helical Cuttins (G02, c03)
or
Helical
interpolation
is
enabled by specifylng another axis which moves interpolation by circular commands. That is,
rr\
ur/
,G02. tGo3J
Lr
!U
t t
rR tI ,RtJ--
}Y lv
-29-
interpolation
command
axes.
An F command specifies a feed rate along a circular arc. rate of the linear axis is as follows:
does
Tool path
The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.
(Note l) Cutter compensation 1s applied only for a circular arc. (Note 2) Tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a helical cutting is commanded. (Note 3) The additional axes can be specified as not the circular axes but the linear axes.
-30-
4.6
Equal lead straight threads can be cut with a G33 command. The command shown below is used for thread cutting and the lead is specified numerically following address F. In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path 1n rough cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when the positlon coder mounted on the spindle detects a I-turn signal, threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is unchaged for repeated thread cutting. NoEe that the spindle speed must remain constant from
roilph crrttins !vu6rr th-^..-L L!r!vu6tr
f {-.'^L IMIDTT
LULLflr6.
^..!+ jh-
'I
l!
In general, the lag of the servo system, leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To compensate for this, a threading length somewhat longer than required should be specified. Programmable lead legnth is as follows:
Least
lrfafrin innrrf
f -^r lluL,
inCOrt.eCt thread leaO will OCCur. I etc. will produce somewhat incorrect
command increment
Lead range
0.001
mm
Fl F1
0.0001
Tnnh i nnrr
l-
F50000 F50000
mm) mm)
mm
0.000I inch
0.00001 inch
coder revolutions
spindle speed (rpn) or inch Maximum feed rate: mm/min or inch/mj,n The smaller value of the maximum command value in the feed per minute or of the maximum feed rate subj ect to restriction by motors and machine tool. Allowab le number of position coder revolutions: 4000 rpm (position coder A) 6000 rpm (position coder B) (Note I ) Spindle speed is read continuously from the position coder mounted on the spindle and converted into the feed raEe per minute to feed the tool. (Note 2) Feedrate override is applied to the converted feedrate, but is fixed to
Thread lead
:
p.
(Note
(Noce
1002.
3)
4
The converted feed rate applied with the feed rate clamp. The feed hold is ineffective during thread cutting. If the feed hold button is pushed during thread cuEting, the tool stops at the end point of the block immediately following the block in which Ehread cutting is completed.
5.
FEED FUNCTIONS
Rapid Traverse
5.1
Positioning is done in rapi<i There is no need to program the parameter (parameter No. Rapid traverse rate can be
panel:
motion by the positjoning command (G00). rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set in 05lB to No. 0521) (per axis). overridden by a switch on the machine operator I s
F0, 25, 50, 1002. F0: A eonstant speed set by parameter (data No. 0533)
5.2 are
Feed speed
of llnear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02, G03) with numbers after the F code.
speed constant control
In cutting feed' it is controlled so that speed of the tarrgential dlrectlon is always the same commanded speed.
5.2.1 Tangential
Starting point
*--
\ \E-
End point
./
\ /t\
rr
L_J
Fx Starting
point
Fz
End point
For arc
F:
Fx:
Fz:,
Feedrate along tangential dlrection Feedrate component along X-axis direction Feedrate component along Z-axls direction
F
G;ryfrt
cuttlng feed rate uPper liurit can be set as parameter (data No. actual cutting feed rate (feed rate with override) is conrmanded0527). rf the exceedlng the upPer limit, it i-s clanped to a speed not exceedlng the upper linit value. The clamped va'lues is set in mr/rnin or inch/urln. Except during acceleration or deceleration, the cNC arithmetlc error for the command value of the feed rate is hrithin +22. This error is applied to the tine measured for the tool to move a dlstanG of 500 mm or more'under stationary ) conditions.
-32-
5.2.3
(mm/min or inch/min)
Specify feed per revolution mode by G95. Following F, direetly specify the feed of tool per spindle revolution. It is necessary to mount a position coder on the spindle. c95 is modal. After G95 is specified, it is effective until G94 (feed per minute) is specified.
Feed per spindle revolution
5.2.4
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
(Note) When the rotation speed of the position coder is I rpm or less, the feed rate becomes nonunif orm. In cases where rnachining is not adversely affected by feed rate nonuniformity, the position coder can be used at I rpm or less. Though the degree of nonuniformity differs according to the case, the degree becomes large as the rotation speed becomes low under I rpm.
5.2.5 One-digit
Specifying a one-digit number (1 to 9) following F produces a feed rate set correspondingly to that number. The feed rate is set in advance as a parameter for each number. F0 produces rapid traverse speed. Rotating the manual pulse generator with the F l-digit feed rate change switch on the machine operatorfs panel ON, increases or decreases the feed rate for the currently selected number. Fmax i The increase or decrease of feed rate AF = per scale of manual pulse I UUX
generat,or, where, Fmax l:
Fmax
F code feed
feed rate upper limit for Fl-F4 (parameter setEing No. 583) 2: feed rate upper limit for F5-F9 (parameter setting No. 584) value of l-127 (parameter setting No. 216) X:any
-33-
The feed rate set or altered is kept even while the power 1S feed rate is displayed on the CRT. When plural manual pulse generators are available, use the generator without fail.
Format of G94 and G95 is shown below.
Feed per minute
Meaning Address
off.
The current
G code
G94
c95
Override
Clamp
Value
5.3 Override
Refer to machine tool builderfs manual for detai,ls of overrides.
a
5.3.1
Feed rate
The per minute feed (G94) can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs panel by: 0 to 1502 (per every IO7") . Feed rate override cannot. be applied to functions in which overrj-de 1s . inhibited.
5.3.2
Rapid traverse override
override
Rapid traverse rate can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs panel by:
!'0,
0533)
! r
i i
-34-
5.4 Automatic
Acceleration/Deceleration
Acceleration and deceleration 1s performed when st.arting and ending movement, resulting in smooth start and stop. Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feed rate changes, so change in speed is also srnoothly done. It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration when
programming.
Rapid traverse:
Liner acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameEer set per axis) (Dara No. 0522 to 0525) Cuttlng feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter set conmon to al1 axes) (Data No. 0530) Jogging feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter ser per axis) (Data No. 0601 to 0604)
Rate after acceleration/deceleration Rate after interpolation
control
Pulse
distribution (Interpoiation)
Acceleration /deceleration
Servo motor
con!rol
R.Bte after
interpolation
Rapid traverse
F'
RMAX.
Rapid traverse
T -R
deceleration time
constant
0s 2s)
Accelerat ion,/
t* -l t*"
-35-
JOG feed
F1
*Ty
Time TJ
Fr: Low feed rate after " deceleration (dara No. 0548)
For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the acceleration or deceleration is applied in feed start and feed stop, automatically with a time constant so that the machine tool system is not jarred. Therefore, this need not be considered when programming. Because of automatic acceleration and deceleration, corners are not cut sharply. In this case' cieceleration command (G04;) rnust be commanded at the corner to cut For example, if the tool moves along the X axis only in one block and along the Z axis in the next block' the feed rate for the X axis decelerates while motion along the Z axis accelerates and the actual tool path is as follows.
Insert a deceleration command here
sharp.
'/
Programmedpath
If the decele.ration command is j-nserted, the actual tool path matches the propath. The faster the feed rate and the larger the acceleration/ decereration tiine constant, the larger the error at the corner. In circular lnterpolation, the actual arc radius is smaller than that of the prograuuned arc. (See the Appendix. 3) This error can be mininized by rnaking the acceleration/deceleration time constant of feed rate sma11.
grarnmed
-36-
(Note
I)
The following chart shows feed rate changes between blocks information specifying different types of movement. New block
Prev ious -----_r_...--. block
of
-------\
Posi t ioning
x
Feed
Not moving
x
Posi t
Feed
ioning
x x
Not moving
zeTo.
for work-
r'Nnro I ) rrTn-nncigiontt means that the feed motor is within the specif ied range. (This range is determined by machine tool builder.)
5.5.2 Exact l.lhen G6 I
is commanded, deceleration is applied to the en? point of cutting block and in-position check is performed per block thereafter. This G6l is valid till G61+ (cutting mode) , G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping mode) is
commanded.
deceleration at the end point of each block thereafter is not performed, and cutting goes on to the next block. This command is valid till G6t (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded. However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in-position check is performed in the following case; I) Posj-tioning mode (G00, c60) 2) Block with exact stop check (G09) 3) Next block is a block without movemenc cornmand
5.5.4 Tapping mode (G63) When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded as l00Z)' and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not decelerate at the end
of block to transfer to the next block. This command is valid till G6I (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cut-ting mode) is commanded.
cutter compensation, cutting feed rate is automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time of the corner is thus controlled so as no! to increase. This command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is comnanded. If cutting is made at a programmed feedrate at inner circular region during the execuEion of the cutter compensation, Ehe cutter may be overloaded to rough cut surfaces. This function automatically decelerates the tool movement to lighten the cutter load at these region so as to obtain clean cut surfaces. 1) Automatic override at inner corners a) Operating conditions The feedrate is automatically overridden when all the following conditions are satisfied in both blocks before and after a corner. i) G code of group 0I is G0I, G02, or G03 ii) The offset quantity is not 0 in the offset mode. i.ii) The offset is made inside at a corner to be machined. iv) An axis moves along the offset plane. v) Neither G4I nor G42 command is included in the subsequent block. vi) Neither G4l nor G42 command is included in the previous block, or the block is not started up, if either command is included. vii) An inner corner is smaller than 0 preset by a parameter. The angle is judged about the programmed path. i) Straight line - straight line
Programmed path
ii)
Straight line-arc
iii)
iv) Are -
arc
-38-
t'lhen 0 5 0p, the corner is regarded as inside. 0p value is set by parameter (No. 0215) (2S0pSl78 unir.) rf I is almost, equal to gp, the decision may include an error wirhln b) Motion area When a corner is judged as inside,
0.001".
the feedrate is overridden from the distance range within Le of the block on this side from the intersect.j-on of the corner to the distance range within Ls of the next block from the intersection of the corner. Distances Ls and Le are linear distances from a point on the cutter center path to the intersection of the corner. Le and Ls are set by parameters (No. 0580 and 0581), respectively.
hogrammed path
.-4:
.,,rrA, uviltcr -.rh Lurlsr ^ohro? plrL L -a/ \\- f
Programnred path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to b. In case of an arc, this override function to the end point of a block is effective when the following condition is satisfied. 1) The distance is within Le. 2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or in the next quadrant.
end point of a block is effective when the following condition is satisfied. i) The distance is within Ls. 2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or in the next quadrant.
-39-
(ExarnpIe)
In case of disc
/'/"/a,i\
\,V
\v
\h
'/
'/
",r.'l'r,
./
L,l
I
Progranrnrerd path
Regarding program @ of an arc, the feed.rate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d. (Note) Ls and Le are the distances along the arc in case of 10/fl series, while they are the distances between point a and b and between c and d along the straight line in case of 0 series.
c) Overri-de quantity The override guantity is set by parameter No. 0214 l<override quanrity (I7. srep)s100(%) It is also effective for the dry run and FI digit coumand. In case of an F4 digit command, actual feedrate becomes F x (internal corner override) x (feedrate override) d) Whether internal corner override is effective or not Whether the internal corner is overridden or not i,s selectable by G codes. G62 is added to G61 and G64 in group 15 as shown in the fo11owing table. These G codes are also related to whether the exact stop check mode is effective or not.
Exact stoD check
G61 mode
c62 c64
fect ive
Ineffective
(Note 1) G64 functions when povrer is turned on or under the clear condition. (Note 2) Specify G09, if you want to check the exact stop in G62 mode. (Note 3) The internal circular cutt.ing feedrate change described in (2) always effective without being affected by these G codes.
1e
-40-
;tt'
t.
I,
ts I
b i,
Internal circular cuEting feedrate change In case of the internal offset circular cutting, the feedrate 1n the programmed path is se! to the specified F by setting actual feedrate to F x Rc/Rp (where, Rc: Cutter center path radius Rp: progranmed rbdius) wirh reference to the specified feedrate (F). This change is also effective for dry run and Fl digit command.
(Example 1)
ogrammed path
However, if
Rc is very small as compared with Rp, nc/Rp = 0, causing the cutter to stop. Accordingly, the minimum reduction ratio (lDR) is set to nake the actual feedrate. F x (MDR) when Rc/npSlOn. MDR is set by parameter No. 02i3.
I SI,TDR ( 1Z sreP) S100
This is also applicable to Fl digit and dry run. The reduction ratio of the automatic override at internal corners is not affected by MDR. (Note 1) If the automatic override at internal corner overlaps the internal circular cutting, actual feedrate becomes as folfows. FxRc/Rpx(override at corner)x(feedrate override) 5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop
(G04)
With the G04 cornmand, shifting to the next block can be delayed. Shifting to the next block can be delaved for the commanded minutes.
Format
Per second
c94c04
{:. A
is
dwe11
t
orX
-}
When
P or X
9999.999 sec In incrernent system 1/10, 9999.9999 sec) omiEted, t.his command (G04;) is turned to exacE stop command.
seconds
-41 -
6. REFERENCE
The reference
POINT
point is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can be moved by the reference point return function. easily
Y
I
o
Re ference poin
6.1 Automatic
6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28) G28rP _; This command specifies automatic return
to the reference point for the specified axes. IP is an intgrmediate coordinate and is conmanded by absolute or incrementaTvalue. Thg intermediate coordinate specified in thls block are stored in memory. The G2B block is used to position the tool at the interurediate point of all specified axes at the rapid traverse speed, then move to the reference point at the rapid traverse rate. rf the machine lock has not been set, the Reference Return lamp goes on. Positioning to the interrnediate point or to the refererice point is done at rapid traverse rate of each axis. (Non linear positioning). rn general, this command is usec for automatic tool changing (ATC). Therefore, for safety, the cutter rad.ius compensation, ." should b" "".r".11"d (Note 1) when the G28 command is specified when manual return to the reference polnt has not been performed after the power has been turned on; the movement from the intermediate point is the same as in manual return to the reference point. In this ease, the direction from the intermediate point is equal to that for return to reference point selected by paraDeter (No. 0003 ZMX, ZI,IR, ZIIZ). (Note 2) The coordinate value specified in G28 command is memori zed for all axes as is tlte coordinate value of the intermediate point. In othr words, for axes not specified in the G28 block, the cooidinate value memorlzed for intermediate point earlier is Eaken as the coordinate value of the intermediate point for the axj-s.
Example:
NIXI. OZ2.O;
N2G28X40.0; N3G28260.0;
-42-
(G29)
This command positions the tool at the cornmanded position via the intermediate point of a conunanded axj-s . In general, it is commanded immediately following in" cz8 ccmmand or G30. For incremental programming, the cornmand value specifies the incremental value from the intermediate Point. In the G29 block operation, all commanded axes are positioned at thg intermediate point defined by the previous G2B or G30 corunand, and then to the commanded point from the intermediate point at the rapld traverse speed. Application example of G28 and G29
Reference poinl
G29P
_;
Tool is changed
ai R point.
Intermediate point
X (rnm)
0
300
I 300
800
(Program A to B)
G29X1800.0Y300.0; (Program B to C) As shov,rn in the example, the prograuuer is not required to calculate the actual nove distance from the intermediate point to the reference point. (Note l) llhen the work coordinate system is changed after the tool reaches the reference point through the intermediate point by the G28 or G30 com-
{
Si
s
g
S.
mandr'the intermediate point also shifts to a ner^r coordinate system. If G29 is then commanded, the tool moves to the commanded position through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the new coordinate system.
6.2
A reference point is fixed on the rnachine tool and the cutter can be moved to that point by the reference point return function. The G27 reference point return check functlon checks whether or not the program returns to the reference point normal1y, as programmed.
G27lF : This comnnnd-positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the reference point, the reference point return lamp lights up and the next block is executed. However, if the position reached by the tool is not the reference Point, an alarm is displayed.
-43-
(uote t) In an offset mode, the position to be reached by the tool with the G27 cornmand is the posiEion obtained by adding the offset va1ue. Therefore, if the position with the offset value added is not the reference point, the lamp does not light up, but an ararm is displayed instead. Usually, cancel offsets before G27 is commanded. (Note 2) when the machine tool system is an inch system wit.h metric input, the reference poinr return lamp may also light up even if the programmed position is shifted from the reference point by lp. This is because the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than its least command increment. (Note 3) If G27 is commanded with machine lock on, the reference point return check is not done.
6.3 2nd,3rd,4th
(P2\
c30 {P3) tl
lP4.r
II -
_-t
P2,
P4: Selection of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point If omitted, the 2nd reference point is selected.
This com-and returns the commanded axis to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point automatically through the specified position. Each reference point return LED lights after completion of the return. The positions of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point are determined by presetting the distance from the reference point as a pararDeter (Dat.a No. 0735 to No. 0738, No. 0780 to,A787) during field adjustment. This funcrion can be used after the first reference point return has been completed. This function is the same as G28 reference point return, except that this function returns the tool to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point instead of the primary reference point. If G29 1s commanded imrnediately following G30, the tool is positioned to the point commanded by G29 through the intermediate point commanded by G30. This motion is the same as thac by the G29 command following the G28 command. The G30 command is generally used when the automatic tool changer (ATC) position differs from the reference point. (Note I) At least one manual reference point return or automatic reference point return must be performed by the G28 command after the power supply is turned on, prior to issuing G30 command. (Note 2) Like the G2B command, cancel the cutter compensation, and tool length offset before thi-s command is executed.
-44-
7,
COORDINATE SYSTEM
the position to be reached by the tool is taught, the CNC moves the tool to that position. The position to be reached by the tool is given as'a coordinate value in a coordinate system. The position to be reached by the tool id commanded with a coordinate value of one of the coordi-nate systems, as required. The coordinate value consi-sts of one component for each program axis. If there are t.hree program axes (X, Y, and Z), the coordinate value is expressed as follows:
I^lhen
I 40.0
a
Position of
Since the number of program axes, that is, the number of components for the coordinate value, varies with the machine tools, the coordinate value is referred to as IP in this manual. 7.1
Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, GS4-G59)
A coordinate system used for work machining is called the work coordinate system. The work coordinate system is set by either of the following method: l) Using G92 command. 2) Using G54 ro G59 command. In case of 1),'a work coordinate system is established by specifying coordinate values after G92. In case of 2), six work coordinate systems are preset from CRT/MDI panel as setting data and any of them can be selected by G54 to G59 command.
7.1.'l
Setting
1) Establishing coordinate
G92]p
Thi;-;*","nd-Lstablishes rhe work coordinare sysrem so that a certain point. of the tool, for example the tool tip, becomes Ip in the established work coordinate system. A.y subsequent absolute commands use the DosiEion in Ehis work coordinaEe
system.
-45-
(Exarnple 1)
Meet the programming start point with the tool tip and command G92 at the start of program.
(Exanple 2)
c92X25.2223.0;
Coordinate system setting by the G92X600.021200.0, command (When a start point is based on the base point of the tool holder)
As shovrn above, G92 is also used to align the base point of the tool holder with the start poinf and to establish a coordinate system at the beginning of the program. If an absolute command is issued, the base point moves to the commanded position. In order to move the tool tip to the comrnanded position, the difference from the tool tip to the base point is compensated by tool length
offset. (Note 1) If a coordinaie system is set with the G92 comrnand in offset mode, the coordinate system is set so that. the position before tool length compensation is applied becomes that specified by G92. (Note 2) In the cutter radius compensation, offset is temporarily cancelled by a
G92 command.
-46-
' 'lj:.:i
+,#.;
j.;
If rtlrr is seE to the parameter APRS (No. 0010), the work coordinare systeu is se! automatically when the manual reference poinc return has been completed. In this case' set the distance o, B, and y to the parameters No. 0708, No. 0709 and No.0710 so that the machine position (top of the standard tool or the standard point of holder) after manual reference point return becomes X = o, Y = B and Z = "y. It is equivalent to command the following.
G92X a
Zy;
7.1
.2 Setting work coordinate system - Method by G54 - G59 l) Setting work coordinate system Six work coordinaEe systems can be set. These six systems are decided by setting the distances of each axis from the machine zero point to the zero points of the coordinate systems, (i.e. the work zero point offset value, by using the CRT/MDI panel).
Work coordinate
system 4
Work coordinate
system
1
Work coordinate
system 2
Work coordinate
systern 3
EOF54
Work coordinate
system 6
ZOFSI: Work zero point offset value of work coordinaEe system I Z0FS2: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 2 Z0FS3: Work zero poi.nt offset value of work coordj-nate system 3 Z0FS4: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 4 Z0FS5: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 5 Z0FS6: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 6
re
-47-
2)
Shifting work coordinate svstem Six work coordinate systems can be shifted bY a specified value (external work zero point offset value).
Work coordinate
systern
Work coordinate
systern 3
ZOF'S
ZOFS
ZOFS
ZOFS I
Work coordinate
system
5
ZOFS
I'XOFS
Machine zero point
ZOFS
Wotk coordinate
systenr 6
EXOFS:
Elternal work zero poig,t offset value can be changed in three ways. a Using CRT/MDI panel Q] Using program (cl0) (f Using external work c oordinate system shift function. An input sign enables you to change work coordinate systems. Refer to machine tool builder's manual for detiils. (Note l) The external work zero point offset amount can be set within the range of 0 and +7.999 nm or 0 and +0. 799 inch for every axis. (Note 2) When G92 i.s sp&ifi.ed afrer a shlft value has been specified, the shift value is ignored.
(Exarnple) when G92x100.0280.0;
is courmanded, a work coordinate system in which tool position is x = 100.0, z - 80.0 is establishei, irrespective present of set shift value.
7.1.3
Selecting work coordinate system (Gb4 Gsg) Six coordinate systems proper to the machine tool are set in advance, permitting the selecrion of any of rhem by G54 ro G59. G54 L{ork coordinate system I G55 . I^/ork coordinate system 2 G56 . Worli coordinate system 3 G57 Work coordinate system 4 G58 Work coordinate system 5 G59 . Liork coordinate system 6 The six coordinate systems are determined by setting distances (work zero offset varues) in each axis from the machine i"to point to their respective zero points
-48-
,
.
, . rr=:,;f;_;
i:!;'. I :.;
Example: G55G00X20.02100. 0;
,,1.
In the above example, positioning is made to positions ({=20.0, Z=100.0) and ({=40.0e Z=20.0) in work coordinate sysrem 2. Where the tool is positi.oned on the machine depends on work ,"ro poirrt offset
values.
Work
Work coordinate System I
4
40.0220.0;
0.0
20.0
systemlto6are established after point reference return after Ehe po!r'er. is turned on. When the power is turned onr G54 coordinate system is selected.
eoordinate
7.1.4
When
(Gs4
G59)
command
can be used to
: External work zero point offset value. DL= 6j-f I to 6: Correspond to work coordinate system 1 to 6. P) = 6fL : Work zero point offset value of each axis. lP Dd :' Ci'l 2) Using G92
P/ = Gs-'(
ce2P By this command, six !/ork coordinate systems move to creatf a new work coordinate system so that the tool tip becomes the coordinate value IP commanded by G92. Since the distance shifteC at this time is added to al& subsequent work zero point offset values, all work coordinate systems move by Ehe sarne distance.
Y'
_;
P"rJfT
tool is positioned ar (200, 160) in G54 mode, work coordinate system I (X' - Y') shifted by vector A is
created.
100
200
i{hen creating a new work coordinate system with the G92 command, a certain point of the tool becomes a certain coordinate value; therefore, the new work
coordinate system can be determined irrespective of the old work coordinate system. If the G92 command is used to determine a start point for machining based on workpieces, a nerd coordinate system can be created even if there is an error in the old work coordinate system. If the relative relationship among the G54 to G59 work coordinate systems are correctly set at the beginni-ng, all work coordinate systems become new coordinate systems as desired.
-49-
I 2000
G54 work
coordinate
system
z'
t
f\
L'
-Z
coordinate system
If G92X600.021200.0; is commanded,(shov,rn ia the dlagram above) when the G54 work coordinate system is specified, the G55 work coordinate system is set in so that the black point on the tool shor,un in the diagram above becomes position (600.0, f200.0); provided that the relative relationship between the G54 and G55 work coordinate systems is set correctly. Therefore, :ln loading pallets aE te/o different positions, the two pallet eoordinate systems are set as G54 and G55 work coordinate systems. hrhen the coordinate system of one pallet is moved by the G92 command, the coordinate system of the other pa1let is also moved in the same manner, provided that the relative relationship of the two \^/ork coordinate systems is set correctly. Accordingly, a wbrkpiece placed on two pallets can be machined with the same program by merely specifying either G54 or G55.
7.1.5 Setting
I
) Display -pr."" a) l-oFSETl. b) Press FFacfr tey to display ttlnlork Coordinates" screen
"woRKtt. )
-50-
c) The work
zero point offset amount is displayed on two pages: press k"y, and select a required page.
"PAGE',
t{Xt<
CIRDII.fITES
MTR
Y
(E1B 1.810 f.
_ax
01
Ml.
z
A X
@,x
z
A
MTA
6X
z
A
z
A ADRS.
lsr.srll,,*-1 tr*.ln
The following is displayed on each page. i) Page t 00: Shift amount of work coordj.nate system 01: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system I (c54) 02: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 2 (G55) 03: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 3 (C56) '.\
11:S:45
l.rDt
2)
11/ Eage I 04: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate sistem i (c57) 05: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system 2 (c58) 06: Work zero point offset amount of work coord.inate system 3 (c59) Set t ing a) Adjust the cursor to the number to be changed or set. Step I
Cursor Press [Tl E. cursor
Page.
next
A continuous push on this key moves -the cursor. Move over the Pa8e, and the screen will be changed to the screen on the the
b)
7.1.6
Step 2 Key inl No. IINUMBER ll mTur-l .l,.[ z I or [E_l T:y in.E: l-y (Note l) rhe workEoordiiii'tE system range of 0 - +7.999 mmor0
within the
It is possible to know the offsec amount by reading the of ables tt2500 to ll2806 for rhe work offser amount, and it valuealso system variis modify the offset amount by substituting a value for system variable possible to /ll.
System variables
51
Work
offset
{t2500
amount
It2sor
I
t
c59
Y
{t2506
112600
It260L I
112606
c59
Z
ll27 00 ll27 0r
5
c59
4
ll27 06
#2800
ll28Ar
t
c59
#2806
7.2
A plane in which circular interpolation and cutter compensation is performed can be selected with one of th,ese G codes: ci7 . XY plane ZX plane c18 .
If GI7, Gl8, or Gl9 is not specified in a b1ock, the plane remains unchanged.
(Example)
c19.
YZ plane
G18X
The movement command is not related to the plane selectj-on. For example, when G177. ; is specified, the Z axis does not exist in the XY plane. OnIy the XY plane is selected and Z axLs moves independently of the
plane.
-52-
,:i#;!ri
' :,t,::-
B.
8.1
There are t\,to ways to corunand travels of the axes; the absolute command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed; in the incremental conunand, move distance of the axis itself is programmed. , G90 and G91 are used to couunand absolute or incremental command,
100.0
For the above figure, incremental conmand prograrnming results in: c9l x-60.0 Y40.0; While absolute command programnring results in: c90 x40.0 Y70.0;
8.2
G code
c20
c21
Millimeter
0.001
mn
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program. The unit systems of the following itens can be changed with G codes: (l) Feedrate comrnanded by F code (2) Positional command (3) Offset value (4) Unit of scale for manual pulse generaEor (5) Ilovement distance in step feed (6) Some parameters (Note l) I^Ihen the power is turned oo, the NC status is the same as that held before the power r{as turned off. (Note 2) GzO and G2l must not be swltched during a program. (Note 3) When the machine unit and the input unit systems are different, the maxlmum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated. (Note 4) When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (c2l) and vice versa, the offset value must be reset according to the input unit.
I
-53-
8.3
This control can input numerical values with a decimal point. However, some addresses cannot use a decimal point. A decimal point may be used with rnm, inches or second values. The location of decimal point is mm, inch or second. ZL5.O 215 millimeters or Zl5 inches. F10.0 10 uun/min. or l0 inch/min. G04X1 . D,rell for one second The following addresses can be used with a decj-mal point iXrYrZrIrJrKrQ, R, 4-th, F. Use a parameter to select input method; whether to input by pocket calculator type input, or by the former type decirnal point input.
(Example )
Program
command
xl 000 xl 000.
000 mm 000 nm
(I{ote i) In the dwell comrLand, decimal point can be used wj-th address X but not with address P. (This is because P is also used for a sequence
(Note 2) The appropriate G code should be specified before the numerical values are specified {n one block. l) G20; (inch dimension) Xl.0G04;....... Because the value Xt.0 is not regarded as the number of seconds, buE the distance of motion (in inches), Xl0000G04 is assumed resulting in dwelling for f0 seconds. Indication also changes from 1.0 to 10.0 when G04 is input. G04Xt.0 .. This is regarded as G04X1000 and dwell is performed
number. )
tor a seconcl . (Note 3) There is a great difference in values with and without the decimal point, when programned by conventional decimal point progra'nming. G2L ; (rniillmeter dimensions)
]ll. ,!L
mm
..I
X0.0001 inch (Note 4) Values with and without a decimal point can be specified together. Xl000223.7;
xt.
mn
Xl inch
(Note 5) Valuef less than the least input increment are rounded off. When XL.23456 is specified, XI.234 is assumed in rnillimeter input and XL.2345 is assumed in inch inpuE. Also, the number of digits must not exceed the ma:<imum number of digits
a1lowed.
X10.Y22359;
This is an error because it exceeds B digits. This is not an error because it is within 8 disits.
Jq
$-.o"
':iit;'i'1ffi'
li*i'
(Note 6) When a number ryith a decimal point has been input, the number is converted into an integer of the least input increment.
Example:
t,_
X123400 (input in inches) XI2.34 This converted integer is checked for its number of digits. x123456.7 Xl23456700 (input in inch) An alarm occurs because the converted integer exceeds 8
Example:
digits.
-55-
FUNCTION
By specifying a numerical value following address S, a code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This ls mainly used to control the spindle speed. An S code can be comnanded in a block. Refer to the machlne tool bui-lder's manual for the number of digits com-andable with address S and the correspondence between the S codes and machine operations. Llhen a move corrmand and an S code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous executlon of the move cornmand and S function comnands. ii) Executtng S function comrnands upon completion of move cornmand execution. The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderrs specificatLons. In certain cases, these sequences nay be provided together in an NC machine. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool bullder for details. The spindle speed is controlled by address S and a following 2-digit number. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. (Note 1) htren a 2-digit S code is set in parameters and the 5-digit S code has been commanded, the loner two digits are available.
The spindle speed ls directly
number. The unit 9.1.1
S 2-digit code
-56-
a,-.;.*lr
10. TooL
FUNCTTON
(T
FUNCTTON)
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for the number of digits commandable with address T and Ehe correspondence between the T eodes and machine operations. When a move conmand and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the fol|owing two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move conunand and T function commands. (ii) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution. The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderts specifications. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. 1O.2 Tool Life Management
By specifying a 2-d,igitl4-digit numerical value following address ;, a BCD 2-digit l 4-digit code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This is mainly used to select tools on the machine.
Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency of use) for each group being specified. The function of accumulating the tool life of each group in use and selecting and using che next tool previously sequenced in the same group, is called the tool life management function.
1) Setting the tool life dara Tools used sequentially in each group and their respective tool life previously set by the following format tape in the cNC equipment.
Tape format
Meaning Prog ram number
are
____
?
c10T
_L
Pfo llowed by group No. (l to 128) Lfo llowed by tool life (l to 9999) (Note (l)
(2)
TAAAAH00D TAAAAH00D
H followed by tool length offset No. D followed by cutter compensation No. Tools are selected in the sequence of (1 through (2) ro (N).
T followed by tool
No.
(N)
group
;
t
End
End
-57 -
(i) Insert the aborze tape into the tape reader and load the tape in the EDIT mode, as wj.th an ordinary CNC tape. The program will be registered in the part program memory and will be made ready for display and editing. Part Program (ii) Perform a cycle srarr operation in storage & the AUTO mode to run the program. editine area The data will be stored in the tool life data area of the memory; at the (ij) AUTO mode same time, the already existing tool life data of all groups will be cancelled and the life counters will Presetting be cleared. Data once stored is not Display erased by turning the power off. Tool life data area (iii) Executing a cycle start operation in the TAPE mode instead of rhe operation of (i), stores the program contents directly from the tape onto the tool life data area. In this case, however, display and editing cannot be done as i_n (i). (Note) TAPE mode is not always prepared according to the machine tool builders in 0 series.
(iii)
TAPE mode
(Note l) Whether tool life is to be indicated by time (minutes) or by frequency, it is set by a parameter. (No. 0039-LCTH) (tlote 2) Tool nurnber is up to 4 digits. (Note 3) D and H codes are up to 254, No. of groups
I
L
No. of tools
r6
8 L
2
I6
32
64
J
4
128
(Note 4) The number of groups and the number of tools per group Ehat can be registered are combined by setting in one of four ways as follows: In any combination, up to 256 tools can be registered. Combination i is selected for up to 16 gruops, each with up to 16 toolsl combination 2 for.up to 32 groups, each wit.h up to 8 tools; and the tike. To change a combination, change the parameter, then reset the tool groups. If the tool groups are not reset, former tool groups are selected. Therefore after changing parameter, execute the group setting program
(tlote 5) CJaes H and D, when not in use, can be omitted. (Note 6) The same tool No. can appear at any frequency and at any place in the set data.
^ ^^.i dXdllt. *
-58-
0000i
T001
GlOL3 ; P001L0150;
lH02Dl3
T0132H05D08; T0068H14D16; P002L1400 ; T0061H15D07 ; T024LH25D04 ; T0134H17D03; T0074H08D21; P003L0700 ; T0012H14D08; T0202H22DO2 ;
Data
of group I
Data of group
Data of group
Gll
M02
(Note 7) Group Nos. specified by P need not be consecutive. A11 registerable groups need not be set, either. (Note 8) When the optional tool life nanagemenr 5L2 pairs is combined, 53m of part program length is used for the data storage. Accordingly, 320m or more part progr.am storage is required. (Note 9) The tool compensation numbers registered as the tool life management data is linited to the tool compensation numbers permitted to the NC.
2) Specifying tool life data, etc. in a machining program In a machining program, tool groups, eEc. are specified by using the T as follows.
Tape format
codes
Meaning I
Group No.
TVVVV
MO6T n
of tools which are to be used after the next M06 command + tool life management ignore No. (Note I)
L-l LJ L-I
Terminates the tool specified by (Note 2) and begins to use the tool specified by V V V V.
c43H
6a
0
[99: makes the tool offset specified by group No. { effective. l.00: Cancels tool length offset.
I
c4lH o
[99: Makes cutter compensaEion, specified t-gtonp No. effecEive. i l.OO: Cancels cutter compensation.
M06 command.
by
TAAAA
MO6T
to
*or- r"rol
_59 _
(Note l) From T0000 to TAAAA, stipulated by the tool life management ignore No. AAAA, are handled as ordinary T code commands, and no tool life management is Performed. When the T code of AAAA plus the group No. is designated, tool life management is executed for the related group. The value of the tool life management ignore No. is set by a parameter. When the value is 100, for example, from T0000 to T0I00 are output as ordinary T codes; and when the T0t0l is designated, a T code of a tool, which has not reached its life end among the tools of group 1, is output. (Note 2) The above tape format uses the tool return No. command method (Type A), which requires a tool return command at the time of tool change. Type B and Tvpe C are also available.
Concrete examples of the tape fomat when the tool life management ignore No. is 100 are described on each type.
Tvoe
A
Format
lleaning
(Toloo)
Set the tool of group 01 to the spindle. (Uote I) Set the tool of group 02 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool of group 01.
Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 01 to the magazine. Set the tool of group 03 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool- of group 02.
M06T102;
Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 02 to the magazine.
Machining using the tool of group 03.
G43H99: l'
I I
Uses the tool length compensation value of the tool of group 03. Uses the cutter compensation value of the tool of group 03.
G4
I I I
lH99;
unn.
.'
(Note i) The return tool may not be specified. If a T code is specified in the same block as I'106, the T code shall be the tool number of the tool to be loaded in the magazine. The tool number is of the tool attached to the spindle at present. If the tool is under the tool life management, specify the tool group of the too1. When the tool group must, be specified, if the tool group specified here (group of return tool) and che tool group currently under management is different for each other, an alarm is generated. (No alarm is issued if parameter 0039-IGIN is set).
-60-
TyPe
Format
Meaning
Tl0l
I I I
I
Set the tool of group 0l to the waiting posit,ion. Set the tool of group 01 to the spindle. Set the tool of group 02 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool of group 01.
M06T102;
I
M06T103;
Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 0l to the magazi-ne. Load the tool of group 03 to the waiting posi tion.
Machining using the tool of group 02.
c43H99;
I I I
Uses the tool length compensation value of the tool of group 02. Uses the cutter comDensation value of the tool of group 02.
c4 rH99
I I I
9rv
T
H00;
I I
Tool length compensation cancel. Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 02 to the magazine. Bring the tool of group 04 to the waiting
posit 1on.
Machining using the tool of group 03.
M06T104;
-61 -
Type
Format
MO6T IO
I I I I
Meaning
1
M06T102;
I I I I I I I
Bring the tool of group 0l to the spindle. Ot F^ --^i+i-^ Bring the rnn'l ^f -r^"^ w4 LU *L^ LLIE WdILITIB 6rvsl/ position.
Machinign using the tool of group 01.
M06T103: l'
I I I
I
Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 0l to the magazine. Load the Eool of group 03 to the wait.ing
pos
it ion.
I I
I
I I
G43H99;
I I I
G4lH99;
I I
rJnn.
(Note l) Whether T code following M06 is used as back number or as waiting code for next exchange is set by the parameter (No. 0039-I'16TCD). 2) Counting tool life Tool life is counted by time or by frequency. The life count is executed every group and the contents of life counter is not cleared by turning off
tool life is specified by time (minutes) In this case, a T code in the machining program specifies tool life management group and the time during which the tool is used in the cutting mode from the M06 specification to the next M06 specification is countec at certain intervals (four seconds). The time for single block stop, feed hold, rapid traverse, dwell, machine lock, time to wait for FIN signal etc., is disregarded. (Note 1) The tool life can be set up to max of 4300 min. b) When tool life is specified by frequency The couriter for groups of tools that were used is increased by one, every process from the time that a cycle start operation is performed until the time that M02 or M30 is commanded and the CNC is reset. Even if the eonmand for the same group is given a number of times in one process, the counter increase stays at one. (Note l) I^lhen having executed M02 or 1130 with life specified by the frequency of use, input the External Reset (ERS) signal to the CNC. (Note 2) l"lax. f requency of the tool lif e i-s 9999 . a)
When
Po\^/er.
-62-
FUNCTIONS)
when a move command and M or B codes are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and M or B function commands. ii) Executing M and B function commands upon completion of move command execut ion, (Example) Nl G0l c91X50.0Y-50.0 M05; (Spindte srop)
L\
tl F
s0 ---l
(ii)
Sequence
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specification. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
11.1
Itlhen a 3-digit f igure is specif ied f ollowing address M, a 3-digir BCD code signal and a strobe signal are transnitted. These signals .ru ,rs.d for 9N/OFF control of a rnachine function. One M code can be specified in one block. Selection of M codes for functions varies with the rnachine tool builder. t The following M codes indicate special meaning. 1) M02, M30: End of program i) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary fnr rooi qfrr-
tion of NC commands from tape to memory. ii) cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder. ) iii) The NC tape is turned to the beginning of the program. 2) t"tOO: Program stop Cyc1e operatj,on is stopped after a block containing !100 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by actlatlng the cNC. (This differs wirh rhe machine tool builder.) 3) M0t: Optional stop simi lrrlrr tn |r{QQ, cycle operation is stopped after a block containins M0 I is executed- This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machi-ne control panel has been pressed. 4) MgA: Calling of subprogram This code is used to call a subprogram. See section 12.4.1 (2) for details. 5) M99: End of subprogram This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution returns control fn LO +!'a ..^-:-. tne mal-n -Program. See the subprogram control section for details. (Section 12.4.r (2)) (Note l) The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read inro rhe inpur buffer register, if present. Similarly, t\ro M codes which do not buffer the next block can be set by parameters (No.0lll, 0l12). Refer Eo the machi-ne tool builderts instruction manual for these M codes.
63
(Note 2) The code and strobe signals are not sent to the machine tool- side for the M98, M99. (Note 3) Except for M98, M99, all M codes are processed by 'the nachine too1, but they are not done by the CNC side. Refer to the machine tool builder's
Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 3-digit or 5-digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding indexing differs between machlne tool bullders.
-64-
$ ltr
t.
-il.
Comment
Program -
Section
hogIam Start
I
I
Comment
(if necessary)
Tape End
(Note 1) lI02 can be used instead of M30 at the end of the maln progran. (Note 2) Wtren in IS0 code, LF is used for ;, while in EIA code, CR is used.
2)
One subprogram on
tape
t'""o"t
*f{- f;ffff
Program Start
Program Section
-L ffi
-L-l
Tape End
A subprogram must be used after being entered into the part program
area.
:
a
memory
L :.
:r.-:il "'ii*
-55-
-, r.Jlit-fJ;,
,+ $p,iil
and a number
of
subprograms on
taDe
Main Program
Tape End
being entered
of programs on a tape
+-
Comn:ent
Program Section
Program Section
-66-
Program
A program number must be put at the first block of each main program section or subprogram section. A prograur number is a four-digit number following address 0. (lrlhen in ISO,: can be also used instead of O. ) Program numbers are not necessarily given. See Secti"on 12. 4'.2 f or details.
0r001c0Ixr2
g-
300.
Prog:am
Number
Start must be punched at the top of the paper tape by using the following code. This section is necessary to stop rewinding the tape when used with a Tape Reader with Reels. This section may be omifted when the Eape is used with a Tape Reader without Reels.
The Tape
EIA
ER
ISO
Meani-ng
12.2
Information punched before the first LF (for IS0 code) or CR (for EIA code) on a paper tape is called the Leader Section. Normally, the CNC is set to the Label Skip condition when turning the power on or resetting and this section of paper tape is loaded on a PPR. The PPR reads but skips this section (by the Label Skip function). Generally, a labe1 for a tape is punched in this section. Since no parity check is performed on the skipped leader section, any combination of codes other than LF and cR may be punched in this section. (Note) The 1abe1 skip function is used to ignore all information up to the first
EOB code.
12.3
Program Start
Punching the following code immediately after the end of the Leader section (at the top of the first block of a program) indicates the start of a program. This code is necessary to release the LabeL skip function.
EIA
t, It
ISO
L.T
I'feaning
Program Start
-61 -
12.4
Program Section
End
The part of the paPer tape punched between the Program Start and program
code (except the Cortment section explained in Section 12.5) is called the Program Section. Information specifying tool travel and machine ON/6FF function is punched in this section. This section is cal1ed the significant section and is different from the non-si-gnificant section which includes the Leader and
Conrment Section.
A program section is composed of a number of blocks. A block is partitioned into a number of words, and the end of a block is identified by an End of Block Code (LF in ISO code and CR in EIA code).
l--
u,""u
(Note 1) TV check (vertical parity check) A parity check is performed in the vertical direction of a b1ock, and alarm 002 is generated if the block is found to contain an odd number of characters (between a code j-rnmediately following an EOB and the next EOB). The TV check is not performed for a part of tape which is read but skipped by the Label Skip function, but the Command Section between rr (f ' and tr) I' ig checked f or the total number of characters in each block. The TV check function can be specified Valid/Invalid through the IIDI keyboard. (See Section Il.3 in Chaprer III.) (tlote Z) In program examples in this manual,; is used instead of the End of Block code (LF for IS0 and CR for EIA), but the proper EOB code LF (IS0) or CR (EIA) must be used in actual programming.
12.4.1 Main program and sub program
1) Main program A program is divided into a main program and subprogram: Norma1ly, the NC operates according to the main program, but when a comnand calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program, control is passed to the subprogram. When a corunand indicating to return to the main prograp is encountered in the subprogram, control is returned to the main program.
-68-
F'
$t
Main program
Subprogam Information
1
Information
Information 2
Information 2
'Fg[o.w m rnrormaRon
tn lne sll rDfOqfam--
Information n
lnfolmation n + I
A total of 125 main programs and subprograms may be stored in the NC nemory, and the CNC uses one of these main programs to move the CNC machine tool.
cNc
Program
#r a>
/
.7
Program
@
I
#n2
l
E<'
tu
-69-
?l Subprograms When a program contains certain fixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns, these sequences or patterns may be entered into memory as a subprogran to sinplify programming. The subprogram can be ca11ed in AUTO mode. A subprogram can call another subprogram. hthen the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one loop subprogram ca11. Thus, two loop subprograrn call can be executed as shown below. However, four loop subprogram call can be executed using custom macro.
Main program
Sub
program
Sub propgam
010001
I
I I I
r{98P]000;
M98P1 000;
r!{98P3000:
{oop nesting
2Loop nesting
A call command can call a subprogram repeatedly A call command can specify up to 999 repeations of a subprogram. a) Preparation of subprogram A subprogram is prepared in the following format:
O(:)XXXX; Subprogram number
Subprograrn
Mqa.
At the top of subprogram, a subprogram No. identifying the subprogram is specified after "0" (EIA) or ":" (IS0). Specify M99 at the end of a subprogram. Subprogram end command 'rM99rt need not be sneeified in a block by itself. (Example) X M99 ; For how to enter subprograms into memory, see Chapter III-9.1.1 (Note t) For compatibility of the CNC tape with other devices, "i{xxxx" is also used as a subprogram No. instead of 0(:). A sequence number under N is registered as a subprogram number. b) Subprogram e.xecution A subprogram is executed when cal1ed by the main program or another
subprogram.
-L5-
When
is to be repeated. the repetition times is omitted, the subprogram is repeated once. (Example) t'tggPS1002; This command is read "Ca11 the subprogram (subprogram number 1002) five
The subprogram catl command specified in the same b1ock.
times.tt
(M9BP
be
- 70 -
ffi. *:.:
4.
&
;{.
In thls example, the subprogram (subprogram completing movement in the X-axis direction.
The execution sequence
(Example )
number 1200)
is ca1led after is
as
follows:
NOOI
O
of a main
program which
calls a
;
subprogram
Main program
N0020--_-_-;
N0030M98P21010;
Subprogram
Ni050 N1060
M99;
k4ren the subprogram is ca11ed by another subprogrann, same sequence as shown in the above example. (Note 1) M98 and M99 signals are not issued to the machine
(Note 2) If the subprogram number specified by address P can not be found, an alarm (PS078) is displayed. (Note 3) The subprogram call command "M9BP ;" cannot be input frorn the MDI, In this case, prepare the maitr-f,Efr"m in EDIT mode as follows:
Oxxxx;
M98P
M02;
xxrx;
Then execute it in the AUTO rnode. c) Notes on subprogram control The following special specifications can be used to control subprogram
executi-on.
i)
When
a sequence nunber is specified in address P of the last block of a subprogram, control does not return to the block after the block in which the subprogram \./as called, but rather to the block with the sequence number specified in address P. However, this is only effect tive in memory operation. The processing time for return to the specifi-ed block is considerably longer than that for normal return. Ilain program
N0010
N0020
___a
---x---
N1070M99P0070;
ii)
If the M99 command is executed in the main program, control returns to the start of the main program. For example, a " ll"l99;" block is j-nserted in the proper position of Ehe main program and the optional block skip is off' M99 is executed, and control returns to the start of the main program and the program is executed again. rf the optional block skip is turned on, "/1499;" is omitted and control is passed to the next block. If "/M99Pn;" has been inserted, control does not return to the start, but returns to the block whose sequence number is ttntt. The processing time for return to sequence number n is lonqer than return to the start.
- 7t -
iii)
N00901'102; ; It is possible to execute a subprogram from the start by specifying a search for it from the IDr keyboard as well as the main program. (Refer to III 10.4 and 10.9 for the search operation). In this case' if the M99 command is executed, control returns to the top of the subprogram and execution is repeated. IfttMggPn;" is executed, control returns to the block whose sequence number is rrnrr and execution ls repeated. In the above operation, if you want to stop execution, insert "fl'1021" or the "/M30;" at the appropriate position. Lrhen the optional block skip swi-tch is turned off, the above cornmand is executed and the program 1s terminated. In the example be1ow, execution will continue while the optional block skip i-s on and will stop when the optional block skip is turned off.
Nl 040 N1050
Nr060
/Nr070
12.4.2 Program number
M02;
This control can store program in itfs memory. A 4-digit program number following address O is used to differentiate graru from another.
O
one Dro-
trtrDD
Program number
Address
011r1...
Progran I1 Il
..M02; I O2222
I
.....M30;
Program 2222
M02; or M30; means the end of a main program. M99; means the end of a subprogram.
05555.
....
M99;
Subrogram 5555
(Note 1) In ISO code, colon (:) can be used instead of O. (Note 2) A block with an optional block skip code such as /uoz3, /M30; or /ugg: is not regarded as the end of a program.
72
(Note 3) When lhe program number is not specified at the st.art of the program, the first sequence number (N...) in that program is regarded as the program number. However, N0 is not used as the program number. (Note 4) When nej-ther program number nor sequence number are specified, a program number must be specified from the CRT/IDI when the program is registered. (Note 5) When a taPe contains more than one program, an EOB code j-s unnecessary before the second and subsequent programs. However, when a preceding program ends with ER (EIA code) or % (IS0 code) r 3o EOB code is necessary at the head of a program. This is because of the 1abel skip
/rr^+^
f eature . 4.\ ru/ ru Duure cases, program ----L^-^ numbers nnnn n 9000-9899 are reservEd and cannot be \L\uLE used by users.
Sequence number and block
12.4.3
A prograu is composed of several commands. One command is ca11ed a block. One block is separated from another block with an end of block code. manual uses ; as the end of block code.
!-
nro"r.
Brock
--l
l-
Block
-f-
CR
A 4-digit sequence number can be specified (I - 9999) following address N at the head of a block. The order of sequence numbers is arbitrary and need not be consecutive. Sequence numbers can be specified in all blocks or only in blocks
requiring them. It is recornmended that sequence numbers be specified sequentially at important points such as when a tool is changed and a ne\^r tool is used. (Noce i) Sequence number N0 should not be used for compatibility with other NC
(Note 2) Because program number 0 is invalid, program number must not be 0.
12.4.4 Optional block skip When a slash followed
equ]-Pmenc.
by a number (/n n = I - 9) is specified at the beginning of a block and the optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panel is set ON, the block with ln corresponding to switch number n is ignored in the tape or memory operation. When the optional block skip switch n is set OFF, the block with ln is valid. Thoror^ro rha nperstor can sklp a block with /n at his discretion. L in / I may be omitted.
- t? _
The
following range is ignored when the optional block skip switch is ; /2Nl23G0lX4. ....; N7856
0N.
Example:
lr l-
Range ignored
Nr00XI00;
/2Nl0lZi00;
/213Nr02x200; /3N1032200;
In the above example, the blocks of NlOl and NI02 when switch No.2 is ON, the blocks of Nl02 and Nl03 when switch No.3 is ON, are skipped.
(Note
1)
and
(Note 2) (Note 3)
sr^iitches can be used. (Note 8) If more than one optional block skip code is specified in a block for
A slash (/) must be specified at the start of a block. If it is placed elsewhere in the block, the information from the slash (l) to the EOB code is ignored, r^rhile information before the slash (l) is ef fective. \tlhen the optional block skip switch is ON, TH and TV checks are performed for skipped portions, as when the switch is OFF. The optional block skip is identified when the information is read into Lhe buffer storage from the tape or memory. I^lhen a block preceded by a slash has been read into the buffer, it is not ignored even if the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is turned on. This function is also effective during a sequence number search. When storing the program in memory, this function is ineffective. A block with a slash (/) is also stored in the memory regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch. When punchi$g out the program from memory, the program is punched out regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch. Some of the optional block skip switches (l to 9) may not be used on Ask the machine tool manufacturer how many some machine tools. the system with additional optional block skip function, I in /l cannot be omitted. Please specify /1 under Ehe above condition.
(Example)
-m Gooxlo.o; Correct
--7TTz cooXro.
o:
12.4.5 Word and address A block is composed
i 000
Error
of one or more words. A word 1s composed of an address followed by a number as i-s shown below. (An algebraic sign (+ or -) may be added before the numerical va1ue.)
X
Address
Numerical value
''t
The address is a letter which indicates the meanins of the numerical value following the address. Addresses and their meanings are shown below. Some addresses may vary 1n meaning depending on preparatory functions specified in the program.
Word
&
fi L
,:
1,.+. I
74
Function
Program number Sequence number
Address
: (ISO)
Meaning
/o(nre)
N
G
Program number
Sequence number
Preparatory function
Dimension word
xrY ,z,ArB,
K
command
I, J,K
Feed function
F
b
.F
M B
Offset nunber
Dwe1l
PY
P
Dwell time
Designation of the subprogram number
Program number
designation
Repetitive count
Parameter
P
'Q'R
\
number
function
Y -_-f_
----r-Sequence heparatory
Dimension rvord
Miscellaneous
iunction
In the next Process sheet example, one line represents a b1ock. And one frame in a block is a word.
-75-
Progran
name
Test Program
2
-Note
Da
te
Proglam number
o(:)
zooz
Programmer
'85.10.10
x1 96. 0
Y3
15. 0
\
I
(Note )
End
CR
#r
B
F.'
Sri
12.4.6
The basic addresses and command value range are listed in Table L2.4.6. Note that these figures give the maximum numerical liurit, not the mechanical limit of the CNC machine tool. Under CNC control, the tool rnay traverse up to 10 m (in millimeter input) along the X axi-s, but actually travelling distance may be lirnited to 2 m for the specific machine tool. Sirnilarly, CNC control may permit a maximum cutting feed of 25 m/min., but the CNC machine tool may be limited to 3 m/min. The manual issued by the machine tool manufacturer should be closely consulted' in addition to this rnanual when programming to ensure that the actual limitations of the specific machine tool are not exceeded.
Table 12.4.6 Basic address and command value range
Funct ion
Address
:
o
Input in
L L
mm
Input in inch
L9999 9999
Program number
Sequence number
(IS0)
(ErA)
N
9999
Preparatory function
Dimension word
- 9999 0-99
R,
L-
0-99
nrn
mnr
X, Y, Z, Q,
I, J,
+99999.999 +9999.9999
1
K,
100,000
mm/min
0.0r -
400.00
mn/rnin
F
0.0i rim/
0.0001
inch/rev
9.9999
0-
0-
9999
Tool functions
Miscellaneous functions
Dwell
T
M
0-99 0-99
oo99999.999 sec. 9999.9999 sec.
9999999
0-99 0-99
o099999.999 sec. 9999.9999
qoa
r-
| -
9999999
0ffset
number
II
B
l-200
0999999
l-200
o999999
- l7 -
12.5 Comment
Section
The information punched between the control out and the cont.rol in codes shown below is all considered as a comment and is skipped . Since a TH check is not performed, a heading, cofi[nents, and indications for the operator can be punched by combining any code of arbitrary holes. The TV check is oerformed on the conment section.
EIA
ISO
(
)
Meaning
Cnntrnl nrrf! (efarf \eLur
e
2-4-5x
z-+- I ^
nf vr
nnmmontLvrLsrre!rLl
'\
Control in (end of
comment)
a\ v
o o o
oo
o o
Channel 4
-)
o o oo
o
l^'
Channel
a)
Control In
Control Out
u c
l
LF LF LF
Nl00
1G0
lx
WORK.........)
LF
LF
tape is read into memory, for memory-controlled operation, the is read into memory. However, codes not listed in Appendix 7 are ignored and are not read into memory. When daEa in the memory is punched out, information in the Comment Section is also punched out. The Comment Sec+i ^.. i ^ urDPr4J ^-'ed on the program screen. However, codes ignored when read-in ,r't ^*1 !> Lfurr neither punched nor displayed on the CRT screen. are During a memory-controlled operation in memory command mode, the comment section in memory is ignored and operation is executed. (ExarnpIe) Used as heading
)N 110
Signficant section
(Note l) The rewind stop code (Z or ER) cannot be used in the comment section. Reading this code resets the CNC. (Note 2) When a connent section is in the middle of a Program section and is long, movement is interrupted for a long time. Therefore, insert corment sections in a place where movement can be interrupted or a place specifying no movement.
- 18 -
(Note 3) The length of the conment sectj-on is unlimited. (Note 4) When the eontrol out code does not come first and only the control in code is read in, it is ignored. (Note 5) The TV check for the comment section can be disabled by sp eci fy ing paramerer TVC. (Data No. 0000) 12.6
Program End
The end of a program is indicated by punching the following code at the end of the Program Section.
EIA
I'1O2CR
T.
SO
Meaning
I'1O2LF
M3OCR
M3OLF
M99CR
M99LF
When
the End of Program is sensed during the execution of a programr the CNC unit terminates the execution of the program and enters a reset state. In case of M30CR or I'130LF, the program is returned to its beginning (in l'femory Courmand Wrrgrl Ltr IIUUE,/ -^r^\ . rrL^- -L.e subprogram. end code is sensed in a subprogram, control is returned to the program which called the subprogram. (Whether or not the tape is rewound by exeeution of I'130 depends on the machine tool.)
12.7 Tape End
The end of a tape is indicated by punching the code below immediately following the Program End of the last program on a tape. t
EIA
ER
ISO
Meaning
Tape
End
(Note) If M02 and M30 are not at the end of the program section, and ER (EIA) or Z (IS0) is about to be executed, the CNC enters the reset state.
12.8 Tape Format The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as tape format. 12.9
Tape Codes
Eit,her the EIA or the IS0 code can be used as tape codes code is distinguished with the first end of block code. Appendix l.
fn
13.
13.1
A canned cycle siruplifies the program by using a single block with a G code to specify the nachining operations usually specifleci in several blocks. Table 13.1 lists canned cycles.
Table
13.'l
Canned cycles
Re trac t ion (+Z direcrion)
G code
c73
c74
Applicat ion
High-speed peck drilling cycle
Feed
Left-hand tapping
cycle
G76
Feed
Oriented spindle
s
top
Rapid traverse
c80
Cancel
Feed
z,e
pla
seL
c8l
Rapid traverse
Ih"
eac
c82
Feed
Dwe1l
Rapid traverse
Drilling
cycle,
(l)
(2) (3)
c83
c84
Intermittent
feed
Feed
Rapid traverse
Dwell + Spindle
CCW
Feed
Tapping cycle
c85
Feed
c86
c87
Rapid traverse
Rapid t.raverse
Manua
1
c88
Dwell + spindle
s
top
c89
Feed
a
Dwe1l
Feed
Generally,
below.
rvi c'l
point
-80-
F
Operation
I
I
I
Initial point
I I I
Operation
2 *l
l+
I I
Operation 6
Point
J
I
9
I I
l*
I I
Operation 5
Operation
3-l
I I I I
--
-+
Rapid traverse
Feed
/
Operation 4
:..
:.' t *i
Positioning is performed on the xY plane and hole rnachining is performed on the Z axis' Positloning and hole urachining cannot be perfoimed than this plane and this axis combination. Canned cycle indifferent other the plane to selection G command. These canned cycle operatio5rsr. to be more stri.ct, consj.st of these three each of which are specified in a particular modal G code, as shom below. modes, (1) Data formar J c9O Absolute. I C91 Incremenral (2) Return point leve1 G98 Inirial point 1evel { , I c99 R poinr level
f:
(3) Drilling
node
.9t
c89
(Note) The initial level means the absolute value of the Z-axls tine changing fron the canned cycle cancel mode into the canned aL the mode. of cycle
- 8t -
a) Fig. 13.1 (b) shows how to specify data according to the rnode (C90 or
G90
G91
G9I)
v____*"
I
z=o
PoinrR"ll
Point Z
-r O-
I -|ts-T1Rl !ll
tit
(b)
lir
r.in'nPoirt
Z
llt
I
*L--i
Absoiute
Incremental
Fig. 13.1
b) Whether
the tool is to be returned to point R or to the initial level is specified according to G98 or G99. This is shown in Fig. 13.1 (c). When the Use G99 for the first dril1ing, and use G98 for the last drilling. canned cycle is to be repeated by K in G98,mode, tool is returned to the initial leve1 from the first time drilling. In the G99 mode, the initial 1evel does not change even when drilling is performed. r
G98
Initial
level
Initial
V---
,z
level
-*o/ rl rl rl rl Ir lr ll t! ll
ll o'
Initial level return
sz/
Point R level
Fig. 13.1
(c)
c) The drilling data can be specified following G73/G74/c76/G81 to c89 and a single block can be formed. This command permits the data to be stored in the control unit as a modal value. The machining data in a canned cycle D specified as shom below:
G
[tr
I I I
+{f lll.--.
Drilling
r. .\' ."
-Dritlingdata
LNumber of repeat s
-82-
llrl
lllno
m^dp
Specifies the hole position by an increnental or absolute value. The path and feed rate are the same as G00 pcsitioning. Drilling data Specifies the distance fron point R to the bottom of the hole in Fig. 13.1 (a) with an increnental value or the position of the hole bottom with an absolute value. The feed rate is specified in the F code in operation 3. In operatJon 5, it becomes the rapid traverse rate or the feed rate specified in the F code, accordlng to the drilling mode. Specifies the d.j stance frorn the initial 1eve1 to polnt R 1eve1 in Fig, 13.1 (a) with an absolute value. The feeC rate i-s the rapid traverse rate in operatlon 2 and 6. Specifies each cut-in value with G73 and GB3 or the shift value with G76 and G87. (Always speclfled with an increnrental value.) Specifies the dwe11 time at the botton of the hole. The relationship betrveen the time and the specified value is the same as for G04. F ... Specifies the feed rate; K ... Number of Specifies the number of repeats for a series cf repea t s operation 1 to 6. When K is not specifled, K = 1 is assumed. When K = 0 is specified, the drllling data is sinply stored, and drilling ls not performed. Since the drilling node (GID remains unchanged untl1 another drilling node is speci-fied or the canned cycle is cancelled with a G code, j-t must not be speclfied any blocks when the same drilling mode continues. G80 and the 0l group G codes are used to cancel a canned cycle. Once the drilling data has been specified in the canned cycle, it is retained until it is changed or the canned cycle is cancelled. Therefore, all requlred drilllng data shal1 be specified when the canned cycle is started and only data to be changed sha11 be specified during the cycle. The number of repeats K shall be specifled only when operation $ust be repeated. Data K is not retalned. The feed rate specified with the F code ls retained even if the canned cycle ls cancelled. When the system is reset during the canned cycle, the drilling mode, drllllng data, hole position data and repetition count are deleteC. An example of the above data retention and deletion ls shown below.
[[
C x
O
@ G8IX
Y
coo
Mo3;
and
; ..... F speclfy
necessary
_;
. Slnce the drllling mode and drllling data are the same as those specif ied in O , G8 l, Z _, R _, and F can be ornltted. The hole posltion moves only f6T Y _ and drilling is performed only once
c82x
K-;
accordi.ng
ThE
to
G8l.
Fole posltlon moves only for X _ from O and the hole is drilled according to G82 with Z, R, and F speclfled ln @ and the drilling data P speclfled in @. Thls Ls repeated K times,
-83-
\)-/
/;\
G80
G85
Mq.
L LJ
RP
Ox
@ G89
X
Since drilling data is cancelled in O, Z arrd, R must be respeci.fied. Since F is the same as F specified j.n O, it can be onitted. p is noc required in this block, but it is stored. Performs drilling which differs only for the Z value with @ by moving the hole position only for
X.
Y
O colx
Performs drilling according to G89 by using the specified i1 O , R and P speeified in @, and specified @ as drilling daia.
The drl11j-ng mode and a1l drilling are deleted.
data (excepr
F)
d) Repeat of canned cycle When holes are repeatedly drilled at equal j-ntervals in the same canned cycle, the number of repeats can be specified by using address K. The maximum value of K is 9999. K is effective only for the specifled block.
(b<aurple)
machining position
Present
I
First
machining position
G81 X
K5F
_;
_ specifies the first drilling positi-on for an incremental -it f is specif ied for an absolute cornmand (c90), a hole is repeatedly drilled at the salne position. The canned cycle automatic deceleration time constant is automatically switched to the rapid traverse or feed tirne constant according to the feed used for each operation. At the end point; the tool decelerates and moves on to the next sequence. However, when return frorn the bottom of the hole to the R 1evel is performed at the rapid traverse rate with G98 (initial 1evel return) (for example, G8I), the tool does not decelerate, but inmediately returns to the initial level at the rapid traverse rate.
cofrand- (egi)]f
Each hole machining operation is detailed below.
-84-
I
E
1)
cycle)
G73 (G99)
3 i
:':
.e
Initial point
I
I
u_*,
Point R
iJ
I
I
+
i,
I I I I I I I
I
{}
:"t
.:
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
\l
6
Ir
Point Z
The
int"TmiiiEnr--Itad simplifies
c74 (Left-handed tapping cycle)
c74
retraction value to be set in "trip hole dr1lling, efficient machining is deep performed. Retraction is performed at the rapid traverse rate.
_
retraction is set by a paranelgr -_(No. 0531). Sinc-e rhe Z-axis direction ai;pbsaf'-?nd p'ermlts a very small
2)
(c98)
c74 (c99)
Spindle Rapid
traverE Feed
Point
O\
:
j
spindre
cw
!
E
At the bottom of the hole, the splndle rotates clockwise and left-handed tapping perforroed. (Note) During left-handed tapping speclfied in G74, rhe feed rare override ls i-gnored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return operation, even if a feed hold is applied.
-6)-
3)
G76
(fine boring
cYcle)
G76
(G98)
G76 (c99)
"'*F1
)l
Spindle C\!
Initial
pornt
Point R
Point Z
Point Z
oss
l+
Shift amount
Since a spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the
spindl.e retracts after shifting i-n the direction opposite to the cutter direction, high precision and efficient boring is performed without scratching the workpiece surface. (Note) The shift value is specified by Q. The Q value is always a positive value. If a negative value is specified, the sign is ignored. For the shift directionr dny of +X, -X, *Y and -Y is selected by setting parameter (data No. 0002). The Q value is modal in the canned cycle. Since it is also used as the cut-in value for G73 and G83, specify it carefully.
-86-
/+)
G80 Canned cycle cancel The canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G81 to
GB9) is cancelled and normal operation is subsequently performed. The points R and Z are aI'so cancelled. (That is, R = 0 ar,d Z = 0 for the incremental command.) other drilling data is also cancelled.
n v______*?
'\ ./
G81 (c99)
Imtial
polnt
Point R
I
1t
:.Glr.-,
Point Z
ll ll o
---*Rapid
ll
Point Z
travelse
feed
6) c82 (drilling
-Cutting
G82 (G99)
___---*
Initial
?
pornt
ti lr
ll ll lr
Poirt R
Point R
,'Jr"{
'@
Point Z
Point Z
6--
D well
This is the same as G81. Dwell (specified by the P code) is performed at Eire bottom of the hole and the spindle is raised. Dwell at the bottom of the hole improves the hole depth precision in blind hole dri1ling.
cYcle)
c83 (c98) c83 (c99)
r: tl
v-----?
Tql -t
YI
Initial point
r: |./
ll
I
T-:ql
^TG83
lts
o>
a
At
r-
Point Z
The coromand above specifies the peck drilling cycle. a is the cut-i.n value each time and specify with an incremental value. When the second and subsequent cut-in is performed, rapid traverse- is switched to feed by d nn (or inch) before the position where cut-in is performed. The specified Q value
_;
must always be positive. If a negative value is specified, the FlEn*is lgnored. The d value is set by parameter (data No. 0532).
G84 (Ge9)
r:
V----+
I
R
o I
Ii/
ll
Initial
v____+o
I ,snittar" c* i@/ ll
li'-17 tl
O-- rni*.*
li
*'-'*
Feed
The spindie is reversed at the bottom of the hole and the tapping cycle ls
perrontreo
(Note) During tapping specified in G84, the feed rate override is ignglad,;tnd the cycle does.-not _s:9-p-_""!i!_,the-snd.-o-f the reTTrrfrEeTefi-on, .even lf feed hold is applled.
-88-
+-rr.
0____*"
..-9
I I I
il il ti
I
I
ll
This is the
hole.
same as C84,
I I
t o
i,s
r:
U
,
1l
snndtec$
',*
-9
I I
I
I
I
Rapid traverse
Feed
This ls the same as Ggl, but the spindle stops at the bottom .of the holes and is retracted at the rapid traverse rate.
: *
F
:.
3:
s a G: G.
G *-
_89_
1l)
11 @s5)f=1
Initial point
vlt ^\Y:Yi
lr <-
+ |
!l
pointZ
Rated traverse
\Spindte CW
Point R
Shift
After the tool is positioned along the X and Y axes, the spindle stoPs at the orientation position. The spindle i-s then shifted in the direction opposite to the tool and is positioned at the botton of the hole (Point R) at the rapid traverse rate. At this position, the tool returns only for the shift value and the spindle rotates clockwise. Machining is performed up to the point Z in the positive direction of the Z axis. At this position, the splndle again stops at the orientation position and shifts in the direction opposiEe to the tool and the tool is withdrawn from the hole. After the tool returns to the initial point, it returns only for the shift value. The spindle rotates clockwise and the tool moves according to the command of the next b1ock. The-shift value and direct.ion are the same as those for G76. (Direction setti;g is common to both G76 and G87.)
L2)
I
I
spindle cw
,..'
I I
Point R
I
SPindle CW
I
{
Poht z
'...-(D
o-
Rapid iraverse
Feed
Manual feed
-90-
#. Sr
E,5
c89 (c99)
9,
ll
i! rl
rl
Initial
I I
I
I
Ir I
tl tl
ll
rDl
Point R
Point R
Ir
PontZ
uweil
6',
II
(P)
Point Z
This is the
same
14) Rigid mode To set the rigid mode, specify M29s*J^**1 before command of tappi_ng cycle and reverse tapping cycle. By this operation, the spindle stops, the rigid mod.e Dr signal turns on, and the rigid mode j-s set for the. tapping cycle or reverse tapping cycle which i^ IS
l'129
is called a rigid tapping prepare auxiliary function. The rigid tapping Prepare auxiliary functj-on code can be changed to another M-code by setting the corresPonding value in the parameter 0256, However, 1429 is used fhroughout thi-s manual to make the description consistent. Specify GBO; to reset the rigid mode. The rigid mode can also be reset by the another canned cycle G-code or the group 01G code, that ls, the commands that clear the tapping cycle. The rigid mode DI signal is turned off by this rigid mode reset conmand. Irrhen the rigid tapping is ended by the rigid mode reset command, the spindle stops and the S-code goes to the state with S0 specified. The ri-gid mode can also be reset by the reset operation (reset button, external reset). However, note that the canned cycle mode is not reset bv the reset
operation.
I I I
commanded
next.
M2qS**XX.t
G7 4
XY
XY
/c84X-Y Z._R-P-F-K-
-] Rigid
mode
_____t
G80;
a) F /5***x is a screw b) 5T-*** nusg be lower Otherwise, p/S alarm for the alarm No.) c) F must be lower (piraureter No. 527) .
Precautions on
camrnand
lead.
than the value set in the parameter (No. 0617). occurs in the G f] f] block. (Refer to Section 5
Ehan the cutting feed rate upper Otherwise, P/S alarm (011) occurs.
limit
value
91
d)
Don't specify S and axis motion berween M29 and G ! !. Donr t specify 1429 during tapping cyc1e. p/S afarrn occurs in both
cases.
GBO.
e)
and
cycle specifications) (Note 1) The spindle must be rotated by the miscellaneous function (M code) before a canned cycle is specified. M?. Spindle CW
(NoEes on canned
n r-1ll t-]| v I
UU
....,
Co
rrec
Nfq.
Spindle stop
fl n
(Note 2) If the block contains X, Y, Z, or R data, drilling is perforned in canned cycle mode. If the block does not contain the X, Y, Z, and R
block.
Incorrect
)
(1.13
or
M4 must
data, drilling is not performed. However, when G04X ; is specified, drilling is nct performed even if X is soecified c00 x _;
G81X
E.
t
(Drilling is not perforned) (Dri11ing is not performed. Value F is updated.) v-. (Dri11ing is not performed. ) (Onfy the miscellaneous function is executed.) (Drilling is not performed. Drilling data P is not G04P _; changed by c04P. ) (Note 3) Specify drilling data Q, P in the block where drilling is performed. In other words, specify it in the block for which the X, Y, Z, or R, axis data is specified. This data is not stored as modal data if specified in a block where drilling is not performed. (Note 4) When the canned cycle (G74, GB4, G86) which performs the rotational control of the spindle is used and drilling rrrith a short distance between the hole .positions (X, Y) or the initial level to the R point Ievel is short, the spindle may not reach the normal rotation before it enters the cutting operation (-Z) of the ho1e. When this occurs, a time lag musc be provided by inserting a dwe11 commarld (G04) between each drilling operation. In this case, without specifying the number of repeats with K, prograrn as shovm be1ow.
-92-
*o{_-*,
til ltJ
Tl-
GOOM : GB6X Y Z F R : GOa P ]; is perforrned, but drilling -(Dwell XY: (Dwell is performed, but drilling G04 P ; XY: aais performed, but drilling -tlwell j -t
This may not have to be considered, depending on the machine tool. Refer to the machine tool builderts instrucEion manual (Note 5) As previously mentioned, a canned cycle may also be cancelled with G00 to G03 (group 0l G code). This cancel is performed when G00 to c03 is (i/ indicates 0 to 3, read if it is specified in the same block as G indicates the canned cycle code): EI' G X P F Y Z R K Q ; (The canned i-s perfo?rned.)"y"t. GG#XYZROPFK: y a*""-is perforred as specified (t"tovement alon[-the x in G//, R, P, Q and K ""d ignored and F is stored.) are (Note 6) When a miscellaneous function is specified in the same block as a canned cycle command, the M code and MF signals are sent at Ehe first positioning operati-on (operation l). The controlr waits for the finish signal (FIN) aE the end of positioning before starting the next drilling operation. When the number of repeats (K) is specified, the M code and MF signals are senL only the first time. (Note 7) The tool offset commands (G45 or G48) are ignored in canned cycle mode. (Note 8) When tool length offset (G43, G44, G49) is specified in canned cycle mode, offset is applied when the tool is positioned to poinE R (operation 2).
(Note
9)
F
+
ie =
a canned cycle is performed in the single block mode, the control stops at the end of operation l, 2, and 6, as shown in Fig. f3.l (a). Therefore, it must be started three times to dri1l one ho1e. The feed hold lamp lights at the end of operations I and 2. When the number of repeats is left at the end of operation 6, the system stops \,iith feed hold state, and when not, the system stops in stop state. D) feed nord When a feed hold is applied between operations 3 to 5 in canned cycle G74 or GB4, the feed hold lamp imrnediately lights, but the control continues to operate up to operation 6 and stops. If a feed hold is applied again during operation 6, it immediaEely stops. c) Override The feed rate override is assumed to be 100% during the operation of canned cycle G74 or G84.
-93-
ffi
ffi
ffi
r
F:-i
Ft*
[.:
I
I I :
F. r,'
F
3t:
T8
ffi
/T\ #10
il /t\ #9
,lYi +r' |
/+.
| |
t#6
E.:
t_
I
tr
H
l/1ru
/lll t
ll 7*19
13
Drilling of a 10 mm diameter hole Drilling of a 2O uun diameter hole Boring of a 95 rnn diameter hole (depth 50 rnrn)
F
F
Initial level
Retract position
Z
I
I
l-x
F
F.
F
E
/--s
_T__
fF=
tl rF=
T-T-
tl
Tll
Ti5
F
E
Fr__-__J
L_u
i-U Ln
-94-
-n -E
No.
Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.1l, *190.0 is set in offset +150.0 is set in offset No.3l.
l5,
and
F
ft
Program example
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Coordinate setting at reference poinr N002 G90 G00 2250.0 T11 M6; Tool change Initial level, tool length offset N003 G43 ZO Hll; Spindle start N004 S30 M3; N005 G99 G8l X400.0 Y-350.0 2-153.0 R-97.0 Fl20; Positioning, then /11 drilling Positioning, then /i2 drilling and point R level return N006 Y-550.0; N007 G98 Y-750.0; Positioning, then //3 drilling and initial level return Positioning, then /14 drilling and point R'level return N008 G99 XI200.0; Positioning, then ii5 drilling and point R leve1 return N009 Y-550.0; Positioning, then //6 drilling and j-nitial 1eve1 return N010 G98 Y-350.0; NOil G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop N0l2 G49 2250.0 T15 M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change Initial level, tool length offset N013 G43 ZO H15; N014 S20 M3; Spindle start N0l5 c99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0 Z-130.0 R-97.0 P300 F70; Positioni-ng, then /i7 drilling, point R 1evel return Positioning, then /18 drilling, initial leve1 return N016 G98 Y-650.0; Positioning, then ii9 drilling, poJ.nt R level return N017 G99 X1050.0; Positioning, then /i10 dri11ing, initial level return N018 G98 Y-450.0; N0l9 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop N020 c49 2250.0 T3l M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change N02i c43 Z0 H31; Initial level, tool length offset N022 StO M3; Spindle start N023 cB5 c99 x800.0
Y-350.0 Z-t53.0 R47.0 F50; N024 G91 Y-200.0 K2; N025 G28 X0 Y0 M5; N026 G49 Z0;
N027 M0;
(Note) When the number hole.
Positioning, then /ll1 drilling, point R leve1 return Positioning then i/12, 13 drilling, point R 1eve1 return Reference point return, spindle stop Tool length offset cancel
Program stop
of repeats is specifled by K in G98 and G99, the tool returns to the initial level (G9B) or point R level (G99) from the first
Thi;
Thie
an external motion function signal to be sent to CNC every time the positioning to IP is completed qi on:'l thi e _ ^o^^-.- i s used to perform operations such as clamplng, drilling,
G81
]P
the
and and
eionel ic sent every positioning until it is cancelled with a G80 and G -.; code in group 0i command. The external motion signal is not sent during execution of block that does not contain neither X nor Y. Parameter (No. 0011, MCF) determines whether G8l ls used as an external operation function or as a canned cycle.
; *. t
G:
5,
-95-
14. COMPENSATION
FUNCTION
or
G43 r
trq 4
,r
The position of the terminal point of the movement command in the Z axis can be
shifted + or - by as much as the value set in the offset memory. This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during progranming and the actual tool length of the tool used when the work is performed into the offset memory. It is now possible to apply compensation without changing the program. Assign the offset direction with a G43 or G44, and designate the offset amount that has been set in the offseE memorv with an H
code.
l) Direction of offset C43 + side offset C44 side offset r- drrJ - LdDE of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount thag has rrr been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of tlne Z axis movement command. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes the terminal point. When the movement cornmagl for the Z axis was omitted, it is taken in the same
way as:
.1, 1 uaJ
^, tr.+
1 cqt znu
J vl LUvLL
- direction in G44. G43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the same group is programmed. 2) Assignment of offset amount ^EE^^+. ADDrErr ^^^i^- Vr!JCL number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the nffcar mamnr\7 is added to or subtracted froro the programmed command value for tlr.re Z axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 - H200. However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for cutter
compensati-on.
and the tool moves by the offset amount in the * direction in G43 and in the
The offset amount may be set in the offset memory through rhe CRT/I,IDI panel. TL^ ^t rrrs -^--^ lerr6e wr values that can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
mm
input
mm
'in^1' rrrLrr
i-^,,+ L f rrPu
Offset
amount
o - +999.999
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. It iS irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset value. ?\ Cancelling tool length compensation To cancel the offset, couunand a G49 or assign offset H00. L^,rlren H00 or G49 is commanded, the cancelling acti-on is taken immediately.
-96-
:k;
F: 3j
&'
ry.'
Dr.
f,. 't
+
a-
.+
/\
Example
";l
I i;
-\/ \t) a -
-,6 ,--'I -1
z\i\G \9 | -rr
t\
/t
I
+Y
1...
+z
= -4.0 (Offser amounr) N1c91 c00 xl20.0 Y80.0; N2 c43 2-32.0 HOl;
H01 N3 c01
e
/t\ ;\ \,
/?\ (,
z-2I.0
F1000;
N8
GOO
Z4L.O;
N9 X50.0 Y30.0;
@ @ @
rn K_v
rfa
(Note 1) When the offset amount 1s changed due to a change of the offset number, the offset value changes to the new offset amount, the new offset amount is not added to the old offset amount. HOI ... Offset anounr 20.0 H02 ... Offset anount 30.0 c90 c43 2100.0 H0t; ... Z vtLLL go ro 120.0 c90 c43 2100.0 H02; ... Z witl go to 130.0
t t
-97-
:i;l Y b'+'+.,
nrr\
or
]'
,
Glgj u'+'+J The end point of the move command in Z, Y, or X axj-s can be shifted + or - by as much as the value set i-n the offset memory by the above command. The offset axis is specified by Gl7, GI8, or Gl9, and offset direction is specified by G43 or G44. The offset, amount that has been set in the offset memory is designated by an H code. 1) Offset axis The axis being vertical to the plane specified by Gl 7 , GI8, or Gl 9 is designated as offset axis.
Plane selection
^11
Grsl
::ll H
Offset axis
Z axis
Y axis X axis
c18 c19
2) Direction of offset * side offsec G43 G44 - side offset In any case of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount that has been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of the specified axis movement coumand. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes the terminal point. When the movement command for the specified axis was omitted. 1t is taken in the same way as,
The tool offset irtwo or more axes can be commanded bv two or more blocks as shown below. (Exarnple) 0ffset 1 n X and Y axes. G19 G43 H Offset in X axis , GI8 G43 H Offset in Y axis (Offset in X and Y axes is , performed)
and it moves by the offset amount in the + direction in G43 and 1n the - direction in G44. G 43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the same group is programmed. Assignment of offset amount Assign offset number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the offset memory is added to or subtracted from the programmed command value for the specified axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 to H200. However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for cutter compensation. The offset amount rnay be set in the offset memory through The CRT/I'DI panel. The range of values t.hat can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
-98-
mm
input
mm
inch input
0ffsec
amount
0 - +999.999
0 - +99.9999 inch
It is
4) Cancelling tool length compensation To cancel the offset, command a G49 or assign offset H00. In t.he case of offset in two or more axes, the offset in all axes is cancelled by G49 command and the offset in the axis specifled by plane selection G code is cancelled by H00 The canceLling action 1s taken immediately after G49 or H00 is comrnanded. (Note l) Tool length offset A and B can be selected by the parameter No. 0003
TT T-D
The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. impossible to set H00 to any other offset value.
(Note 2) In the case of the offset in three axes, if t.he of f set is cancelled by G49 code, the P/S alarm 015 is generated. Cancel the offset by usinq G49 and H00. 14.2 Cutter Compensation
B {G39
G42\
Thic ffinnfinn nolssits the tool to be offSet by the tool radius value given, that is, to pass through the offset path. Thls offset command is specified by a G-code function on CNC tape or on the MDI unit. The offset amount (tool radius previously be stored in the memory correspondingly to the H code value) shall via the MDI unit. This memory is called the Offset memory, and it can be stored maximum 200 kinds of offset value. Offset number is specified by the H code. H code is modal. The G functions related to this offset are as in Table 14.2.L.
a
Table
14.2.'l
G code
c39
G40
L:4 I
Group
00
Frrnction
G42
If G4L ox G42 is specified, the equipment. is said to be in the offset model if G40, in the cancel mode. When the power is turned on, it is in the cancel mode. These cutter comDensation modes are not affected by the non-modal G function
(c39). G4L and G42 belong to group 07. These codes are specified mixedly with C00, GOl, G02 and G03, and cooperate with each other to define a mode related to tool
movement (Offset). The program sha11 always terminate
al
i
;,
mode.
-99-
The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to max. 200 offsets. (However, they are 200 offsets in total for tool length offset and cutter compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the program, and shall be set via the CRT/l-DI. (For details, refer to item III I0. I. l). The range of values in which the offseE amount can be set is as followsl
mm
input
inch input
Offset
amount
0 - +999.999 mn
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
14.2.3 Offset vector
Ir is
In Fig. 14.2.3, in order to cut a work shaped as lndicated by A with an R-radius too1, the path for the center of the tool to pass through must be the figure B which is separate R fron the figure A. The tool- being separate some distance like this, is called offset. That is, the figure B is the path which is offset R frorn the figure A. The offset vector is a 2-dimensional vector equivalent in size to a specified offset amount, and this value is kept stored in the control unit, and its direction is rewritten from moment to moment as the tool moves. This offset vector (cal1ed simply vector later) is, in order to know how much offset is to be made i-n the directirn of a tool, etc., created in the control unit, and is used to calculate a path offset by the tool radius from a given figure. This vector always belongs to and follows the tool as it advances, and it is very important in programming to know the behavior of the vector. As shown in Fig. L4.2.3 the vector is usually at right angles with Ehe direction in which tool advances, and faces toward the tool- center as seen from the work.
Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by Gl7, GIB and GI9, (C codes for,plane selection.) This plane is called the offset plane. For instance, when the XY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are carried out using (X, Y) in the program tape and the vector is eomputed. The coordinate values of an axis which is not in the offset plane are not subject to the offset, and the command values programmed is used as it is. In the sequel, what vector is created, what offset calculation is made, by an offset command, will be discussed on assumption that an XY plane is selected. This discussion applies also when another plane is selected. The offset vector is cleared by reset.
-r00-
& & g:
$a
I J ; in c0l, c\Z or c03 mode pernits eieiuiing offset circular iit.rpof"tion wittt the tool radius at a
eorner. A new vector is created to the left (G4i) or to the right (G42) looking toward (X, Y) from the end point at right angles therewith, and the tool moves along the arc from the polnt of the old vector toward that of the new vector. (X, Y) is expressed in a value according to the G90/G9L respectively. (I, J) 1s expressed in an increment.al value from the end point.
center path
,Tool
New
1T
ord
New vector
*(*,")
or (r. J)
vecto/
tl
I
(a)
In case of G41 Fig. 14.2.5
t\
\\
(b)
,'ha- Tool
center path
Old vector
Fig. 14.2.5
In case of G42
This command can be given in offset mode, that is, only when G4l or G42 has Whether the arc is to turn clockwise or already been specified. counterclockwise, is defined by G4I or G42, respectlvely. This command is not moda1, and executes circular interpolation, whatever the G function of group 01 nay be. The G function of group 01 remains even through this conmand is specified.
The command G40X
14.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40)
;:
=i
i:
Y ; in G00 or G01 specifies each axis to move straightly from tnlpo-int o}-tn. old vector on the start point toward the end point in G01 mode and eaeh axis to move at rapid traverse in G00 mode. This command speeifies the eguipment to enter from the cutter compensation mode into the cancel mode.
Tool center path
:J
*-
{g':
s
::
+
i I
When
only
moves
G4O; is specified, and X Y is not specified, the tool the old vector amount in the opp-E3Fe diffion.
* *
ri
*.
* t
-rot-
ThecommandG4lX
(I, J) on the end point, and the tool center moves toward the point of the new vector from that of the o1d vector on the start point. (I, J) is expressed in an incremental value from the end point, and is significant only as a direction, and its amount is arbitrary.
center
specifies a
of
patl
New vector
\
Start
point
(I , J)
programmed path
In case the old vector is zero, this command specifies the equipment to enter from the cancel mode into the cutter compensation mode. At this time, the offset number is specified bv the H code.
New vector
Start poinl
(x
Programmed path
*o(r.J)
or J is omitted, (I, J) is assumed to be the same as (X, Y). That is, Y the conrnand G4 I X ; specifies a new vector at right angles with (x, Y) to be creatEdlIII
New vector
rY Yl
Programmed path
Old
vector
Start point
If, however, G00 is specified, each axis moves independently at. the rapid traverse rate. 2) Case of c02, G03
'1'
The commald
;
specifies a tteffitorE-be cEl-ea to the left looking toward the direction in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end point, and the tool center to move along t,he arc advancing from the point of the old vector on the arc starE point toward that of the new vector. This is, however, established on assumption the old vector is created correctly. The offset vector is created toward the arc center or opposite direction agalnst the arc eenter.
G02(c03)X
-102-
*: f e
(X,Y)
Tool center path
(X,Y)
Progammed path
R
Old vector
Start point
G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offsec ro the right of work looking toward the direction i.n which the tool advanees. That is, the vector created by G42 is toward the direction opposite to that created by G41. Except for this, Ehe o.ffset method is quite the same as in the case of G4L. 1) Case of G00, c01
G42XYIJ
P$,J)
I
Programmed path
x
I
/t/'-
New vectot
t
$
G42X
New vector
Old vector
G00,
moves
-r03-
z) Case
of c02,
G03
G42X
Programmed path
(x,Y)
New vector New vector
-_\R
Old vector
Programmed path
Example 14.2.8(a)
Y axis
I
I
-xoi,
Unit:
mm
c91 c17 c41 c01 X15.00{y25.00 Ft80 H05; c39 135.00 J15.00; x35.00 Yl5.00; G39 r25.00 J-20.00; x25 .00 Y-20.00; c39 15.00 J-25.00; G03 X25.00 Y-20.50 R25.50; (Ineremental programming)
Example 14.2.8(b)
Tool center path
Programmed path
Y axis
**,
Unit:
mm
1) Specification of the offset number The offset 4umber ls specified by the H code, and can be specified anywhere before the flrst ehange from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode. Also, once speclfled, the offset number does not need to be specified agaLn, unless lt has to be changed'
-104-
2) Change
4)
from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode A move command at the time of change from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode, must be positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used. Change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode A move command at the time of change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode, must be positioning (G00) or li-near interpolation (G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used. Switch between cutter compensation left and cutter compensation right The offset direction is switched from left to right, or frorn right to left generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be s\,/itched not through it only i-n positioning (G00) or linear interpolarion (G0l). In this case, the tool path is as showl be1ow.
Tool center
path
New vector
/' / -/ -(X, Y)
Newvector 2$'t)
\
Programmed path
vector
c41 GOOG42X Y
5)
Change
GOlG41X
Switch of offset direction
c42
Y
I
The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in the offset caneel mode' but can be changed in the offset mode only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01).
Tool center pa*r
Programmed path New vector
Nerv vector
of the offset
amount
Programmed path
,/
,t6
GO1X _Y_H05;
6) Positive/negative offset amount. and tool center path If the offset amount is made negative (-), it is equal that G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the work it will pass around the inside thereof, and vise versa. D^l1^,.i-^ : ^ rur-tuwru6 rrgiur shows one example. Generally speaking, the offset amount ehall lro nrnol4mmed to be posi_tive (+). When a tool path is programmed as in (a) if the offset amount is made negative (-), the tool center moves as in ' (b), and vise versa.
-105-
Tool center path made in accordance with positive or negative value of tool offset
For a cornered figure (involved in corner circular interpolation) in general, the offset amount naturally cannot be made negative (-) to cut the inside. In order to cut the inside corner of a cornered figure, an arc with an apPropriate radius must be lnserted there to provide smooth cutting. 7) If the tool length offset is commanded during cutter compensation, the offset amount of cutter compensation is also regarded to have been changed.
14.2,10 Programexample
axis
t
I
I
X axis
Unit: mm
Zero point
Y2o.oo rio8;
@ G}I Z-25.00
(H08 is a tool offset number, and the cutter radius value should be stored in the memory corresponding to this number).
F100;
o Y40.00 F250;
/:\ \) x40.00
@ @ c39 r40 .00
J.20
.00
Y20.00;
G39 r40.00;
@ @ @ @
c02 x40.00 Y-40.00 R40.00; x-20.00 Y-20.00 R20.00; c01 x-60.00; G00 Z-25.00; c40 Y-20.00 Ia02;
-106-
;'. ., .'
14.3 Cutter
Compensation C (G40
G42l
In the figure below, in order to cut a workpiece indicated as A with an R-radius tool, the path for the center of the tool must be the B which is separated R distance from the A. The tool being separated some distance like this is called offset. By the cutter compensation function, the tool path being separated some distance (name1y, offset) is computed. Therefore, the workpiece shape ls programmed with the cutter compensation node by a programmer, and in machining, if the cutter radius (offset amounts) is measured and set to Ehe CNC, the tool path is offset (path B) regardless of the
program.
The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to 200 offsets. (However, they are 200 offsets in total with tool length compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the program, and is set via the CRT/MDI. . The range of values in which the offset amount can be set is as follows;
mm
input
rnn
Offset
amount
0 - +999.999
The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. impossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
14.3.3 Offset vector
Ir is
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the amount assigned by H code. It is calculated inside the control unit, and its dj-rection is up-dated in accordance with the progress of Ehe tool in each block. This offset vector (hereinafter called veetor) is produced insi.de the control unit in order to find out how much the tool motion should be offset, and is used to comPute a path offset from the programmed path by the tool radius. The offset vector is deleted by reset. This vector always follows the tool as its progress, and it is very important, when making a program, to understand the siatus oi the vector. Read Ehe following description carefully to understand how the vector is generated.
_, 1^l
6ut usitg (X, Y) )t (I, J) in the program tape and rhe vector is comThe coordinate values of an axis not in the offset plane are not subject lf.lEli;"'offset, and the command values for that axis on the program tape are used
aa theY are. in stmuttaneous
comPensated.
3
"na Eion is carried out in the plane determined by Gl7, Glg and Gl9, igo; plane selection.) This plane is ca1led the offset plane. For Iwhen the xY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
The offset Plane must be changed dur:ing the offset cancel mode. If it is performed during the offset mode, an alarm (No. 37) is displayed and the machine is s topped.
G code
Gl7
GI8 GI9
Offset plane
X-Y plane Z-X plane Y-Z plane
Using G40' G4l and G42, the deletion and generation of cutter compensation vectors is commanded. They are commanded simultaneously with G00, G01, GOz or G03 to define a mode qhich determines the amount and direction of offsec vectors, and the direction of tool motion.
G code
c40
Function
G42
A G4l or G42
command
command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and a G40 causes the equipment to enter the cancel node. The offset procedure, for example, is explained in the next figure. The block Q) is called the start-up. In this block, the offset cancel mode is changed to the offset mode (G41). At the end point of thls block, the tool center is translated by the cutter radius in the direction being vertlcal to the next block path (from Pl to P2). The cutter conopensation value ls specified by H07, namely the offset nurbber is 7, and G41 means the cutter compens"li-otr 1eft. -> After being startiup, when the workpiece shape is programmed as PI + p2 P8 + p9 + Pl, the cutter compensation is performed automatically.
In the block (! , the cutter returns to the start_ point by corornanding G40 (of f set cancel) . At the end point of the block @-, the cutter center is translated vertically to the prograrnmed path (from P9 to pl). At the end of the program, the G40 (offset cancel) must be commanded.
-108-
cr (700,
P4(s00,11s0)
1300)
Ps(900,11s0)
@
(-l
c3
s0
c2 (1sso , 1sso)
izso , soo)P3
(1
ls0 , s50)
r0\ \:/
(^/
"l
Unit: mm
/'(\
Y a-ris
a7\ tol
art poin
rn Nl c90 c17 c00 c41 H07 X250.0 \v /l \:/ N2 cOl Y900.0 F150;
G92 XO YO ZO;
Y550.0
\v /:\
\)
o /;\
N3 X450.0;
In advance, the offset amount must be set with the offset number 07.
N9 X700.0 Y650.0;
109
*"i$fj
In thls item, the details of the cutter compensation C ls explained. i) Cancel mode At the beginning when power is applied the control is ln the cancel mode. In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center coincides wlth the progralnmed path. The cancel mode (c40) should programmed before the end of a program. I{hen the program ends in the offset mode, positioning cannot be rnade to terninal point of the program, and the tool position will be separated f the terminal position by the vector value. 2) Start up In the cancel mode, when a block which sacisfies a1I of the following co tions is executed, the equipment enters the offset mode, this is called start up bloek. a) G4I or G42 has been commanded. Or, it has already been commandedr a11d centrol enters the G4l or G42 mode. b) The offset number for cutter compensation 1s not H00. c) A nrove in any of the axes (I, J, K are excluded) in the offset plane been cornmanded, and its commanded move is not 0. In the start up block, arc commands (G02' G03) are not a1lowed, as the al (No. 3i) is generated and the tool stops. At start up, two blocks are After the first block is read and executed, the next block enters the cu compensation buffer (which cannot be indicated). In the ueantime, in the case of single block mode, two blocks are read the mrrchine stops after the first block execution. There.qfter,2 blocks are read in advance normally, lnside the CNC, there three blocks, the block under execution, and the next two blocks which entered into buffcr. (\'ote\ The meanlng of trinner-sidet' and of ttouter-sidet' encountered later as follows: An angle of intersection created by two bloclcs of move commands, referred to as ttinner-sidett, when over 180o and as ttouter sidett ' 0" to 180", as measured at the workpiece side.
compensation C
Inner side
Workpiece side
Progtammed
180"
Ou:er .side
hoglammed path
-110-
a)
When
s0)
i) Linear + Linear
Programmed path
path
/t
Hereafter, in the figures 1 S means a single block stop poinr { L indicates a straight line. t C indicates an arc.
\\
.\
Programmed path
goes around the outside of (90" Sct5IB0"). Tool path in start up or cancel has two types ed by paraneter SUPM (Data No. 0016).
a
d
corner
rnd
R.
dL
an obtuse angle
and
Type A i) Linear
->
Linear
Programmed paih
Type
i) Linear + Linear
II
Programmed
;3/.[_
/\.
'r
/ ll
(Note) The intersection is the point where two offset paths calculated by continuous two blocks are intersected.
Programmed path
In tersectlon
III
c)
the outside of
+
an
Ilp" A i) Linear
Programmed path
.,
Progr'immed paih
When
the tool goes around the outside linear + linear at less than I degree, compensation is performed as follows. an
acuce angle
Programmed path
deg.
LTz
*
E. {'
i
3)
In offset mode In the offset mode, offset ls performed correctly, if non-positioning commands such as auxiliary functions or dwell would not be prograrutred in two or more successive blocks. Otherwise overcuttlng or undercutting wi1l,occur. Offset plane must not be changed during offset mode. Otherwise an alaru is displaved and the tool stoDs.
When
a)
i) Linear + Linear
Programmed path
path
Programmedpath
iii)
Arc + Linear
Programmed path
/S
lntcrcaa+in-
point
Ct..
Plogrammed
fc
I
I
v) Straight line to straight line in the case in which it goes around at a narror{ angle (less than 1o) and the offset vector becames abnorrnally
1arge.
Progranrmed
Also in case of arc to straight 1ine, stralght the reader should infer 1n the same procedure.
to arc,
- lI3 -
b)
outside corner at an obtuse angle (90 < c < Ig0o) ii) Linear + Arc
i) Linear + Linear
r{.____
i-i t"l
polnt
path
iii)
Arc + Linear
lntr$ecting
pornt
lqteriecting
T,
point
\ C"
ho$ammed path
-IT4-
- - -.r+!'.,r
,:+siF..
'_' ;1a: ' lil: rl'-;i
g
g
c)
L4ren
going an outside corner ac an acute angle i)Linear + Li.near ii) Linear + Arc
Programmed path
t.r,
Programmed path
iii)
Arc + Linear
Programmed path
d) Exceptional cases i) The end point of arc is not oq the arc If there is an arc, lead-in line as shown, assume an imaginary circle which passes through the arc end point and is concen-trical to the arc, and draw vectors for comp ensa t ion , on th e as s ump t i-on that the cutter compensation has been carried out for the imaginary circle. As a result, a path for the cutter center, is established, which is differenr from the path compensa t ed according to the program that regards the arc lead-in l-ine as a straight 1ine. Similarly consider a case of
2Ta-A?.
Imaginary
-\
Programmed
Lead
End oi arc
arc\
,
\ \ \,i
\l
u.S
/
{^o'
,.\'
- ll5 -
ii')
\\rhen the
off \EL
amount is lar
When the offsel amo small Progranrmed parh
The center
of the arc A
In regard to the left figure, the intersecting point of the arcs is present on the offset path if the offset value is smaIl, but it may disappear if the offset value is quite large. In this case, alarm (No. 33) occurs at the end point of the preceding block, and Ehe tool will stop. Concerning the left figure, there is an intersecting point P of Ehe offset paths for the arcs A and B, if the offset value is smal1, but the intersecting point cannot be found if the offset value is quite 1arge.
iii)
The center of the arc is identical with the start Doint or end Doint If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end point, Alarm No. 38 is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end point of the preceding block.
(G4I
F
rnode)
Programmed
4) Offset cancel In the offset mode, vrhen a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the equipment enters the cutter compensation cancel mode, and the action of this block is ca11ed the offset cancel. a) G40 has been commanded. b) H00 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter compensation. Lhen performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not available. -'If a circular arc is commanded, an alarm (No. 34) is generated and the tool stops. In the offset cancel, the control executes the instructions in that block and the block in the cutter compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and stoPS. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed without reading the next block. Then the control is in the cancel mode, and norma11y, the btock to be executed. next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is not read into the buffer for cutter compensation-
116
a)
When
i) Linear + I.inear
Programmed path
o,l0
/(\
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
b)
When
Ig0')
Programmed path
(o{ 2)
/L
path
Programmed
o40
Programmed path
/L Programmed
path
,f
,/
..t C
Intersection
- I17 -
c)
When
going around
outside corner at an acute angle (q < 90,) i) Linear + Linear ii) Arc -> Linear
an
path
path
path
i) Linear
Linear
ii) Arc
->
Linear
Programmed
path
d) L4ren
the tool goes around the outside linear less than I degree, compensation is performed + li.near at an acute angle as fo11ows.
- ll8 -
.:i'
))
Change
F.
F
of offset dlrection in the offset mode The offset direction is decided by G codes (c41 and G42) for cutter pensation and the sign of offset amount as follows.
(inolo --t=\ nf nffcor
amOUnt
com-
G code
G4l
\r4 L
Right side offset Left side offset in the offset mode. block and the block conception of inside The offset amount in
fn a special case, the offset direction may be changed However, the change is not available i-n the start up following it. When the offset direction is changed, the and outside disappears to become common for all cases. the following example i-s assumed to be positive. i) Linear + Lj-near ii) Linear + Arc
/
Programmed path Programmed path
Tool center
Path
iii)
Arc + J,inear
- il9 -
v) Llhen an intersection
performed._
and
intersection with the offset Path is not required, the vector normal to block B Ls created at the start point of block B. i) Linear + Linear
G42, if
Programmed
path
Programmed path
Tool center
Path c'
L --'
Programmed path
-120-
iii)
Arc + Arc
Block A (G42)
(G42)
rl
w./
/\
An arc whose end
point is not on
the alc.
Progtammed path
^-
\
Center
iv)
the length of tool center path becomes more than a circle because of cutter comDensation @Stnopossibi1ityofgeneratingtheabovesituation. However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J, and K the above situation can oecur.
When
a
Programmed path
Tool center
path
(G42)
/
/D
/
N5 c02 c9l x5000 Y-7000; N6 c4l c02 J-5000; N7 G42 G01 X5000 Y7000:
Y
L'
p\
I
\
circle circumference: an arc is formed from Pl to P2 as shown. (Depending on the circumstances, an alarm may be displayed due ttlnterference to the Check" described 1ater. ) To execute a circle with more than one ci.rcumf erence, the circle must be specified in segments.
121
6)
rf the commands below are speclfied in the offset mode, a temporary offset cancel is actuated and thereafter the system will restore the offset mode automatically. Refer to 14.3.6(4) Offser cancel and 14.3.6(2) Starr-up, for detalls of these
operati-ons.
Tennporary
offset
cancel
a)
G2B
automatic return to reference point If G28 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point, and the offset mode will be automaticallv restored after the reference point is reached. If the offset vector remains at the reference point return in such a case as the current position being the intermediate point, the CNC makes it to zero for each axis of which reference point return was completed.
G
28
lntermediate point
-5
(G42 G00)
s
Reference point
F
b) G29 automatic return from reference point It G29 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point r ard the offset mode will be restored automatically fron the subsequent block.
When cornmanded inmrediately
after
G28
lntermediate poinl
-t
(G42 G00)
Reference point
-122-
$
A When cornmanded
G28
lntermediate point
7)
Cutter compensation G code in the offset mode The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block, irrespective of rnachining on inner or outer wall, by commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42) in the offset mode,
independently. If this code is specified in a clrcular command, correct circular motion will not be obtained. When the direction of offset is expected to reverse by the command of cutter compensation G code (G41, G42), refer to (5). Linear + Linear
G42 mode)
f
+--I
Arc + Linear
(G42 mode)
-ts ,/c
-L23-
8) Comrand for tenporary cancelling offset vector During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programrning) is conrnanded, the offset vector js teuporarlly cancelled and thereafter offset node is automaticallY restored. In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from the intersectirrg point to the coumanded point where offseE vector 1s canceled. Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the intersecting point.
Tool center path
S (Intersection)
S
(In!ersection)
t-4' -/\
'
/-\
-t\
I\
)'-
/
/t
--r
\ssl-
G92 block N7
(G4l
rnode)
N5 G9I G01 X 30O Y7000; N6 X-3000 Y6000; N7 G92 X 1000 Y2000; N8 G90 G01 X 4000 Y8000;
(lJote)
SS
indicates the polnt where the tool stops twlce ln the single block
mode.
9) A block without tool ncvement The followlng blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks , the tool will not move even if cutter radius.compensatlon is effected.
.. o.. O M05; S2I; A G04 XiO000; . .... () @ clo Pol xloo; O (cI7) Z,2000; ..
M code outpur S code output Dr.'ell
Move cornmand
No movement
distance is zero.
Move distance
ls zero.
-r24-
a) When commanded
commanded
a single block without tool movement is commanded ln the offset mode, vector and tool center path are the same as those when the block is the not connanded. (Refer to item (3) Offset node) This block is executed at the single block stop point.
mode
-t25-
However, when the move distance is zeto, even if the block is commanded singly, tool motion becomes the same as that when more than one block of without tool movement are commanded, which will be described subsequently.
Two blocks without tool movement should not be commanded consecutively. If comrnanded, a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block, so over-
N7 Nq.. (Note 4)
N9
\
\
Blocks N7 and N8
/N6
(Note)
SSS means
-126-
&,
P.
+' t!fi
*Y.
c)
I^lhen commanded together with offset cancel When a block without tool movement is comrnanded
together with an offset cancel' a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a direction normal to tool motion in the earlier b1ock, the Vector is cancelled in the next move command.
N7
i)
When
of the previous block ls G4L or G42 In this case the CNC assumes that the movement frorn the end point of previous block in the direction of (I, J or K) has been commanded.
the
mode
E (x,y)
Tool comes here
by G40 block. (I, J)
Programmed path
-t27-
In this case, note that the CNC obtalns an intersection of the tool irrespective of whether inner or outer wal1 machinlng ls specified. _/ _/
Tool center path
path
-. x-/ a+c\
--/ --/
--\ -
---tt\
mmed path
-\ -\
-
CAz
_r_ (l,J)
When
an i.ntersection is not obtainabJ-e, the tool comes to the posltion normal to the previous block at the end of the previous b1ock.
x
-_
0, J)
Programmed path r
128
11) When the length of the tool center path becomes more than a clrcle.
,1,/ :r
Programmed
,P2
(G41)
N5 c01 G91 X10000; N6 c02 J-6000; N7 c40 c01 x5000 Y5000 r_100J_lo0;
In the above case' the tool center path does not go around a circle but moves only from point PI to p2 along an arc. According to under some ci-rcumstance, an alarm may be generated by the interference check described 1ater. (if lt is ddsired to move a tool around a circle, a circle must be conrnanded with partitions.) ll) Corner
movement When two or more
vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement. If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isnrt performed and the latter vector is ignored.
avy<av limit
if avx< aV limit,
-129-
If AVx<AVlimit and AVycAVlimit, the latter vector is ignored. The AVIimit is set in advance by parameter No. 0557, CRCDL. If Ehese vectors do not coi-ncide, a move is generated to turn around the corner. This move belongs to the latter block.
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the feed rate is equal to that in block N7 If the block N7 is G00 mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse rate, while if it is G01, G02, G03, the tool is moved at the cutting feed rate.
However, if
the path of the next block is semicircular or Eore, the function is not performed. The reason for thia j-s as follows:
above
/-,
P2
P3,P4
P5
I
I
I
N4
\
\
N5 N6 N7
N8
x1500 Y2000; x1500 Y2000; G02 J-6000; c01 xl500 Y-2000; G40 Xl500 Y-2000;
)
Tool
center path
l\/
\-/ \--
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as f ollor+s: P0 + Pl + P2 + P3 + (Circ1e) + P4 + P5 +P6+P7 But if the dlstance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the polnt ignored.. Therefore, the tool path is as follows: P0 + Pl -> P2 + P4 + P5 + P6 -> P7 Nanely, circle cutting by the block N6 1s ignored.
P3
1C
-130-
-s;
:,
* i:'
j
12) Interference check Tool overcutting is called rinterferencet. The interference check funetion checks for tool overcutting i-n advance. However, all interference can not be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if overcutting does not occur. a) Reference conditions for interference The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path. (From 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths). rn addition to the above condition, the angle between the sLart point and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point on the prograffred path in ci-rcular rnachining. (More than lB0 degrees)
t::
Example
g'
,:i
of condition O
:
;?;
Programmed path The directions of these two paths are quite different
Programmed path
1f
Example
of condition @ /
Tool center
oath ,/- -
Programmed Path
t.'
/
f
,,/
,/"ou
\
I
Center
(c41) N5 c01 c9l x8000 Y2000 HOi; N6 c02 X3200 Y-r600 r-2000 J-8000 H02; N7 cOl x2000 Y-5000; (Offset value corresponding to H01 : r = 2000) -1 (Offset value corresponding to H02 : t2 - 6000)
In the above example, the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant. But after cutter compensation, the arc is placed in the four quadrants. b) Correction of interference in advance O Removal of the vector causing the interference When cutter radj-us compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors Vl, YZ, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5 , V6, V7 and V6 between B and C are produced, the nearest veccors are checked first. If interference occurs, they are ignored. But if the vectors to be i-gnored Cue to interference are the last vectors at the corner, they cbnnot be ignored. Interference check between vectors V6 and Vc -- Interfere V4 and V5 are ignored
Check
between V3 and
Check
VU
Interference
Ignored
Interference Ignored Interfere Cannot be lgnored If, whl1e checking, a vector wlth no interference is detected, subsequent vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular movement, a Ij-near movement 1s produced if the vectors are interfered. -
-132-
Exarnp
le
I)
c--/
Tool nose center path
Programmed
path
\
I
I \
I
I
V4, V5 : Interference
If the tool is stopped by single block operation at block A, the tool center moves to Vr.
(Example 2)
I
\ I or O2
v2
su,
L
!l
vl
Tool nose
center path
I'if---
\C
Programmed path
If the tool is stopped by single block operatj.on at block A, the tool center moves to Va. Then puttiig the operatlon into start moves t.he tool to \,7_ or V^. /d
or o:
-133-
stopped
wi-th an alarm. If the interference occurs after correction O or if there are only one pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors interfere, the alarm (No.41) is displayed and the tool is stopped jmmediately after execution of the preceding block. (If the block is executed by the single block operatj-on, the tool is stopped at the end of the block.)
Tool nose center path
Stopped
v2, v5
Interference Interference
v1,v6:
After ignoring vectors V, and V5 because of interference, interference also occurs between vectors V1 and V6. The alarm is displayed and the tool is stopped. c) interference is supposed though there is no actual interference Several examples will be given. (!) Depression which is smaller than the offset value
When
Tool center path
Programmed path Stop
There'is no actual interference, but since the di-rection programmed in block B is opposite to that of the path after cutter compensatlon the tool stops and an alarm is displayed.
-134-
path
Stop I
B.
Compensation is not performed for conmands input from the MDI. However, when automatic operation using the NC tape composed of absolute commands is temporarily stopped by the single block function, l'{DI operation
is performed, then automatic operation starts agains, the tool path is as follows: In this case, the vectors at the start point of the next block are translated and the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks. Therefore, from point Pc, compensation is accurately performed.
V.
D2
"t, (
NTDI
operaLlon
VB
\'
/ ;\
When points Po, Po and P" are programmed j-n an absolute command, the tool is stopped by thb single block function after executing the block from P^ to Pp and the tool is moved by MDI operation. Vectors V-, and V-. ^are t?anslated to V'-, and V'-^ and offset vectors are recal3illated fBi the vectors V^, ana 4,t^ betweenbflock p--p^ and p^-p*. t"lrr"" lr3"tto, Vo, However, is not scalucutatef, afain, compensation is accurately performed from po{n-t P".
I
4
) Manual operat i.on For manual operation during the cutter compensatlon, refer to item III-4.5.
135
15) If the tool leneth compensation is executed during cutter compensation, the compensatlon amJunt of the cutter is regarded to be changed. 16) General precautions on offset a) Offset value command The offset value is cornmanded by a H code which specifies an offset value a H code rematns valld until another H code is commanded or cleared. In addltion to specifying the offset value for cutter compensation, the H code ls also used to command offset value for tool offset. b) Changing the offset value In general, the offset value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when changing tools. If the offset value is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point of the block is calculated for the new offset
value.
Calculated from offset value in block 6.
c) Positive/negative offset amount and tool center path If the offset amount is negative (-), distribution is made for a figure in which G4Irs and G42's are all replaced with each other on the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool eenter is passing around the outsj-de of the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vise versa. The figure below shows one example. Generally,'the offset amount is programmed to be positive (+). When a tool path is programned as in (a), if the offset amount is rnade negative (-), the tool center moves as j-n (b), and rrise versa. Consequently, the same tape permits cutting both male and female shapes, and any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset amount. (applicable if start-up and cancel is A type).
(a)
136
d) Overcutting by cutter compensation i) Machining an inside corner at a radius smaller than the cutter radius hthen the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because the inner offsetting of the cutter: will result in overcdttings, an alarm is generated and the NC stops at the start of the block. In single block operation, the overcutting is generated because the tool is stopped after the block execution.
Tool center path An alarm is Senerated and the operation stops
Programmed path
An alarm is generated and the operation stops here in single block operation.
'
ii) Machining a groove smaller than the tool radius Since the cutter compensation forces the path of the center of the tool to move in the reverse of the prograromed direction, overcutting will result. In this case an alarm is generated and the NC dtops at the start of the block.
An alarm is generated and the operation stops. Tool center path
Programmed
{ Z*\
137
iii)
When machining a step smaller than the tool radius When machlning of the step is commanded by circular
machlning in the a step smaller than the tool radius, the case of a program containing path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to the programmed dj-rection. In this case, the first vector is ignored, and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block operation is stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued. If the step is of linear, no alarru wil1.be generated and cut correctly. However uncut part will remain.
Linear movemenl
Circular
-.
Prosrammed path
iv) Ttre start up and the movement in Z axts on the cutter compensation C It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axi-s after the cutter compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining. In the case above, if it is desired to divide the uotj-on along the Z axi-s into rapid trave.rse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below. Nl c9t c00 c41 x50000 Y50000 Hl; N3 G01 2-30000 Fi; N6 Yi00000 F2; In the program example above, when executing block Nl, blocks N3 and N6 are also entered into the buffer storager arrd by the relationship amon thero the correct compensati-on is performed as in the figure to the rieht.
Move command
in Z axis.
Start up
138
N3
x50000 Y50000
Hl;
As there are two move command blocks not included in the selected plane and the block N6 cannot be entered into the buffer storage, the tool center path is calculated by the information of NI in the fi-gure above. That is, the offset vector is not calculated in start up and the overcutting may result. The above example should be modified as follow: The move command in the same direction as that of the move command after the motion in Z axis should be programmsd.
(The direction of the move command N2 is the same as that of N6.) /N2
When
executing the block Nl, the blocks N2 and N3 are entered into the buffer storage and the correct comDensation is performed by the relationship between Nl and N2.
- rJ'-{ -
14.4
The offsec amount, which are used in tool length offset and cutter compensation, can be set by G10 command in programming. The command format. is as follows.
G1OP R t P: OffseT number R: 0ffset amount The offset amount is absolute or incremental depending on the G90 or respectively
14.5
Scaling (G50, c51)
G9l
Scaling is commanded to figures specified by machining programs. To specify scaling, effectuate it by setting parameter (No.36 SCLX, Y, Z) first. G51r J _K_P_; IrJ,F-S.afing cettter x,v,Z coordinate values (Specify the absolute posirion) : Scale factor (Least input increment: 0.00I or 0.00001 .... P parameter selection (No. 36 SCR)) By this command, the subsequent move command is scaled by the scale factor specified by P, starting with the point specified by I,J,K as the scaling This scaling mode is cancelled by G50. G50 : Scaling mode cancel command G51 : Scaling mode com:nand The scale factor can be specified within the following range: 0.0000f - 9.99999 or 0S0L * 999.999 times
center.
Pa
P3
\.Po'
l-T
Pe'
,/ P!'
l,'t1t: -l-
P2'- --
Pl - P4 : Figures of machining program PIr - P4': Figures after scaling : Scaling center Po If P is not specified, the scaling factor preset by the I{DI & CRT is applicable. If I,J,K are omitted, the G51 comrnand point serves as the scaling center. This scaling is not applicable to the offset quantities such as cutter compensation amount, tool length compensati-on amount, tool offset amount, and others.
-140-
---\
l12 scalng
L)l
(Note l) Specify G51 in an independent block. Cancel G5I by G50 without fail after scaling. (Note 2) The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. (Note 3) If a setting value is employed as a scale factor r^rithout specifying P, the setting value at G5l courmand time is employed as the scale factor, and a change of this value by another command, if anlr is noL
(Note 4) Whether the scaling function is effective or not, it can be set by a n'rtmprer for each axis. The scaling function always becomes effecti-ve for the clrcular radius coruoand R in the G5l mode, irrespecti-ve of these parameters. (Note 5) Scaling is not effective for manual operation, but is effeeLive for the tape, memory, or MDI operations. (Note 6) Scaling is not applicable to the followi-ng movement in case of the canned cycle Z-axj-s movement * Cutting depth Q and return relief of deep hole cycle (G83, G73). x X, Y shift quantity in fine boring (c76) and back boring (c87). (Note 7) Specify G27, G28, G29, c30, and G92 in G50 mode wiChout fail. (Note 8) If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In chis a case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the cutter movement by cutter compensation C.
effective.
14.6 Coordinate System Rotation (c68, Gj9]_. A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the posi-tions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling
it after rotation.
- l4i -
Center
of
t
rotation
,i
Icl7 ] cl8 |
I
c68
RR
G19.'
o,B: Designate two axes among X, Y and Z (coordinate value of rotational center) rhar correspond to cI7, Gl8 and Gf9. (G90/G9l mode 1s effective.)
Angle of rotation ('r+rr is the CCW direction. Comnand with an absolute value. An incremental value can also be comnanded by the setting of a parameter. (No. 4i RIN))
After this command is specified, the subsequent cosmands are rotated by the angle specified with R around the point designated with cr and B. Command the angle of rotatj.on within the range of -360,000<R5360,000 in 0.001 deg.
increment.
,/
(a,0)
-r42-
The rotation plane depends on the plane (G17, Gl8, Gl9) selected when G68 is designated. Gl7, GIB or Gl9 is not required to be designated in the same block as G6B. When o and B are omitted, the position where G68 is commanded is Set as the
center of rotation. As for the incremental commands up to an absolute position command' following a G68 cornmand, it is assumed that the rotary center were not specified (the point where G68 was commanded is the center of rotation). When R is omitted, the value set to parameter is regarded as the angle. The coordinate system rotatj-on is cancelled by G69; G69 may be designated in the same block as the other commands. Tool offset, such as cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or tool offset, is performed after t.he coordinate sysLem is rotated fo? the command
p
As for the incremental position commands designated between the G68 block and a block with an absolute comnand; it is regarded that the center of rotation is not designated (that is, it is regarded that the point where G68 was designated is the center of rotation). (Note l) When a value with a decimal point is designated for R, the position of the decimal point becomes the unit of angle. (Note 2) If a movement command is specified with G69, the following lncremental command does not move the tool in the incremental motion.
rogram.
Nl c92 X-5000 Y-5000 G69 G17; N2 c68 G90 X7000 Y3000 R60.000; N3 c90 GOl x0 Y0 F200; N4 G91 X10000; N5 G02 Y10000 R10000; N6 G03 X-10000 r-5000 J-5000; N7 G0r Y-10000; N8 c69 c90 x-5000 Y-5000 M02;
(c9r xs000 Y5000)
(Exarnple I )
a/-\
.\ \
Origimlly programm.d
tool palh
60. \ {
a
Center
0f
.otalion
(7000,3000)
(-5000, -5000)
(Note 3)
G68
mode (command
Gl7, G18 or
-I43-
IE is possible to specify G68 and G69 wit.hin cutter compensation rotation plane must coi.ncide with the plane of cutter comDensation C.
(Exarnple 2)
H01
C.
The
NI G92 XO YO G69 GOI; N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 Fi000 N3 G68 R-30000; N4 G9 I X2000; N5 G03 Y1000 r-1000 J500: N6 G01 X-2000; N7 Y-1000; N8 c69 G40 c90 X0 Y0 M30:
\*)r-
(0, 0)
Tool path
2) Coordinate system rotation in the scaling mode. If a coordinate system rotation corrmand is executed in the scaling mode (G51 mode), the coordinate value (cl,B) of the rotat.ion center will also be scaled, but not the rotation angle (R). When a move eouuland is issued, the scaling i e annl i od first and then the coordinates are rotated. Therefore, the commands must be specified in the order shown below for programming.
(Example
1)
0N)
A coordinate'system rotation command (G68) should not be issued in cutter comPensation C mode (G41, G42) on scaling mode (G51). The coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior to setting the cutter
compensation C mode.
-r44-
i@
Repetitive Commands It is possible to store one Program as a subprogram and recall the subprogram by changing the angIe. (Exaurple 4) Setting the parameter RIN (No. 4I ) to I
G92 X0 Y0 G69 Gi7: GOl F200 H01; M98 P2100; I"198 P072200 L7; c00 c90 x0 Y0 M30;
o o
c9l
R45.0;
(
I I
i
I
I {
wn.n offset
awned
is
\l
\_-_
l___ f-
_ _J
S$b-!loSB$r
-146-
(Example 2)
(
Cut
G51
c68
ter compensation cancel) ..; (Scaling mode) ..; (Coordinate system rotation
..; (Cutter compensation
C)
0N)
uar
(Example 3)
G92XOYO;
c5 1X3000Y1500P500;
c68x2000Y I 000R45000 ;
Y-i000;
x2000;
When only coordinate system rotation is applied.
z'B' -r7- - -1
When
only scaling
/l
is applied.
' A cutting
program
-145-
input here.
\\4' t'
(3oo,1oo)
\t-//
1"
200 300
100
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom nacro because they are stored in the custom mrcro system variable #5061 to /15064, as follows: #5061 . X axis coordinate value 1t5062 . Y axis coordlnate value 115063 . Z axls coordinate value 115064 4th axis coordinate value The skip functlon can be used when the movement distance is not known as in the standard-size feed in grinders. Refer to the manualg published by the machine tool bullder. (Note 1) If G3t comnand is issued while cutter compensation C is applied, an alarm is displayed. Cancel the cutter compensation with the G40 command before the G31 comrnand is specified. (Note 2) Dry run, override and automatlc acceleration/deceleration are in_ effective for skip function. However, it is possible to make effective them by parameter setting (SKPF, parameter No. 0015)
-r4B-
15. MEASUREMENT
FUNCTTONS
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move followi-ng the G3 I command' like GOl. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, executlon of the comrnand is interrupted and the next block is executed. G3l is a one-shot command and is effective onJ-y in the block in which it is specified. The motion after the input of the skip signal depends on whether the next block is an incremental or absolute command. l) When the next block is an incremental command: The motj.on in the next block is performed incrementally from the position at which it is interrupted by the skip signal. (Example) C31C9lXI00.0F100; Y 50.0;
Actuai motion
Skip signal is
5
\
0.0
Motion without
skip signal
\ \ .\
-=\2)
When
100.0
--
the next bl-ock is an absolute command with only one axis specified: The specified axis moves to the commanded position. The axi-s which was not specified remains at the position when the skip signal is input.
(Example)
c31c90X200.0Fr00;
YI
00.0;
Skip signal is
irput
here.
A
3)
6x = zoo.or
signal is input.
is an absolute cornmand with t\^'o axes specif ied: the posiEion specified by next block even if the skip
(lixample)
C31C90X200.0F100;
x300.0Y100.0;
-r47-
Command
The custom macro command is the command to call the custom macro body. Custom macro or subprogram can be called by the following commands.
16.1.1 M98 (Sinsle call)
Command format is as follows: M98P_; t- Called macro body program No. With the above command, the macro body specified by P is called
16.1
.2
The subprogram can be called using M code set in parameter. N G X ... M98 P<pt; iiitEa-of commanding as above , the same operat ion can be commanded using
The correspondence of M code <m> which calls subplogram and the program number <P> (09001 - 09003) of the called subprogram shall be set by paramerers (tlo. 0240 UMMCDI - No . 0242 UMI'ICD3) ffi5p"Cram caff , E -maiirnuru of 3 among M03 - I'1255, except M30 and t"l code which does not buffer (parameter No. 0035,'0036 MBUFI, MBUF2) can be used.
(Note l) Sirnilarly to M98, signal MF and I"1 code are not output. (Note 2) Delivery of argument is not possible. (Note 3) Subprogram call M code used in the subprogram which is called by M or code does not,executes subprogram call but as an ordinal M code.
16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code
When parameter (No. 0040 TMCR) is set beforehand, subprogram (09000) can be called using T code. T<t>; N G X the above command resul-ts in the same operation of command of the following 2 blocks
common
variable
/10149_as
j1"_:ryIsrrl.
(Note 1) It is not possible to command with a same block as that. of subprogram call using I'1 code. (Note 2) Subprogram call T code used in the subprogram which is called by M or T code does not executds subprogram call but as an ordinal T code.
16.1.4 G66 (Modal call) The command format
is as follows: G66P : L Called.macro body program No. The above command selects the macr.o modal call mode for NC. In other words, every time each block subsequent to the above command is executed, the macro designated by P is called. A1so, an argument can be designated by a block subsequent Eo the above command. For this argument, refer to 16.1.3. The macro modal call mode is cancelted by the command below.
G67 ;
r50 -
s
re,.
Gt Gr
&:.
* g
1
g il
ti
&
16.
CUSTOM MACRO A
li
i
:
Machine tools builders are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fai1. If. it is necessary to replace part program. storage memory due to a failure, FANUC sert'icemen or end users operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of custom ruacro for the purp-o-56-oTElTiring the trouble immedi-
Request
ately.
A function covering a group of instructions is stored in menory lhe same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instructiori, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca11ed a "custom macro bodytl_ and the representativeinstructionisca11eda''cuStom'""'ffiThecustommacro body may simply be cal1ed a macro. And the custom nacro instruction may be ca11ed a macro eall command.
instruction
Programmers need only remember representative macrg i.pslructiong to remember all the instructions in a euEEom-EEEi6-6oty
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that [yg!Se? can be used in the custom macro body, .$!'Ei?ITin$ can be performed on-EiiaLles and actual values\ can be asslgned to cne vartabl-es in custom macro instructions.
'1
-r49-
Table 16.1.5
(b)
Variable
(value)
#8030
#803
1
number
G code group
number
00
01
Remarks
#8032
#803
3
tt8t32
#8133 #8135 #8136 #8137
o2 03 05 06
o7
c9
l
I
G42
#8035
#803 6
c20,
G2
#8037
G40, G4l,
#8038
#8039
#8i38
#8
08
09
r39
c8g
#8040
#804 r
t0 l1 I5
16
coa v//
G67
G66,
#8045
#
G64
8046
tt8L46
c68,
c69
//8I00rs variables are flags to indicaEe whetehr an argument has been speci f ied or not every call. These variables are I if an argument is specified, and 0 if no argumenE is specified. #8000's variables show a specified value, if an argument is specified. However, they become as specified below, j-f no argument is specified. i) Reference in NC command The address itself is neglected. 2) Reference in macro command (G65 block) This value is undefined. Use it after confirming 8f00's numbers. If plural G codes are specified a arguments in the same block, a value is input to variables in each group as shovrn in Table L6.1 .2 (b). In rhis case, /18010 is the smallest group nuuber out of the numbers specified at a time. No value can institute into //8100's and 8000f s variables.
-L52-
An argument means an actual value given to a variable employed in a salled dll ^-^"ment can be specified at all addresses employable'in this CNC V. llldLr ^- 4! 5u except for 0. The format of argument specification is f-he same as in normal CNC command. The llmitation at each address as a normal CNC command, such as decimal point, sign, maximum number of digits, etc., is also applicable t.o the format. The following table indicates the correspondence between argument specification addresses and variable numbers.
Table 16.1.5
(a)
Variable
(value)
#8004 #800s #8006
#800
9
number
Vari.able
(flag)
number
Address
Remarks
#8104 #8105
#8 106 #8 109
I
J
K
-f
#80 r0
#8i10
#80rr
#8013
#8llt
#81
H
M
l3
#80r4 #80r6
#8017 #8018 #8019 #8020 {t8024
#80 25
tf
#8r14
N P
#8rl6
#81i7
a
R J
#8IIB
#8rl9
#8120
tt8l24
#8125
I
8026
{t8r26
- l5l -
variable_s according to variab1enumbers,andtheiram;,,d"h'...i:.'"romeachother. 1) Common variable //100 to ilt49 and //SO0 to ii 531 Common variables are cornmon to main programs and each macro called from these main programs. That is, i/i in a macro is equal to /li in another macro. Common variables //L00 co--_il_I49 are cleared when the power is turned off, and reset to "0" jusr after por6Fw66 turned on. Cbninon v-arial tEslSOO ro rI53l
conmon vari-ab1es
and system
2)
clea:9{,= _:ygl
_ i{"."._poy_er
The system variables are defined as variables whose appllcati-ons remain f ixed a) Tool of f set amounr #L - 1199, IIZOOO - llZ2OO The offset amount can be known by reading system variable //l to ll99 values for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by substituting them into system variables llL to 1199. Among these offset numbers I to 99, those which are not used as offset amounts can be treated as hold tvDe cofftron variables (#500 to ilS:t) . The system variables il200L to ll22O0 correspond to the tool offset numbers 1 to 200. They can be read and substituted as the same as /ll to 1199. b) Inrerface inpur signals i/1000 to /ll0I5, llLo3z Interface input signals can be known, by reading system variables //1000 to #1015 for reading interface signals.
zrs 2r4
DI
UI
2r2
2rr
1
r1o 29 28
2l
":
26 25 24 23 22 2l
zo
UIC
UIlO UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1
#1014
#1015
#
1013
i/1009
#L007
/l
l00s
1003
/i1001
Input signal
Contact closed Contact opened
Variable value
I
0
By readi.ng system variable lt1032, all the lnput signals can be read at
once.
tt'L032: L /t(i000
i=0
l5
-f t)
^1 x I
(Note I) No .r"1rl. can be substituted into system bariables #1000 to llL032. (Note 2) System variables #1000 ro i/tOt5 can be <iisplayed by diagnostic
f
uncti-on.
(Note 3)
DGNOS No. i10 UlO to Ul7 DGNOS No. lll Ul8 to Ul5 System variables i/1000 to llLO32 can be used only when FANUC is comblned.
PMC
-154-
s s
3
Body
]n the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary ala command variables, calculation, and branch command can be used. The custom macro body starts from the program No. which irunediately follows 0 and ends at M99.
De^^e^.. r rl^
c6EoT-.
, ,
t
rvSr4ur
rrv. command
Calculation
CNC command
G90c00x/r 10 r
using variables
c65H82
Branch
command
Instead of dj,rectly providing a numeral to an address in the macro, a variable can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying the calculated variable when calling t,he macro or when executj-ng the macro itself. Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable numbers. I ) How te-exol:ss--lari-ablesVariables are exPressed by variable numbers following /l as shor^m below. ll_i (i = l, 2, 3, 4 ...... ) (Exarnple) !!5, tJQ-- #199:2) How to quote variables A numeral following an address can be repraced by a variable. Assume that <Address> //i or <Address> - /li is programmed, and it means that the variable value or its complement serves as the tommand value of the address. (Example) . "G it139" indicates that G3 was commanded when /1130 = 3. When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as tt//ill00tt, for example, but expressed astt//9100". That is, rrgtr rr.*t to ttlftj indicates the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be rep laced. (Example) If*/i 10O--=_._!_Q5- and /1105 = -500 , "Xi/9100" indicates that X-500 r^ras commanded, and "X-/19100" indicaCes that X500 \4ras conrmandJ.".
g"
16.2.1 Variables
(Note 1) No variable can be quoted at address 0 and N. Neither 0#100 nor N//120 can be programured. (trtote 2) IT-Is not possible to command a value exceeding the maxi-mum comnand value set in each address. When #30 = I20, M/130 has exceeded the maximum command value.
3)
How
to display and set a variable value Tt is possible to display a variable value on the variable value to a variable by MDI key.
CRT screen
or set
-r53-
e) Number
of necessary parts, number of machined parts It is possible to read and substitute the number of necessary parts number of machined parts by use of system variables.
Kind
Number Number System
and
variable
#390I
#3902
) I'Iodel inf ormation /f400L - #4120 It is possible to know the current values of modal information (modal command given ti11 irnmediately preceding block) by reading values of system variables #4001 - li4120.
Variab Ies
#400 r
114002
Model information
G code (group 01) G code (group 02) G code (group 03)
F code
tt4rt4
{t4IL5 tt4t19 ll4t20
4t13
M code
Sequence No. Program No. S code
T code
(Note l) The unit will be the one being used when .the
command
is given.
C) Position information //5001 to /15083 The position information can be known by reading system variables ii500I to #5083. The unit of position information is.0.001 mm in metric input and 0.000I inch in inch input.
156
c) Interf ace ourpur signals //t tOO to /l lll5, #t132, #I133 A value can be substituted into system variables sending the interface signals. 2r5 214 213 212 2Lt I 10
DO
#1100
to
.,
#1 1
l5 for
2"
29
28 27 26 25 24
23
2' 2'
1n
u0l2
u01
u01 uoc
I /il104 |
#1102
#rro
I 109
{trro7
#1 105
#r103
111101
Variable value
I
0
By substituting
(uoo
to u0l5)
i5
r-v
can
output signals
I|LL3Z
= L
#(1100 -tr-)xz
32 interface signals
(UO100
to
#II33 at
once.
^n JU
any other number than '0' or ' I ' is subsEituted into system variables #1100 to /ll1l5, it is treated as 'l'. (Note 5) It is possible to read the values of sysrem variables /llt00 ro /lll33. (Note 6) System variables /lll00 to #1115 and #1133 can be displayed by diagnostic function. DGNOS No. 126 UOO to UO7 No. 127 U08 to UOl5 No. 196 U0100 ro u0107 No. 197 u0108 ro U0ll5 No. I98 U0116 ro U0123 No. 199 UOl24 ro UOl3l (Note 7) System variables #1f00 to llll3z can be used only when FANUC PMC is
combined.
System
variable
Year, Month,
Day
#3011
Hour, Minute,
(Example)
When i-t is May 20, #30 I 2 = 19870520,
Second
PM
#3Alz
It30L2
L98l 4: 17 5"
16r705
-155-
(Meaning) i/i
(Exanple) p/l100
P#
ttj @ #k I
Operator Q#l0l
Q/i l0 r Q-100
Speci f ied
Rii 102
Hm)
#
100
i00
RI5
R/i 102
#r00
# 100
#
/r
P# IOO
P# 100 P# 100
Qr 20
R-50
100
Q-# l0
= 120
+ + +
+
R/i i 02
I00
= -/1101
en -JU
t02 I5 l!r02
tno2
(Note
(Examp
I)
le)
No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meanlng of each vaLue is the same as that designated without decimal point when quoted in each address.
(Note 2)
/1100 = i0 X#100 0.01 mm (metric input) Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree, and the least input increment is 1/1000 degree.
0,1"
amount
G code
H code
H0l
Def
Function
Definition
inition,
substitution
lti = lli
ili=#j+i/k li]-=#J-ilk lli=lll+tlk
ili=i/jx/lk
{t1
tl tl tt
tt
HO2
Addition
Sub
tract ion
Produc
s
sum
HII
il
Logical
= tij .0R. #k
/lk
Hl2
HI3
H21
Logical product
Exclusive
Snrrrro 0R
tl
.xOR. #k
rnnl-
ll
H22
Absolute value
Remainder
tl
H23
tl
H24
H25
tl
nzo
H27
divislon
.^-L-'*^r uurlutLlcu
multiplic
aLion /
lli=(#ix#j)+/ik
tl tl
Combined square
>Yuot g
root I
root
2
*i = frjz-a16r
tli='fr42-1;pz
H28
-158-
Q\/cl-pm rl ev-"'
variab
#500
1e
Position information
Rl ne k end nni nl- n^q'i f i nn nf
Re:d'ino
while moving
Possible
115002
#500
Block end point position of Block end point position of 4th axis
X axis coordinate position Y axis coordinate posi.tion Impossible
#5004
It502L tf 5022
Considered.
roForanoo
#5023 {t5024
{t5041
Position of tool
nninl-
tt5042
#5043 {ts044
#506
Present position of Y axis Present position of Z axis Present position of 4th axis
Position of tool
nnini
#5062
#50 63
tf
Skip signal position of X axis Skip signal position of Y axis Skip si-gnal position of Skip signal position of 4th axis
Value of cutter compensation Value of tool length compensation (X axis) Value of tool length compensation (Y axis) Value of tool length compensation (Z axis)
Possible
Considered.
roforanno
Position of tool
nninf
5064
#508 0
Possible
#508
{t5082
#508
3
(Note !.)
It is not possible to substitute any value into system variabtes /lS00l ro /15083. (Note o\ When the skip signal doesn't turn on, the skip signal position is the end point of that block.
Generar I orm
G65 Hm e/i
m
tti ltj
Itk
Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99. Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded. Variable name I to be operated. A constant is also acceptable. Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
i qili
n/ik;
-r57-
(Ex.)
= //j .xoR. #k P#i Q/ij Rifk; c65 Hl3 P#l0l Q/i102 R#103; (#I0l = ttroT .XOR. #i03)
r) Square root /ii = /#j G65 H21 P/l j. Q//j; (Ex.) c6s H21 p/ll0r Q/i102; (#l0r = /#ro2)
j)
nUsolute value
/i
(Ex.)
i = l#j
(//l0r = l+rozl
k) Remainder lli- = ltj - trunc (/lj///k) x i/k trunc: Discard fractions less than (Ex.)
c6s H23 P/li Q/ij Rilk;
G65 H23 P//101 Q//102 R//103;
BCD to binary /li = G65 H24 P/lr. Q/li; G65 H24 p//l0l Q//102; (iil0r
= BrN (#102))
(Ex.)
G65 H25
BCD i/i = BCD (#j) P#i Q#j; c65 H2s p//r01 Q//r02; (/ir0r = BCD (#102))
n) Conbined multiplication/division (/li x i/j) + //k G6s H26 e;[i Qili ni/k; (Ex.) G65 H26 p/lr0l Q#r02 R/i103; (//10r = (#101 x /i102) +
o) combined square roor I lli = {iliT +-tl? G65 H27 P#i Q/ij R#k; (Ex. ) G65 H27 pill0l Q#102 R/i 103; (#101
n) rt
/1103)
= ltltoZ2 +
1lLO32
Combined square root 2 11i = /142 - 1S1rz G65 H2B r/ll Q//5 ni/k; (Ex. ) c65 H28 p//r01 Q//102 R//103; (/i 101
= /llL022 - llLnz
SrN (#103))
1l
Sine //i = //j . SIN (i/k) (degree unir) c65 H3r P#i q/li n/lk; (Ex.) G65 H31 p//r0r Q//r02 R//r03; (#r0L = llro2
COS (#k) (degree unit) G65 H32 e//i qi/t n//r; c65 H32 p//r01 Q/i 102 R//103; (/lr0r
= llr02 cos
(#103) )
Tangent
(Ex.) (rx.;
TAN (//k) (degree unit) cps H33 P//r Q/ii Ri/k; G65 H33 p/ii0r Q#102 R//103; (//l0r =
lli = ltj
#ro2
TAN (#103))
r) Arctangenr lti = ATAN (#j/#k) (degree unit) c65 H34 p//i Q/lj n/lk; (0"</li<360")
c65 H34 p/ll0l Q//102 R#103;
(Note
(Note (Note
1) Angle in (q) to (t) must be indicated by degree and the least f rrPu L increment is l/1000 degree. 2) If .either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation was not indicated, i-ts value is calculated as t0t. 3) A11 figures below decimal point are truncated if each arithmetic result
includes decimal point.
160
._."_*4$ry
U LUUE
H code
H3l
H32
H33
Function
Sine
Co
Definitlon
lli = ,'J lli
tli = ,,J ll:
.
c65
tr
sine
It tl tl
Tangent
ttj-
= ltj .
TAN (//k)
H34
H80
Arctangent
Unconditional divergence
H8i
tl
!l
IF i/j = llk, rF
GO TO n
H82
H83 H84 H85 H86 H99
rF #j + lfk, Go TO n
It
rF #j < llk, G0 TO n
rF /ij z /ik,
IF /ij : /lk,
G0 T0 n
n
I) Variable arithmetic
a,, uer].n]-c1on ancl substitution of variable lli = #i c65 HOl P//i Q/ij; (Ex. ) c65 H0l p/tl0l Q1005; (/i 101 = 1005) c6s H01 P#101 Q//r10; (//101 = #110) c65 H01 p//101 Q_/i 112; (li 101 = _#LLz)
b) Addirion //i = #j + ttk . c6s H02 P//i Q/tj R//k; (Ex. ) c6s H02 pitlol Q/ir02 R15; (#101 = #L02 + 15) -:-' c) Subtracrion //i = /li - +t< c6s H03 r/tt q//i n/tk;
(Ex.
(//10
r = #102 -
#103)
d) Product i/i = #j x
(Ex.)
(Ex.
(//l0l = #ro2 x
/1103)
f) Logical
(Ex. )
c6s c65
/fi = //j .0R. #k Hll P/ti q//i n//k; Hr r p/ll0l Q//102 R//103;
g) Logical product lti = lli .AND. #k c65 H12 P#i Q#j R//k; (Ex. ) c65 Hl2 p#l0l Q#102 R#103; (ttl01 = #to2 .AND.
#103)
-i59-
2)
Control command a) Unconditional branch G65 HBO Pn; n: Sequence number (Ex. ) c65 H80 PI20; (Diverge ro Nl20)
b)
Conditional divergence I ilj EQ. #k (=) G65 H81 Pn Q/lj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H8l Pr000 Q/ll0l R/ti02; /lI0l = llt02, go ro N1000
(Ex.)
c65 H82 Pn Q//j R/lk; n: Sequence number c6s H82 P1000 Qillol R//102; IIIOL + llT02, go ro Nt000 lll0l = lllo2, go ro nexr
d) Conditi-onal divergence 3 ilj cT //k (>) c65 H83 Pn Qilj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H83 Pr000 Qllr0l R//102; /1101 > ltLO2, go ro N1000
#
Conditional divergence 4 /lj LT /lk (<) _q05--H9-4 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H84 P1000 Q#lOi n/1102; #i0I < llL02, go ro N1000 #101 Z llL02, go ro nexr
L)
Conditional divergence 5 /ij cE /ik (>) c65 H85 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: SequencE number (Ex. ) c6s H8s P1000 Qi/101 R//i02; //f 0l Z tlI02, go ro N1000 //101 < lll02, go ro nexr
G65 H86
c65 H86 P1000 Q//iOl R//102; /1101 S lfloz, go ro N1000 # l0 i > ltI}z, go ro nexr
Alarm No. +500
fn
Ql/5
n/tt; n:
SequencE number
(Note
If positive numbers were designated as sequence numbers at branch designations, they are searched forward first and then, backward. If negative numbers were designated, they are searched backward first and then, forward. (Note 2) Sequence number can also be designated by variables. (Example) c65 H8l P#100 Q#l0l R//102; When conditions are satisfied, processing branches to the block having the sequence number designated with #100.
- 16l -
key is depressed af ter address G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S, T, P or Q, i/ code is input. 2) It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the I'IDI mode. However, address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation. 3) Addresses H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after G65. Address 0 and N only are writable before G65. 4) Single block Generaliy, the macro instruction block does nor stop even if single block stop is turned on. However, by setting parameter SBKM of parameter No. 0011, it is possible to make single block effective. This is used for macro testing. 5) Variable values can be taken within a range of -232 to 232-t, but they are not displayed correctly, except for -99999999 to 99999999. If they exceed the above range, they are displayed as *ti*?k****. 6) it is possible to nest subprograms up to four tj-mes. 7) Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the operati,on results with decirnal numbers, the figures below decinal point truncated, if an arithmetic result contains a fractj-on part. Particularly be carful with the arithmetic sequence, accordingly. (Ex.) When /1100 = 35, /ll0l = I0, lllo2 = 5 the followlngs results. //110 = /1100 + /lI0l (= 3) #l1l = #110 x #102 (= 15) llr20 = i/100 x /i I02 (: I75) ItL2I = //120 + /i101 (= tl) /tI11 = 15 ard lf L2I = 17 8) The execution time of macro instruction differs according to varj-ous conditions (for example, if the axis is under movement or not). It may be several
when l#l Eens msec. on an average.
9) When a custom macro is loaded from a paper tape in the EIA code, '&' code is treated as t'//tt, because there is in no "//t' code in the EIA code.
-162-
$.3.1 Bolt hole circle Drill n pieces of, holes Set ref erence Point -(X-0, Y o) at the center of a circle. rtn?r on the circumference of the circle having radius (r), squally divlded.. bY
Reference
(n- I )th
hole
Present position
X,,, Yn : Coordinate values at the reference point of bolt hole circle. U: Radius r : Starting angle a n : Number of holes I The following variables are used: #500 X coordinate value at reference point (Xo) ii 50r Y coordinate value at reference point (Yn) {t502 Radius (r) #503Starting angle (a) Itso4 Number of holes (n) However, when n > 0, counterclockwise (n pieces) when n < 3, clockwise (-n pieces) The following are used as r.rorks in custom macro: #f00 : Counter showing the drilling of the i-th hole in progress (i) Last value of counter (= l"ll (ie) #10r Angle of the i-th circle (ei) ItLO2 X axis value of rhe i-ch hole (Xi) #t03 Y axis value of the l-th hole (ti) It LOA
U
-163-
Custom macro
o90
N100 c65 HOr P//100 Q0: c6s H22 P/t101 Qitsoa; N200 G65 H04 P//102 Q//100 R360000; G65 H05 PllLO2 Q/i 102 R/i504; G65 H02 Plfr}z Q#s03 Rillo2 i G65 H32 P//103 Qll502 R/1r02; c6s Ho2 P/1103 Q/1500 Ri/r03; c65 H31 P/1r04 Q/1s02 R/1i02; c6s H02 Pillo4 Q/1s01 R#104 t G90 H00 x#r03 Y/1104;
M10;
t0;
instructions are
programmed
as follows:
ie = l"l
I
{-n I_U
I
I
)
tJ].=at-
.360o x
n
Xi=Xo*rCOS (ei) Yi=Yo+rSIN(0i) Positioning to the i-t.h hole Output of hole machining M code
Wheni<ie,branches ie pieces of holes
be
as
r lr
l-
'l
)
c6s H02 P# 100 Q// 100 Rl ; c6s H84 P-200 Q#100 R/li0r;
M99;
r0;
G65 H01 P#500 Q100000; G65 HOl P#50I Q-200000; c65 HOI Plt502 Q100000; G65 Hol P/1503 Q20000 i c65 H01 P//504 Q12;
Counrerelockwise (n = t2)
Custom rnacro
a=
20"
Z0
;0"
;6f
.r
call
necessary
i1500
to i/504 can also be set by MDI operation. rn this case, blocks with G65 of the above program are not
16.3.2 Pocket machining
M02;
A pocket milling cycle to machine the area illustrated below can be programmed by custom macro. Area cutting is done with a certain depth and another area cutting is done after the tool is cut-in along the Z axis.
Rapid traverse
FeedrateSxe
Feed r3le e or f (e : Z direction f : XY plane)
r
I
I ---r-I
I
I I
lil
lii
"l
-164-
Respect ive variables mean as follows: X axis absolute coordinate value #500
at left lower part of pocket, starting point (x). #50 I Y axls absoluLe coordinate value at left lower part of pocket, starting point (V). 11502 Z point absolute coordinate value (z) R point absolute coordinate value (r) #503 Cutting quantity at one time (q), positive number lls04 /150s Length of X axis direction in area (i), positive number Length of Y axis direction in area (j), posltive number {t506 11507 Finishing margin (k) #s08 tZ when machining width is set to cutter diameter x tZ TooI radius (d) # 509 #s l0 Feed rate in XY plane (f) #51 r Feed rate in Z axis (e) Tool is fed at a rate of 8 x e until it reaehes I mm before the starting point of cutting. /1100 to i1113: Used as a work for calculations. Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows:
09020;
c6s H02 P#100 Q#s09 R/1507; c65 H04 PltLO2 Q#509 R2; c65 H26 Pllro2 Q#508 R100; c6s H02 PllLO2 Qi/102 Rl; c65 H02 P#103 Q/1s00 R//100; c65 H02 PllLO4 Q//s01 R//r00; c6s H02 P//10s Q//s00 R//505; c65 H02 P//105 Q//10s Riir00; c6s H02 P/1r06 Q//s01 R//506; c6s H03 P#106 Qil106 R/i100; c6s H02 PitLOT Qilso2 R/1507; c 90 c00 x/l 103 Yil i 04 ; z{1503; c65 H0l P//108 Q//503; N 100 c6s H03 P# 108 Q# 108 Rit5 04 ; c65 H85 P110 Q#108 Ri/107; c6s H01 P#108 Qi/107; Nl10 c0l zllIoS F/t511; xlll0s F//510; c65 H01 P#109 Ql; N 120 G6s H04 P# I 10 Q# 109 R/l 102 ; c65 H02 P/tl l0 Q/t110 R//r04; c6s H86 Pr 30 Q# r l0 Ril i 06 ; c6s H01 P#1 t0 Q// r06 ; N 130 Y/l l 10; c65 H23 Pil I I I Qil109 R2 ; G65 H8l Pt40 Q#l ir R0; x//r03; c65 H80 P150; N 140 xi/ 105 ; Nl50 c65 n02 P#i09 Q#109 Rr; c6s H84 P-120 Q#l r0 R/l106; c00 zll503; x// 103 Yil r 04 ; c6s H86 P200 Q//108 u/107; c65 Ho2 PlltL2 Q/lr08 Rl000; c6s H04 P#t 13 Q//s l r R8; c0l zllLr2 Filrl3; c65 H80 P-100;
N200
M99;
-165-
//100.
26 25 24 23
22
Used for
other
ign
Purpose -
Structure of
DO
zB 27 26
25
24 23 22
2r
20
Address
instructions are
as follows:
Address (7) send Address send signal
ON
G65 H12 PllLr32 Q/11132 R480; G65 HIl PllLr32 Q/11 132 R23;
N10 G65
P#r00 Q//r032 R4095; c65 H24 P//r00 Q//100; c65 H8l P20 Q/11012 R0; l
c65 HT2
H8l P10
P// r
Q//10r3
R0;
c65
H01
N20
MQQ.
c65
I^/aiting for data send BCD 3 digits read Conversion into binary number Addition of sign
R495;
OFF
-166-
X axis
I I
I I
+ _---
I I I
Cutter
Workpiece
(r) (o) First margin {t502 (Ax) Shearing width #503 (B) margin for grasping workpiece lf )u4 Distance from reference point Eo cutter (h) Custom mac ro instructions are programmed as follows:
#
500
#50
Width of workpiece
091 10;
c65 H03 P#100 Q#s00 R//50i; N10 c65 H03 P#r01 Q//s04 R/l t00; c90 G00 x#l0l
M?n.
0-n
X axis positioning
//r00
c65
uo)
M99;
H03 H85
P#100
Q#
100
n/i502 ;
P-10
Q#r00
n/i
503;
TO N10
The macro call program, for example, will be as follows: 00009; (i1500 to ii504 are set by l"lDI operation.)
G92 M98
rr v t
XO;
P9110;
Mo?.
Conversion from cartesian coordinate system (X-Y-Z) into cylindrical system (r-e-Z). r = tQr +l;20 = arcEan (y/x) (-180" < e < 180')
coordinate
-167-
Common
variable
employed:
call
cOmrnand
c66
G90; P8000;
Absolute
command
in
O
poinr
N1600 x0
Y-I00.0;
point
poinr
hrell I
Modal
call
node cancel
lm.0
-168-
16.4
This function is provided to enable users to make CNC programrning by taking numerj.c data (patcern data) only out of a drawing and setting thesd numerical values from CRT/MDI panel without any need of programming using an existing NC With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can freely prepare a hole machining cycle (boring cycle, tapping cycle, or the like), for example, by utilizing the custom macro function, and load the hole machining cycle lnto the
program memory. language.
f) This cycle is designated as pattern names like BORI, TAP3, DRL2, .... An operator can select a desired pattern out of the menu of pattern names being displayed on CRT 2) A cycle should be prepared by using variables (pattern data) which are specified by the operator. The operator can identify these variables as depth, return relief, feed' blank, and other pattern data names. The operator gives values (pattern data) to these names.
16.4.1 Pattern menu display When depressing
ffi sl'l t"y again after selecting an offset or custom macro variable screen by depressing the m k"y, Ehe following pattern menu screen is Pr*'rl
IJFS
displayed
FNJ
: HOLE PATTERN 1. BOI-T FLE 2. GRID 3. LIIE NFE.E 4. TNPPII 5. DRILLII.G 5. EmIfS ?. PMGT 8. PEG<
>. tESl
OtW NLw
1O. BrcK
SELECT =
EIT
HOLE PATTERN
Menu
title
name
BOLT HOLE
Pattern
1S
1S
The machine tool builder should program the character strings of menu title and pattern name by the custom macro, and load it into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500". l) Macro instruction to describe the menu title Menu title
ci cz t3 c+ cs ce cl cg cg cto cii
Cl, CZ ....
-169-
l'lacro i-nstruction
c65
H90
p
TJ H90P p Q q R UJNKi : Specifies the menu ri_11e : Assuure a, and a, be the codes of characters C, and C^, L Z' P=atx1O3+a, p CCO OOO
-L
Code
See 16.7.3
for character
Assume
codes.
q r i j k
: : : : ,
or.lO aO be the codes of characters C, and C4, q=a3xl0-*aO Assume a. and a. be the codes of characters c. and c., )?b56 r="5x10-+aU Assume rr rld a, be the codes of characters C, and C' t=^7x10"*a, Assume ao and a.,.., be the codes of characters C^ and C t"t coqes or cnaracters cg ttd L10' , =;";";r-;.t'0^"A=".*l f.,' and 0" rhe codes of characrers c.. and n rr '"12' ? "'", ^. t="lrxl0'*^I2
macro
;
c6s H90 Po72 079 Q076 069 R032 080 1065 084 J0B4 o0g K082 078 HOLEL_IP ATTERN For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item i6.8.3.
2) Macro
the rnenu title is "HOLE PATTERN", and the instruction is given as follows.
name
'4 'l cto Characters of pattern nane (10 characters) L1acro ins truct ion G65 Ii91 P n a qRrI iJiK H91 Specifies the pattern name n Specif ies the menu number of pattern name (n = I to I0) Assume a, Y ., be the codes of characters C., and C,r,
to
tg tg tto
'q=atxl0-*a, r
f J^a
"lO
1
the codes of characters C, and CO, the codes of characters C, and CU, the codes of characters C7 "rd
Cg,
.=t3xl0-+aO
Assurne
a_ and a)?b
be
t=u5xi0-+aU
Assume a_ and t?d
a^
be
j=arxlo-'+au k="9x10"*r,,0
"g
Assume
170
(Example) Assume that the pattern name of menu No. I is "BOLT HOLE", and the macro instructlon ls glven by; G65 H9t pl Q066 079 R076 084 1032 072 JO79 076 K069 032 t
BOLTLJHO LEL-l (Note) If a part of characters are not specified by P, Q, R, I, J or K which designace character strings, but they are omitEed, the characters (two characters) at that part are regarded as space characters.
CRT
3) Pattern number selection Enter a desired pattern number by keying operation from the pattern nenu as fo11ows, for example.
Etr
The selected pattern number is set to system variable "//5900". The custou macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program number search) with an external signal and then, referring to system variable #5900 by the program.
4)
Nl c65 H90
P072 079 Q076 059 R032 080 1065 084 J084 069 K082 078; N2 c65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084 T032 072 J079 076 K069 032: N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068; N4 c65 H9l P3 Q076 073 R078 069 1032 065 J078 071 K076 069; Ns c65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080 1073 078 J071 032; N6 C65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076 T076 473 J078 071; N7 c65 H91 P6 Q066 079 R082 073 1078 07 1; N8 c65 H91 P7 Q0B0 079 R067 07s 1069 084; N9 c65 H9i P8 Q080 069 RO67 075; N10 c65 H9i P9 Q084 069 R083 084; Nit c65 H91 PrO Q066 065 R067 075;
i. 2.
BOLT HOLE
GRID
ANGLE
3. LINE
4. TAPPING 5. DRILLING
I
6. 7. 8.
q
BORING
POCKET PECK
TEST
BACK
Nl2
IO.
M99;
171
a pattern
menu
5@ Tm-541 KIJIN
}.tr.
t*HE
X
DnTC
6
A
01@ N1@
qf'ENT
*E[LT Fg-E
CIRCLET
SET
PRTTERN
UR. r',5@-585.
DATA TO
6 6
x z
@.w
@.w
Y
S
MDI
@.m
6T
: Pattern data title An optional character string : Variabl.e name An optional character string
characters.
is
l-s
12
....
10
characters. *BCLT HOLE CIRCLE* : Comnent statemelit A comment of an optional character string can be displayed up to 12 characters/line, and B lines. The machine tool bui,Lder should program t.he character strings of pattern data titler pattern name, and variable name by utilizing the custom macro A, and load them into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500 * pattern number" (O9501 - 09510). 1) I'lacro instruction to describe patlerrr data title
ct cz t:
G65
"4 cLz'
ts
t6
H92
Y
Specifies the uenrr title Assume a, @rlu a, be the codes of characters C, and Cr, I p = al 10" + ^z Assune .lU a O be the codes of characiers C, and CO, ", q = a^ x10-*aO J Assurne a anC a be the codes of characters C and C 6' 5 ? 6 5 r - a- xI0-*a, D .) Assume a_ and a^ be the codes of characters C_ anci C^, 8' t 7 ^ B
Assume
x 10" *.10
11
-' ^ dr t
Assume
IN
x l0'* a,^ LL For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item 16.8.3.
codes of characters C
172
(Example) Assume that the pattern data title 1s ,,BOLT HOLE", and the maero instruction is given by; c6s Hez t99_q gp Q076 084 R032 072 r07s 076 -f ! 032 B o L r L__,- H o f J06e i-_l- , L2) Macro instruction to describe varlable name
Variable
t,
Cl'
He3
n t
name
a,.
Macro instruction
G65H93P n
Specifies the varlable number (n = 500 to 531) Assune al and a" be the codes of characters C, ^aL
codes
cod.es
and
c2' c4'
t="3x10"*aO Assume a. and a - be the )?6 t="5x10"*aU Assume a, and a. be the l^O
of characters C, of characters C,
and
and
c6'
codes
j=a7*IOJ+au
(Example)
", "10."10 b" the eodes of characters cn "rd cl0, k="9x10-*"10 Assume that the variable name of variable No. 503 is ,,RA_Drusr,, the macro instruction is given by; p503
Assune
and
c65 H93
(Note)
varlable names are designated by 32 co 'non varlables are not cleared by turning off power supply.
comment
-R--T- -D-T
/1500
- lt53I which
{l
a,. ,, a, ,o a, a6 ,, aa an
T2
comment
c6sH94_p_LQ q R r H94 : Specifies the couunenT p : Assume .lO a, be rhe ", p=alx10-*a,
q
JjKk;
codes of characters C, and C,,
CO,
Assume
r
f
Assume a_ and
CU,
j
k
., "lO a, be rhe codes of characters C, and CU, ,=^7x10-*a, : Assume g . " "lO ,0 b. the codes of character" C9 "rd Cl0, i="9x10r*"10
Assume
Assume
bu the codes
of characters cll
"nd
cl2,
-173-
A comment can be displayed by 8 lines. The comment consists of the lst line to Sth line in the programmed sequence of G65H94 (Example) Assume that the corunent is "*BOLT HOLE", and the macro instruction is given bY; c65 H94 p042 066 Q079 076 R084 032 T072 079 J076 069 ; *BOLTL_]HOLE Example of custom macro of the prerrious CRT 4)
o95Or;
Nl
N2 c65 H93 P500 Q084 079 R079 076; N3 c65 H93 P501 Q07s 073 R074 085 1078 032 J088 032: N4 c65 H93 P502 0075 073 R074 085 1078 032 J089 032; N5 c65 H93 P503 O0B2 065 R068 073 r085 083; N6 c65 H93 P504 Q083 046 R032 065 r07B 07 I J076 n?, . N7 G65 H93 P5 05 Q07 2 079 R076 069 r083 032 J07 8 079 K046 032; N8 G65 H94; N9 c65 H94 PO42 066 Q079 076 R084 032 IO72 079 J076 069; .. NlO G65 H94 R032 067 1073 AB2 J067 076 K069 042; Nll c65 H94 P083 069 Q084 032 R080 065 1084 084 J069 092 K078 032; N12 c65 H94 P068 06s Q084 065 R032 084 1079 032 J086 065 K082 n/,e. NI3 G65 H94 P078 079 Q046 0s3 R048 048 1045 053 J048 053 K046 0321' N14 I'199;
VAR:
S.
ANGL
NO
#505 HOLES
Coroment
instruction
*BgLT
H6LE
No. 500 -
505
r74 -
Character
IJ
Code
Comment
Character
7
Code
Conrmgnl
065 066
067
054
8
9
t
C D
F
G H
055 056
057 032 Space
07r
072
1f
I
J K
L
M N
)
&
Dollar
Percent
Sharp
svmbol
o
P
Ampersand
ApostroDhe
*
+
,
o
K
082 083
084
T
T]
046
o47
w
X Y
Z
t
z
063
t
u
064
091
J
a
092
093 094 09s
052 053
Underline
175
Subprogram No.
o9500 o9s0 I 09502 o9503 o9504 o9505 o9506 o9507 o9508 o9509 o9510
Functlon
Speclfies character string of pattern data menu display Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 1. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 2. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 3. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 4. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 5. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 6. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 7. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 8. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding pattern number 9.
EO
G code
c65 c65
G65
H code
H90
H91
Function
Specifies pattern
name
H92
H93
c65 c65
H94
Svstem variable
"\.,1*.:
Meanlngs
#5900
176
17-
CUSTOM MACRO
Machine tools builders: You are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fail. If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of your custom macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
Request:
A function covering a group of instructions is stored i.n memory.'the same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instruction, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca1led a trcustom macro body" and the representative instruction is called a ttcustom macro instructionrr. The custom macro body rnay siurply be called a macro. And the custom macro instruction may be ca11ed a macro call command.
A group of instructions
Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions to remember all the instructions ln a custom macro body.
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that variables can be used in the custom macro body, operations can be performed on variables and actual values can be assigned to the variables ln custom macro instructions.
r77 -
G55P9011A101s:
X=l
I I I
(
Z = 4:
() )/'
I
l i
#4 10 and 5 respectively.
This enables the user to improve the CNC performance by themselves. Custom macro bodies may be cprovided by the machine tool builder, but they can be created by users, EOO.
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be rnade easily'. Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programned and registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting function. Programmers can use the bolt hole circle functj.on by using the following command only:
c65P Pr.R t A o B B
r
r
li
of circles
-r78-
body
T
U
#20
#21
V
In
#22
1t
zJ
#24
I Z
#25
#26
b) Argument assignment II ABCIJKIJ In addition to the fact that arguments can be addresses A, B, and C, a maximum of ten sets of arguments can be -ssigGE--in set for addresses I, J and K. When several numbers are assigned in the same address, they must be assigned in the determined sequence. Addresses not requj-red can be omitted. Addresses assigned jn argument assignment II and the number of the variable used in the macro corresDond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment II
bodv
1rL
1tJ
r1
Jt
Kt
l^
tt5 #o
tf/
tt8
#9
,z
Kz
T
#t0
{
tfll
K^
T
#12
lf L)
-4
-r80-
17.1
A macro can be called from a single block, or modally from each block in the call mode Note) A macro call command cannot be specified in the MDI rnode.
17 .1.1 Simple calls When the following command is executed, the custom macro body identified by P (program number) is ca11ed. G65 P(ptogr"* f(it.r.tio" ti*"") <argument assignment>; ""*b"r) When it is necessary to transfer arguments to a custom macro body, the argument is specified by <argument assignment>. The followlng tTr/o types'of <argument
asslgnment> can be specified. The argument menti-oned here is the actual numerical value assigned to a variable. (Note) G65 must be specified before arguments in the G65 block. The negative sign and the decimal point can be used regardless of addresses in
<argument assignment>.
D
a) Argurnent assignment I
An argument can be assigned for all addresses except G, L, N, 0, and P. Assignment need not be made in alphabetical order. Specification is made according to word address format. Addresses not required may be omitted. However, when I, J, and K are used, assignment must be made in the alphabetical order. pAn UdU. I K valid T B_A__q .....J ! . .. . . i -,.^-l .' 'l f trv4rlu Addresses assigned in argument assignment I and the number of the variable in custom macro body correspond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment I
A-B-q
...
.z
body
4r
B L
D
1tJ
E
F
#8 tt9
#11
I
J
lft
ltO flJ
a
R
ttLT
//
18
r79 -
(Example)
G65AI
It). )
;l?iT":-]n
.
.082.0r-3.014 .0D5.0Pi000;
In this example, even if arguments I4.0 and D5.0 are specified to variable ll7 , rhe latter is effective.
17 .1.2 Modal call The macro call mode can be specified by executing the followlng command. G66P program number L repetitive count <argument assignment>; The <argument assignment> is the same as for a simple call. The macro call mode can be cancelled by executing the following command;
)bt{
5.0
(Note
G67 ;
1)
(Note 2)
rn a G66 block, G66 rnust be specified before any arguments. Decimal points and signs can be used in the arguments. G66 and G67 should rnake a pair in the same program.
During the macro call mode, the specified macro call instruction is called every tj-me a motion command is executed.. (Example l) Drilling Cyele At each positioning-point, the drilling cycle is operated.
Auxiliary
X move function Flow of program
ll ll
1l 1l
ll
li ll
U
lr
Ir
U
Dwell
Dwell
uoo P9082R(R
X
M I
point)X(Z point)X(Dwell);
The drilling
,
)
end
of
Macro is o 9082 t
GOO Z
G67 ;
as follows.
//tB;
#26; #24:
GOI
GO4
GOO
Mqq.
Z- lROUND
[/ilBl
+ ROUND
ttt26));
182
Address
of the
argument assignment
II
body
t4
It
Jl1 / #1r)
J.
{ttt
#18
T. I
b o
#L9 ll2A
JI. lILL
1I
1
K.
Tl
Jlaa LL
Jl
K.t
tt L)
tt24
I^ at
J^
o
6
ll2s
It26
I^ 9
J9
K^
1
#28
#29
#30
)l. 'IJI
1
rto
Jto
Kto
ttJZ
#33
Suffixes I to l0 of I, J and K indicate the sequence of the assigned set. Coexistence of argument assignment I and II No alarm is generated even if arguments of both assignment I and II are specified in the same block with a G65 command. If an argument of type I and an argument of type II are specified to the same variable, the argument specified later is effective.
-181 -
NGXY
tE;E-r ow i n g s i*pTJ-c o*tnf,T-t be specified. can N G X .... Y ^^ As f or ltg8, tt* 'i""Effiiort *^ urDproJeq vrr the ro ,*^-1^.,^'1 M codes are not transmit.ted.
1
M98PAAAA;
FI
N
The correspondence between the calling M code xx and the program number AAAA of the ealled subprogram must be set as a parameter. Up to three 11 codes can be used for a subprogram call. hrhen these M codes are specif ied in a macro called wit.h a G code or in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code, the subprogram is not ca1led, but these M codes are treated as ordinary M codes. Set the following parameters.
M code used to call subprogram: 9001
i."f
F-t
,rffi-G
M code used
to ."ff subprogram:
9003
" .....T
N G X Z M98P9OOO; r-coae t ir ETea-lT .n argument in comnon variable 1ll4g. The T code is displayed on the program check screen, but TF and T codes are not. transmitted. When this T code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a subprogram called with an M or T code the subprogram is not called; buE this T code is treated as ordinary T code. Set. the following parameter.
0 0
0
TMCR
No. 0040,
TLICR
17.1.7 Difference between M98 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body a) G65 can include arguments; I,198 cannot.
b) ItgA is used to branch to a subprogram after executing a command other than M, P or L in the block; G65 is used to branch only. c) When a I'198 b'lock includes an address other than O, N, P and L, execution of the block stops as single block stop, a G65 block does not. d) COS changes the level of local variable; M98 does nor. That. is, /ll specified before G65 is one thing and /lI in the calling cusrom macro body is another. . iil specified before M98 is the same as /i I in the calling subprogram. e) Up to four G65 calls, includ.ing G66, can be made in addition, M9B cal1s can be made up to eight calls rogether with calls by G65 and G66.
r84 -
!,.,':j
?r.
Gxx<argument. assignment> ; correspondence between the calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of The the called macro must be set. as a parameter. -\ calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of a called macro are set in a parameter. Up to ten G01 to G255 commands can be used to call macros. G00, G65 to G67 cannot be used. In case of macro call by G code, the P code does not indicate a program number but an argument. The P code is stored in lfL6 as an argument. These G codes cannot be specified in a macro called with a G code. These G codes cannot be specified in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code. Set the following parameters.
Data No.
G code used to call macro: 9010 G code used to call macro: 90il
Macro can be ca11ed with an M code set by a parameter, namely, the following
command:
a
N G65 PAAAA <argument assignment>1 ifQ-nivalent to the following -ommand: N_ M X X <argument assignment>; Coordinate with t.he M code X X which executes macro calling and the macro program No. AAAA accessed with a parameter. I'IF and M codes are not issued the same as to call the subprogram with an 1"1 code. When this ll code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a subprograrn called with an M or T code, the macro is not called; but this M code is treated as ordinary M code. Up to l0 codes of l10l - M97 can be used to call macro. Set the following
parameEers.
M code
to call macro:
9020
!1 code
to call macro:
9021
9029
ln{ codes are different from usual M codes and theY must be commanded at the star t of a block (just after the sequence No., if there is).
- lB3 -
Main program
Macro (Level I )
Macro
(Level 2)
Macro (Level 3)
Macro (Level 4)
o--
G65P
G65P
G65P
G65P
M99
M99
(Leve1 1)
(Level 2)
(Level 4)
l) The main program is provided with ill to /133 local variables (leve1 0). 2) When the macro (leve1 1) is called with G65, etc., the local variable (level 0) of the main program is stored, and llI to #33 local variables (level 1) for lihe macro (1evel l) are prepared. Argument transfer is possible for this purpose. (This also applies to (3) below). 3) The loca1 variables (level I, 2,3) are stored each time the macros (leve1 2,3,4) are ca11ed, and new local variables (level 2,3,4) are prepared. 4) When the operation returns from each macro with M99, the local varlables (1evel 0, l, 2,3) stored in (2) and (3) are set in the same conditions as when they were stored.
17.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodv
The format of a custom macro body is the same as that of a subprogram as
belorv.
17.2.'l
shown
(Prograrn Number);
Commands
Mqq.
LL,2 ,
Program numbers are determined as follows: 1) Or - 08999 for programs that can be freely registered, cancelled and
2) 09020
-.09899
for programs that cannot be registered, cancelled or edited without setting a parameter
edited.
-iB6-
n'i!k;i
.8 Multiplex calls l) Multiplex ca11s Similarly to a subprogram ca11ed from another subprogram, a macro can be called from another macro The multiplicity should be less than or equal to four including simple and modal calls. 2) Multiplex modal calls In modal calls, the specified macro is called each time a motion command is executed. When several modal macros are specified, the next macro is ca1led each time a motion command in the first macro is executed. Macros are successively called from those assigned later.
17.1
z 10000; (1-r)
G66 P9200; z i5000 t (L-2)
G67; G67;
o
z-zsooo; (l-3)
9100;
X 5000; (2-L)
Mao.
9200;
MAO.
this chart.
(1
1)
(Note )
3) Custom macro level and local variable l^lhen a macro is called with G65, G66, or a G code which calls a macro, the level of t.he macro increases by one. As a result, the 1evel of the local variable also increases by one. Namely, t.he relationship between the macro call and loeal variable is as follows.
-185-
3) Undefined variables The value of a variable whi,ch has not yet been defined is called <vacant>. Variable #0 is used for a variable that is always <vacant>. An undefined variable has the following naEure: 'a) Quotation When an undefined variable is quoted , the address itself is also ignored.
When
//l = <vacant>
I
When
//l = 0
I
c90x1002/l l c90x100
c90x1002/l l
G90X10020
b) Operation
#l = <vacant>
I
When/il=0
tl2=lll
It2=0
I
ll2=#r
/12=<vacant>
ll2=lllx5
ll2=lll*'5
I 112=0
*zlo
ll2={lI+lll
It2=0
I
llZ=lll+ttt
1t2=0
I
NE.
/il = <vacant>
When
ill = 0
/10
ill
EQ #0
I
#1 EQ
I
Established
Not established
#lNEO
Established
I
#lNEO
Not established
I
#i cE /i0
Established
i
#l
cE
I
#0
Established
/ll cr 0
Not established
i
ill
cT
I
Not established
CRT screen.
d) Display and setting variable values Variable values can be displayed on the also be set in the MDT mode.
Variable values
can
-lB8-
gariables can be used j.n a custom macro body. Also arithmetic instructions control instructions are commandable. Actual values for variables are specified with a macro call command.
17.2.2 Variables
and
Variables can be used in the macro instead of numerical data. The user can assign any value (within the allowed range) to them. Using variables allow custom macros to become much more flexible than the conventional sub-routines. Several variables can be used, and each variable is identified by a variable
number.
1) Varlable expressions
A (Example I ) lt5
tf
The following format can also be used where numbers are replaced bv <Formula> (Example
#1005
2) # t#1001
il [<Forrnula> I
#[#1001-ll # ltt6l 2l
ll
Quotation variables The numerical value following an address can be replaced with a variable. <address>i/i or <address>-ili indicates that the value of the variable or its complement is substituted for the command value of the address.
3) F#33 If /133 = 1.5, ir is rhe same as FI.5. Z-ltl8 If i/18 = 20.0, ir is rhe same as 2-20.0. c#130 If //130 = 3.0, ir is rhe same as G3. a) using a variable with addresses/,:, o and N is prohibited, (i.e.,:1127 or N/f I cannot be used). The value of n(n =l to 9) in an optional block skip/n cannot be used as a
(Exarnple
h\
variable. A variable number cannot be replaced by a variable. when 5 in tls is replaced with #30, it does nor become llll3O but ii t#301. The value of a variable cannot exceed the maximum set for each address. For example, when #140 = 120, M// 140 exceeds the maximum (an l"t code must be less than 99). d) When a variable is used for address data, its value is rounded to the significant digit. e) By using <Formula>, as explained later, a numerical value following the address can also be replaced with <Formula>. <address> [<Formula>] or <address>-[<formula>] indicates that the value of the <formula> or its complement is substituted for the command value of the address. Note that a constant with no decimal point used between brackets is assumed to have a decimal point at its end.
(Example
4) xI li24+ltl8*c0s t/lr 1
z-l
#18+1t261
-187-
List'of
Variable
#1000
number Dr
System Variables
Variable
#5041
number
#1015, llro32
D0
#506I
#3000
l/3001
Llacro alarm
Clock
, lf3}02
(X axis)
it2600
lf27O0 #2800
#3003
(Y axis)
112606 Work
offset
value
#3005
//301
(Z axis)
- #2706 -
Work
(4th axis)
112806 Work
#3901
a) Inrerface signals /1f000 ro /ll0f5 and tlL032, /i1100 ro /lir55 and llLl32,
/ill33
T--..+ IrrPuL
The status of the interface input q'i on: I i q dof orm'i values of the system variables /I1000 to /f I0l5 , li1032.
narl
hrr
rorrl
i no
the
190
.;.i,..:4,
Variables are classified into local variables, conmon variables and system variables, depending on the variable number. Usage and properties are different for each EyPe of variable l) Local variable lll to il33 The local variable is a variable local1y used in the macro. That is, a local variable /li used in the macro and called at one point in time, is different from iii used in the macro (whether it is t.he same macro or not) ca11ed at another point in time. Accordingly, when macro B is called from macro A, as in a multiplex call, a local variable used in macro A is not destroyed by beins rrsed in macro B. A local variable is used for an argument transfer. For inforfnation on the correspondence to the argument address. A local variabie without a transferred argument i-s vacant in its initial status and'can be used freely. 2) variable #100 - #L99, /1500 - //53i Just as a local variable is used locally in the macro, a comnon variable is in common use throughout the main program, throughout each subprograrn called from the main program, and throughout each macro. That is, llL used in a certain macro is the same as /ii used in another macro. Accordingly, the calculated value of a conmon variable lti in a certain macro can be used in
Common
17.2.3
TYPes of variables
another macro. The use of common variables is not specially determi-ned in the system. can be used freely. 3) System variables
Use of a system variable is fixed in the system.
They
-rB9-
Interface output signals can be issued by assigning values to variables #1100 to /11115, Itrr32, #1133.
System
Output signal
system
variable
Point
I
1
#1r00
#1101
tf
ILo2
#r r03
#1
llrr04
I I
,0, 2;
2\ 2;
4
i
I
I I I
1
I
I
I
1 I
#i111
tf
IIt2
#1113
#rl I4 #1ir5
t
I
I
z')
System
variable Point
r6
32
lt1 i'1.')
'T
u00
u100
I I JJ
- uol3l
uols
Value of variable
(LOW)
t6 and 32 points output signals can be issued at one time by assigning value to the system variable /llt32 and #1 133,
tq /1111?
= j tI
xZL
l-v -n an JU -
When When
UO[100+il
is Low,
Vi=0
-r92-
System varj-able
# 1000
Po
inL I I I
//r00r
#1002 #1003 #1004 #1005
// r
I
I
006
I I
i i
2; 2; 2;, 2; 2; 2; 2;
)" -q
2:
1
ong
I I I I I
I
^ )Lv -t
)rz -t ?
laJ
Ur009
ITTor o
2:: uroll
2:: 2r, 2^'
rTTnr?
l0r3
urOi3
UrO14
#10i4
i/1015
ur015
System
#
variable
t032
Point
lo
UI15
Value of variable I
n
Input signal I
Contact closed
ConEac! open
(HIGH)
(LOW)
a:
Since the variable value read is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, t.he unit system must be considered in preparing a macro. The readlng system variable 1t'1032 is used to read 16 points lnput signals at one time.
li
1032 = I
15
/l
j [1000+i] *2'
rerm
t-u
'j.
i;
a!
System
i-n a calculation
i;
d
F
q.
191
&
b) Tool offset amounr ll2o00 to ll22o0 The tool offset amount can be determined by reading the value of the system variable ll200l to ll22o0. The offset values can also be modified by assigning a value to the system variable //1. (rn case of
System variable numbers for tool offset amounr memory c and compensation numbers are uo to 200)
Offset
i
2
number
Variable
lt2001 {t2002
1f
20.03
199
tf
200
(Note) The value of variable number /i2000 is only used to read the value. value is alwavs 0.
c)
be chansed.
Axis
X
System variables for work zero point offset values tt2500 - 112906 By reading the values of system variables ll25OO - ll29O6, work zero point offset values are determined. By assigning va,lues to these variables, work zero point offset values can
System
variable
No.
lt2500
#25.0r
112506
#2600
ti260l *zZoo
#27 00
lt2t 0I
lf 27
06
ll2800
1) #280
{t2806
-194-
-;r;ts;:#
The last values of the system variable #1100 to #Ill5, ltLl32 and #if33 issued are stored as 1.0 or 0.0. (llote) When a value other than I.0 or 0.0 is assigned to //1100 ro //1115, <vacant> is assumed as 0 and values other than <vacant>,and 0 are assumed as l. A value under 0.00000001 is indefinite. (Example l) 1) llacro used to read three digits of BCD data with a sign by address switching. Structure of DI
zLs 2r4
2r3
2ro
e2E 21 26 2s 24
23 22
2L
Used
for
Stgn
102
10r
100
other purposes
Structure -of
DO
2E
27
26
2"
24
23
22
2'
20
Not used
Used
for
Address
other putpose
is specified as follor.rs:
Address feed out Timer macro Reading in of 3-digit BCD data Sign
a
2) Read eight types of signed 6-digit BCD data (three digits to the left of the decimal point and. three digits t.o the right of the decimal point) by address switching in #101. Machine tool composition When D0 2 = O, three digits to the right of the decimal point ? - l. r I three digits to the left of the decimal point When DO 2- to 2- = 000, data No.l 001, data No.2
11
Macro call
09101 ;
/f
, data tlo. 8
command
l0l=/l100;
c6 5P 9 l00D I lt7
#
1199;
-193-
(Example 3)
llacro call
0908 r ;
programming)
c65 P9081 L (Repetition time) R (R point) W (Z-point); The custom macro body is specified as follows:
#3003=l; c00w /llB;
G0lI^I i/23
Mqq.
llt23)l;
The single block stoP is not executed. #18 corresponds to R and ll23 corresponds to W.
(Note) The state of //3003 is cleared by resetting. g) Feed hold, feed rate override, and exact stop check suppression specified in /13004 hllaen the following values are assigned to the system variable /l 3004, feed hold and feed rate override are suppressed for subsequent blockq and the exact stop check is not performed. Pressing the feed hold button during execution of a block for which feed hold has been suppressed: /a\ A-) Executes feed hold at the start of the first block outside the suppression range (when the button is kept pushed). Lights the feed hold lamp, and does not execute feed hold at t.his (, point, but at the end of the first block outside the suppression range, (when the button is pushed and released).
#
3004
U
! eed nolcl
0
2 3
0 0
X X
l
0:
F'f f o n t i rra
L:Yv'
V.
Suppressed
-196-
.iil
"
?'.:
d) Alarm #3000 hlhen detecting an error in the macro, an alarm can be generated. When an alarm number is specified in the system variabte /i3000, the alarm lamp is turned on and the alarm status is entered after the proceeding block is
(05n<99), an alarm No.=500+n An alarm message of less than 26 characters can be specified in the section between control-out and control-in. e) Clock #300I , 1t3002 The clock time can be determined by reading the values of the system variables #3001 , 113002. The time can be preset by assignirfg a value to
processed. /l 3000=n (ALARI
MES
SAGE) ;
Kind
At the time of
Power-on
Counting
Always
Clock
Clock
3001
Reset to
Same
lf
3002
hour
(Example 2) Timer I'licro call command G65P9l0l T (Awaiting time) msec; This macro may be specified as follows:
: :
+l
The suppression of the single block stop and the wait for the auxiliary function end signal. lrrhen the following values are assigned to the system variable #3003, the single block st.op function is suppressed and execution advances from one
block to the next without awaiting the end signal (FIN) of auxiliary functions (S, T, 1"1 and B). When the end signal is not awaited, the distribuEion end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. Be careful not to specify a subsequent auxiliary function without awaiting the end signal.
#3003
I
2
Suppressed
Not suppressed
Suppres
s
ed
-i95-
{ I
.{
1l
'd
I { j
:
Sv
stern variab
#400
le
:
a
114022
{t4L02
#4 109
4It9
4t20
code
code
f) Positional information /15001 to ii5106 Positional information can be determined by reading the system variables #500i to #5016. The unit of posit.ional inf ormation is inxn or inches depending on the input system. System variables 1i5001 to /15106 cannot be used as the left-hand-side term of an arithmet.ic command.
System variable
#500
Positional information
(ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0)
(ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSI'{T)
(PI"IC)
Reading in
during movement
Possib
X axis block end coordinate Y axis block end coordinate Z axis block end coordinate 4th axis block end coordinate X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate
X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate X axis skip signal position Y axis skip signal position Z axis skip signal position
le
502r
Impossib 1e
it5026
(PMC)
Its04r
tf lf
(ABS0T)
(ABS0T) (ABS0T)
(PMC) (PMC) (PMC)
Impo s sib 1e
lf 5Ub. Z
(ABSKP) (ABSKP)
(ABSKP)
#506 3
Possib
le
{t5064
(ABSKP)
r98 -
ii.
h) Variable corresponding ro the serring #3005 By substitution of system variable /13005 by a value, the setting data can
be set.
07
SEQ
06
ABS
05
04
INCH
03
ISO
02
TVON
0l
REVY
00
REVY
image image
TV check Changeover of code system ISO/EIA Changeover of input unit system inch input/uun input Changeover of absolute/incremental command Automatic insertion of sequence No.
15
L4
13
12
lr
10
IAPEF
09
REV4
08
REV4 4th axis mirror image TAPEF t0/11 /L2 Tape format conversion
al
Clock information ii3011, /13012 It is possible to know the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second by reading system variables il30i1, ll30l2.
Kind
System variables
Year, Month,
Day
#30rr ll3roz
Hour, Minute,
Second
J) Number
of parts, //3901 , 113902 It. is possible to know the count value by reading the
//390r and //3902.
(Exanple) When it is May 20, 1987 4:17 5" PM 1t3}l2 = 19870520, #30I2 = I6L105
system variables
Also it is possible to change the count value of parts by substituting the system variables.
Kind
Number Number Svstem variables
#390
{t3902
k) Modal inf orrnation i14001 ro 114120 Modal commands specified up to the preceding block can be determined by reading t.he values of the system variables #400f to ltl+I20. The unit specified is effective.
-t97-
The tool moves to a point appropriate to the machine tool (xp, yp, zp distant from a reference point) through a programmed intermediate point; and after processing a sequence of operations, returns to the original point. Macro call command G65 P9300 X(Intermediate point)Y(Intermediate point)Z (Intermediate point) ; The custom macro body is specified as follows:
09300;
(Exaurple 4)
ill=//5001;
ttZ=tt5002:' //3=/i 5003; G00 z1126; xll24 \1125; G04; (Move is interrupted to read ll502l G9 I x Ixp-//502i lY Iyp-i|5022]zlzp-115023)
z
to
/i5023)
./ :
,ntocessr.ng/
Mqq., ... .
"
!t2.. J,
17.2.4 Arithmetic
commands
A variety of arithmetic operations can be performed on variables. An arithmetic command must be specified the same as in general arithrnetic expressions. /li=<Formula> <Formula>, the right-hand-side of an arithrnetic command is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators. A constant can be used instead of li i and #k. A const.ant without a decimal point used in <Formula> is considered to have a d.ecimal point at the end. l) Definiti-on and substitution of variables
2) Addition arithmetic ili=il j+#k lli=#i-#k Iti=lll OR /lk lli=llj XOR /ik 3) Multiplication arithmetic
llj-=ll
lli=tl
Definj-tion, subst.itution
Sum
Logical
Subrracrion
surn (ar every bir of 32 bits) Exclusive 0R (ar every bir of 32 birs)
jxtlk
ll.l=lfi llfk
i=srN #i=cos
Product Quotient
Logical producr (at every bir of 32 bits) Sine (degree unit) Cosine (degree unit) Tangent (degree unit) Arct.angent (degree unit) Square root Absolute value Conversion from BCD to BIN Conversion from BIN to BCD
Rounding off
j /i i=TAN Iil j
[ /l
[/ij
/li=Rcnfrli
/li=FIX
[ /l
[,/l
[#
//i=RouND I /lj I
jI
j
#i=FUP
-200-
,$,iffi#
System
variable
Positional inf ormation lst axis Tool offset value 2nd axis Tool offset value 3rd axis tool offset value
X axis servo position deviation Y axis servo position deviation Z axis servo position deviation 4th axis servo position deviation
Reading in
during
movement
#508 r
{t5082 #5083
Impos
sib le
#5I01
ll5LOz #5103 #5104
Irnpossib 1e
Abbreviation
Meaning
ABSIO
ABSl'17
ABSOT Couunand
ABSKP
End point
Command
present coordinate
Position
where skip
PresenE
coordinate
LEU
Machine
coordinate
sysEem
tlork coordinate
sysEem
Work
Not considered
Considered
Considered
Considered
Cutter
comPen-
sation (Note 1) The tool length offset amount is not the amount. in effect just before the block is executed; it is the amount for the current block. (Note 2) The block end point (ABSI0) of the skip (c31) is the position where the skip signal has turned on or the end point of the block if the skip signal has not turned on.
-199-
t) Prgcision
Always consider the precision of a custom macro function used for Preparation
of programs. a) Data format Numeric data handled by a custom macro is in a floating decimal point format as follows: F. " 1"1* 2 where M: l-bit sign + 31-bit binary data E: l-bit sign + 7-bit binary data b) Operational precision An operation executed once generates the following error. These errors are accumulat.ed with each repeated oDeration.
Operation format
a =
b^"c
Average error
I.))
. ^-10 X IU
Maximum
1+.OO
error
rU -10
Type of error
a = b/c
^-./vd-fu
q.oo x ru -10
i.24 x l0-q
1.86 x l0-g
Relative error
e
3.73 x l0-q
2.
, IU-
^ l0
5.32 x I0-I0
I.U X IU -R
mln.
(;,:)
-q 5.0 x 10 -
Absolute error
degrees
b/c
TAN
1.8 x 10-6
3.6xI0" -6
(note) Function
8) Notes on decreased
perforrns SIN/COS.
precision a) Addition and subtraction Note that when absolute values are used subtractively iloaddition or subtraction, the relative error cannot be held under l0 ". For example, suppose that the real values of /iI and JlZ are as follows. ttr = 98765432L0123.456 ll2 = 9876543211711 .777 Performing operation ll2 - /ll does not produce
since the custom macro has a precision of only eight decimal digits, the values of /fl and ll2 have a precision as lcw as approximately tir = 987 6543200000.000 liT respectively. (The internal values differ =.9876543300000.000, somewhat from the above values because they are binary numbers.) ll2 - lll = 100000.000 which generates a large error.
Consequently,
tlz-lll=67654.321,'
-202-
How
to use function ROUND 1) If function ROUND is employed in an arithmetic operation command or in an IF or WHILE conditional expression, the figure in function ROUND is rounded off (counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disrdgarding the rest) as is ordinary data with a decimal point.
(
Example)
ROUND [//2 ] is 4. 0 it ltz is 3 . 567 . 2) If function ROUND is employed in a command to an address, it is rounded off to the least input increment of the address. l
F
Ytmn
case. (Exarnple)
c0lx IRouNl [//r I I ; If /ll is 1.4567 and the least input increment of X is 0.001, this block becomes c01 Xl.45L. In this example, the conmand is the same as GOI X /l1; command. Function ROUND in an address command is used rnainly in the following
Program to move incrementally by /11 and ll2 oni-y and then return to
the starting point Nt //1 = I.2345i N2 tlz = 2.3456; N3 c01 X ill F100; : X moves 1.235. N4X//2; : Xmoves2.346.
I 5) Combination of arithmetic operations The above arithmetic operations and functions can be combined. The order of priority in an arithmetic operation is function, multiplication arithmetic then addition arithmetic. /ii=//j+/lk*srN llltl \[xampre L )
fF
N5 X -lll].+ll2l; : X moves -3.58, since #l + llL is 3.5g01. Since I.235 + 2.346 = 3.581, the progr.oo d6e" not return to thE-starting point by N5. Assume N5 X- IROUND Iii I ] + ROUND tll2ll ; It becomes egual to N5 X-[1.235+2.346]; and the program returns ro rhe starting point.
_rt\_ \7
,4\ _-_-\1/--
__-4\_ \:-/
arithmetic operations
Sequence of
6) Uoaifi,cation of arithmetic sequence using A portion to be assigned priority in an ari-thmetic sequence can be enclosed
in t l.
t I can be nested up to five times (including t ] used j-n functions). (Example 2) //i=sru t t tiij+litl*//!,+//rnl*/lnl (Three f o1d nesting)
(r)
{?)
\J/ v
/^
- 201 -
(Lxampre l)
tn
IO
DO 1;
EQI
DO2;
llL20=ltl20+l
N4END
I;
(Note
1)
Notes on
OO
REPEAT ptograrnming.
END m.
END 1; (No)
nn l.
D0 m and END m must correspond to each other in one program.
DO
DO
(No)
END
I;
DO
F\TN
1.
(No)
END 1;
-204-
b) Logical operation EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction. Therefore, be careful of errors. To determine whether or ' not //l and ll2 are equal in the above, for example, rF ltr EQ ll2 is not always evaluated correctly. When the error is evaluated as in IF ABS IIL _ II2 LT 5OOOO and the difference between /i I and tl2 f.a1-1s within the range error, both values must be considered equal. c) Trigonometric functions Absolute_Frrors occur in trigonometric functions; but, since they are not under l0 " be careful of integration or division after using'a trigonometric function.
The program flow can be controlled by using the following commands.
17.2.5 Control commands
1) D;{ergence (G0T0) tiJ IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTOn the next operation is When <condltional expression> is satisfied, executed in the block with the sequence number n in the same program. Sequence number n can be replaced by a variable or <Formul-a> . When the condition is not satisfied, the control proceeds to the next
b
IF [<condltional expression>] can also be omitted; and when it is, the control passes to block n unconditionally. The following expressions can be used for <conditional expression>.
1ock.
<Formula> can be used instead of lli and /lk, and a variable or <Formula> can be used instead of n. (Note l) In the block with the sequence number "n" which will be executed after a GOTO n command, the sequence number must be at the top of the block. Branching in the reverse direction takes more time than that in the
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks DO m to END m are repeatedly executed, That is, Ehe condition of DO m block ls examined and when the <conditional expression> is satisfied, control passes to the next block. But when it is not satisfied, the block after END m is executed. WHILE [<conditional expression>] can also be omitted 'as with IF, and if omitted, blocks from D0 m to END m are executed eternally. WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m and END m must be used as a pair. Identification number m identifies this pair.
-203-
DO
no l.
DO -, -- ?.
.
FNtn I . !t
(No)
F\]n LL| v
L ,
D0
range.
nn t.
.f
coTn qnnn.
'vvv,
.
F\tn
1 rt
.
(yes)
N9000.....;
-206-
(?)
The
same
iden
be
no r.
tr'I\in r
(Yoe\
no r.
[i\u I;
DO
statement can
be
nn r.
nn ?.
Dn ?.
\ tcD/
END 3;
,c,t\U I;
trNn r.
Custom macro bodies or subprograms can be range. D0 statements can be nested up to custom macro body or in the subprogram.
arar t
c65. . .
(Yes)
G66.....; G67.....;
FNIN !L!U
1. I
(Yes)
(Yes)
nn t.
MOa rrlv.....
(Yes)
END 1;
i) Operation command (block including=) ii) Control command (block including G0T0, DO or END) iii) Macro call'command (block including G65, G66, G67 or G codes calling macro) The following blocks have the same features as the macro statements: i) A subprogram call block (a block including subprogram call comrnand by M98, M, or T code) which does not include any conmand address oEher than O, N, P and L.. ii) g block which includes !'199 but does not include anv command address other than 0, N, p and L.
-208-
GOTO 9000;
D0
1;
(No)
N9000.....;
FI\IN
1.
nn 1.
N9000.....;
(No)
END
I;
GOTO
9000;
207
I'tacro statement
alreadv executed
N5/i l=
l0;
N6X- 1000;
statement I'lacro statement executed Iulacro statement executed Second CNC statement
Execution of
macro stalement
Execution of
CNC statemcnt
When the second CNC statement after the block currently executed is the no-movement b1ock, macro statements up to that and next to the second cNC statement (i.e. the no-movement block) aft.er the block currentlv executed are executed. (Exarnple 4) N lXi 000; Bfock currently executed N2//10=100; Macro statement already executed
N3Y 1000;
N4/iIr00=1;
NTilli0l=1;
u8il2=20; N9X-i000;
Execution of
macro statement
First CNC statement Macro statement executed Macro st.atement executed Second CNC sEatement (no-movement block) Macro statement executed Macro statement executed Third CNC statement
N5
N4
Execution of
CNC statemenr
(b)
When the firsr- CNC statement after the block currently executed no-movement block, the macro stat.emenE is not executed. (Example 5) N lY 1000; Block currently executed
is the
N2ilI100=l;
N421000;
ll3/i l= i0;
N5/l1l0l=l;
N6i/2=20; N7X-1000;
Exccution of
CNC sratenrcnt
Ilacro statement already executed Ilacro statement already executed First CNC statement (no-movement block) Macro statement execuEed l'lacro statement executed
Second CNC staternent
-210-
Blocks other than macro statements are sometimes referred Eo as CNC statements. The nacro stat.ement differs from the CNC statement, in the following points: i) In the normal single block mode, the single block stop does not occur. (See item (3), Chapter 8) ii) The macro sEatement. is not regarded as the no movement block in the cutter
iii)
compensation c. The time of execution differs. iii) j-s described below in further detaj-l. a) The macro statement existing next to the block which does not buffer the next one (b1ock of non-buffering M code, or G3l block) is executed after that block is executed. (Example l) NlXt000M00; Block currently execut.ed N2i/1100=l; Macro statement
Execution
of macro statement
Execution of
CNC statement
b) llacro statement existing next to the block buffering the next one. i) When not in cutter compensation C mode When the current. block starts to be executed, the nexE nacro statement is imnediately executed. The macro statement up to the next CNC statement is executed.
(Exarnple 2)
N2/il i00=1; N3i/ l= l0;
N4X2000;
Execution of
macro statement
N1G0 1X1000;
Block currently executed Macro statement executed Macro stat.ement executed Next
CNC
statement
Execution of
CNC statement
ii)
When
(a)
When
in cutter compensation
C mode
the first CNC statement next to the block currently execut.ed is noc the no-movement block (block containing no movement command in the cutter compensation plan).
rT) \j.,/ When t,he second CNC sEatement i-s
-209-
A block including a macro call command (G65, G66, G67), arithmetic command and control command is not stopped even by single block operation. The following parameter setting executes a single block stop for commands other than macro call commands. This function is used for testins a custom
*^^-^ ulo!!v L^l-, uugy.
U
SBK}I
single stop is done in every macro stalement. A block in which a macro statement has executed a single block stop, is assumed to have no movement in the cuEter compensation mode. Sometimes incorrect compensation is performed. (This case is handled the same as it is for a movement amount of 0 although a move has been speci,fied.) L+) Optional block sklp l, appearing in the uiddle of <expression>(right-hand-side of an arithmetic formula, or j-n ), is treated as division, and not an optional block skip. s) Operation in EDIT urode The fo11o\,ring settings can be used to protect registered custom macro bodies and subprograms from accidental destruction.
When SBI(M=I,
0 0
I
PRG9
(Setting operation is effective) to I specifies that custom macro bodies or subprograms wich program numbers 9000 to 9999 cannot be cancelled, and edited. However, this affeets Ehe deletion of al1 programs during turning on. Setting
Reset I^lhen a cleared
status is produced by a reset, all local variables and eommon variables ill00 to if 149 become <vacant>. System variables //1000 x ll Ll32 are not cleared. Call condition and D0 condition are cleared by reset. However a cleared status cannot be produced by the parameter (No. 040, LOCC,
EMC).
7)
8) Feed hold
Display j-n PROGMM RESTART page The M and T code" rrqerl fnr errhnrsgl4m calllng are not displayed like
M98.
Macro statement execution stops at the end of the biock by turning on feed hold. (It also stops by resetting or by alarm generation). 9) Other llmitations a) Usable variables //0, llL to /i33, #100 to tll49 , #500 to /1531, sysrem variables.
c) Constant value-rralid in
I'laximum
<FormuIa>
Maximum of four f) Iteration identification number 1to3 g) Nesti-ng of Llaximum of five h) Subprogram nesting Eight (Subprogram call and macro call)
-2r2-
* t
'i
;, *-
The following code can be used in the program codes used in conventional programs. 1) rso
Meaning
t
8
7
17.2.7
of the
cust.om macro
in addition to
* I
x
:.
I
0 0
Character
f
!
:
i
::
o 0 0 0 o 0
o
0
n 0
0
o
a
+.
OO
o 0 0
o
0 0 0 0 0
nl UJ
1l
ll
*
o
o o
o 0 0
tl
oo oo
.*
0 o 0
z)
ErA
8
7
Meaning
r
L
Character
(Data No. 0053) (Dara No. 0054) (Dara No. 0044) (Dara No. 0042) (Dara No. 0043)
i
1 s
0, the same code 0 as in the program number, must be used. The hole pattern ll, + and = in EIA code must be set as parameters (Data No. for . 0042 Eo 0044, 0053, 0054). Ilowever, the character with no punched hole eannot be used. Note that alphabetic characters can be used, but when used as /1, they are not used in their proper sense. Special words used in custorn macro are: . OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, ANd LE. AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE,
DO,
END
:
:
A custom macro body is similar to a subprogram; it is registered and edited in the same \^iay as a subprogram. The memory used to register custom macro bodies is included in the storage capacity of the CNC. 17.4 Limitations
r) MDI operation Macro call and subprogram call command cannot be specified in MDI mode. However, if I'IDI operation B function i.s provided, subprogram call command can be performed.
2) Sequence number search
1)
in the custom macro body cannot be searched for. Single block A block, other than one including a macro call command, arithmetic command, or control command, can be executed as a single block stop even when in the
Sequence numbers macro.
E i;
- 2rl -
trtrtrtrtr
tr trETE tr
trMMMM
Parameters
B-4rh-D
+l
18.4
1 L/
\ rf
rha nffeol No. is commanded by address D, the modal value of H is also rewritten. (Distj-nqs use of addresses D and H cannot be done.)
The format conversion can be set by setting parameters. By setting the page as " (SETTING 2)" and by rewriting of "TAPEF", it becones
follows:
as
TAPEF =
Ot
02000 N0130
(SETTTNG 2)
PWE :O _TAPEF = 0
(0:
DISABLE
I:
ENABLE)
No. 18.6
TAPEF
MDI
1) Subprogeram call To call .61 srrlrnrnorom i f a command of more than 4 digits is used for designati." *". (address P), the last 4 digits become the ";"i;""" if the subprogram No. and"lfot"*t"* times of repetitive calling (address L) is not specified, the tj-mes of repetition becomes one. .
-214-
18.
Memory
b) c)
F
i
operation of the progran registered by 10/ll tape format is possible for rhe following funcEions with setting of the seEting parameters. a) Cutter compensation (G40, G4l, G42)
Subprogram call (UlAl Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80
Points of Tape Format
G89)
18.1 Difference
Difference of tape format between 0/00 and 10/11 is shovm in TabIe below.
Function
IO/II
rGl7.
L
OM
Cutter comDensation
rG40r
r Gl7
L
r rG40r
P:
Subprogram
(One
D: Offset call
M98
of X, Y, Z or 4th)
No.
;
P_r_
rG73r X iCllrt, Z
rG8lr F I'
rlt
LG89I
ic76i 0L:
R_
X
Z
pL
ttGT4tl
I
i
i cgr
1G76
RP.n
t
F
L.Atl
K: Tirnes of repetition
&
Times of repetition
18.2
t
which could not be used for 0/00 series can be used by format conversion. In this case, even if format conversion is set, restriction of 0/00 format is applied to the range of conaand values being used for the basic address, and if a value out of the 0/00 fornat range is registered, a P/S alarm is generated. Added basic addresses and their range of command values are mentioned in Table below. 0ther addresses will have the same specification as address in 0/00 series.
Some addresses
Address
L
rnm
input
ineh input
0ffset
t
ii
e
No.
I - 9999 0-999
l - 9999 0-999
-2r3-
III
OPERATION
iii)
Manual handle feed (See Section III-4.4) By rotatlng the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance correspondlng to the degree of handle rotation.
Program
Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the ereated program. It includes memory and MDI operations. i) Memory operatiorf
Memory
Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is cal1ed memory operat ion.
2IB -
F I
1.
INTRODUCTION
1)
Manual operation a) Manual reference point return (See Sectlon III-4.1) The LNC machine tool has a position used to deternine the machlne posi-
tion. This position is called the reference point, where the tool is replaced or the coordinates are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned onr the tool is moved to the reference polnt. Manual reference point return is to move the tool to the reference point using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator's pane1.
Op"r"tor's panei
ooo
Orrl oo |
ooo
The tool can be moved to the reference point also with program cornnands. This operation is called automatlc reference polnt return. (See Section
rr-6.
I)
b)
Tool movernent by manual operatlon Using operatorrs panel switchesr pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be noved along each axis.
a
\
'i
Operator's panel
ooo oo
Orrr oorrr
Manual handle
ooo
Work
j
a
The tool can be moved 1n the followlng ways: i) Manual conrinuous feed (See Secrfoi ffi-+.2) The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed. ii) Step feed (See Sectlon III-4.3) The tool lDoves by the predetermlned dlstance each tlne a pushbutton ls pressed.
-217-
Feed hold
reset
Automatic operation
Program Program
stop end
I
)
PressLng the cycle start pushbutton eauses automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. trrlhen one process machining ls completed, aulomatic operation stops.
I
I
Workpiece
Depth-ofcut specified
by the program
While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle.
-220-
&
a g
MDI operation
After the program is entered, as an eornrnand group, from the I"IDI keyboard, the nachine can be run according to the program. Thls operatlon is called MDI operation. 3) Automatic operation 1) Program selection (See Secrion III_5.2.I)
Data format in
0 1001
memory
Program number
Work-l program
M30
0 1002
I
Work-2 program
M30
0 1003
Automatlc
operation
Program number
I.lork-3 program
select the program used for the work. ordinarlly, one program is prepared for one work. rf two or more progra*s are in me'ory, select the progran to be used, by searchlng the progra' number (Sectron rrr-10.4).
-2t9-
ili)
w
Cycle
Tool
(.r/,/
r,/,4 (/^
t,/ ,/ )
lLz-t
Stop Stop
is
checked
Single block
b)
How to view the posicion display change without running i) M,achine lock (Sef Sections III-6. I and III-6.2)
the machine
ll *rT
w.zt
(//)
CRT/TTDI
V)
V7j tool
VA
Change caused by
machine movemcnt
Machine lock
ii) Auxiliary function lock When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off' etc.) are disabled.
r-i:,'i =T
::,:l:
4) Program test
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine). a) Check by running i) Dry run (See Section III-6.6)
Remove the work, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on the operator's
panel.
i -'l-----
It
|t;
Drv run
ii)
50 mm/min.
Feed rate after feed rate override:
than l0
that specificd
by
the
Program.
mm/min.
Overside is 20%
-221-
i)
Off
set value
(See ,sectlon
III-10.1.
number I
Screen
Tool compensation
Keys
number
CNC memory
The
tool has the tool dimension (length, dianeter). When a workpiece is machlned, the tool movement route depends on the tool dlmensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that perrnit any grol to cut the work shape specified by the program. Tool dinension data is cal-led the offset value.
-] | | r I i
lrl
orir.t
-224-
5)
Parr program editing (See secti-on III-9) After a created program is once reglstered in memory, it modlfied from the CRT/MDI panel.
Program registmtion
can be correct.ed or
Program correction
or modification
Nl
T/MDI
N2.
h
{}
NC tape (program)
PPR
be
Data display/setting
Section III-10.)
Data setting
display
Screen
CRTi
NTDI
Keys
Data
CNC memory
NC
reen.
CRT/MDI
-223-
Parameters
Rapid traverse rate Positional control system Reference point return sYstem Backlash compensation data
Screen
KeYs
CNC memory
Machine
operation
The
functions have versatllity ln order to take actlon in characteristics of varlous machines. For example, CNC can specify the following:
CNC
I ) Ra,gld-l:la;zerse-rat-e--of=each, axis 2) Whether incre.qe_ilE-sy-stem is based on metric system or lnch system. 3) How ro ser @Avg -' Data to make the above speclfication is called pardmeters. (See Sectlon III-10.4) Parameters differ dependlng on machine tool.
-225-
iii)
Setting data
M^irror image machining on/
olt
setttng
Screen
Keys
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Machine
operation
Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator rn operation. This data causes urachine characteristics to change. The above data is called setting data. iv) Data protection key (See Section III-I0.6)
Operator's panel
Data
CRT/MDI
protection key
Program
Offset value
Parameters
A key called the data protection key can be defined. rr is used to prevent the program, offsetr pararneters, setting daEa, etc. from being registered, set, modified, or deleted erroneously.
-226-
Display
I . 1. )
Active program
number
Program.tontent
01
002
01 046
Program list
of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled next and the'program list are dis(See Sectlon
III-11.3)
"l
ir ti.,
ll' +x
system
Work coordinate
CRT screen
The current posit,ion of the tool ls displayed The distance from the current position to the displayed.
iii)
Alarm display (See Section IIL-11. s) is displayed at bottom, pressing the button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below. l-ALAffil
When an alarm occurs and ALARM
AJqRI
iSSISE
O.ER TRA\jEL
OUER TRFIJEL
W : :
+X +Z
I'W
518 SA
iv) Parts count display When this option is selected, two types of run time
are displayed on the screen.
and
number of parts
a2@@@ NATSA
x Y z
-1,2.54@ -42.5@A
@.a@@
.r.,-ETT,Sfl
RLN
rrF *r-
*.J
r;-ir;ln;tffit
-228-
.'. .'i::{
Display on the
YZ plane
Display on the
XY pla4e
2) Yz plane
229
"tr' -
.,--l-..:
B)
/A\ V
Paper tape
Reader/puncher
interlace
Floppl,disk
Automatic programming
system
The program, offset, parameters, etc. input in NC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.
Ir-. -;:.'
'-;'1.--.:
'
1.:
:,.
r
-230-
2.
OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Panel
2.1 CRT/MDl
following illustration.
of a
CRT
display (9"
as in the
l)
CRT/MDI
panel for
0-I1B
CRT character display (9")
Reset key
EAEEE
Program
edit key
Input key
@BOONME
Page
change key
Function key
I
Start/output key
Cursor
moYe key
2) Full
key
Reset keY
POftR
l,*l
lo*'
g
EMMBBMH
Cursor move key
Page change
rtr
key
rtrtr
trEtrE
@tr@E
Function key
Input key
Start/output key
23r -
2.1.1 MDI
keyboard Table
No. ( 1)
Name
ions
RESET key
(2)
START key
Press this key to start the IIDI conmands, or to start the automatic operation cycle. Since this key's operating method differs according to the machine tools, refer to the rnachine tool builderts operation manual.
(3) (4)
(5)
Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT screen. When the address key or the, numerical key is pressed next, the position where the alphabet or the numeral is inserted next is indicated by rt lt
lflnen the cancel (CAN) key is pressedr the character immediately before the rr rr is cancelled.
Example:
I,Jhen
(CAN)
played.
(6)
the key in ut buffer displays >N00lxl0002 and rhe cancel key is pr ssed, Z is cancelled and >NO0ITIOOO is disThere are two kinds of cursor shift key described be1ow. * : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the forward direction. t : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the reverse direction.
a')a LJL
Table
No.
Name
Functions
Two kinds of page changeover keys ar: de-
(7)
scribed be1ow. + : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward direction. i : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the teverse direction.
(8)
The soft keys have various functions ' according to the Applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. Left-end soft key [< I : This key is used in order to exit to the initial stats (condition when the function button is depressed when each feature has been operated vla soft
Right-end soft key Dl : This key is used when operate functions which have nor yet been displayed.
keys.
chapters in a document.
@
lTffid-l
I opsnr
In EDIT mode ... edits and displays the program in the In MDI mode ... inputs and displays the MDI data In automatic operation ... displays command value.
memory
Setting and display of offset value, setting and display of variable. Setting and display of parameter
pane1.
and
@
t-otrR--l
dlsplay of diagnostic
daEa.
s
I I
of soflware operatort
ALARM
GRAPH
Graphic function.
I
Several pages are inciuded in the chapter selected wlth each function button. The page is selected with PAGE button. (Note) The data displayed on the screen disappears when one of the function buttons and the lffil key are pressed. Thereafter, when either function button is pressed, the corresponding screen is dlsplayed again. When the unit is not used with the povrer turned on for long time, turn off the screen. This ls effective to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.
-233-
2.2
The operatorrs panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations of a typical operator t s panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bv the machine
tool builder.
/A ((
.\j/
Si^'-'f
ra v
)'i
o
FEED
o
+?
HOLI)
o
OFF
v(o66 \r' \/ v
-,,0.
roL&sTEpFr:Fr)
(N)
-
ON
\z/
\)l7 \)Z N
DR'Rt
'?'J!"!i,"
rHIiH{it*
\r/
m/mm
HA\DLE
STEP FEED
AMOUNT
""(N"'i
rFF ,.-=\
nN z'
\)/ MACHINE
LOCK
r:ro
N, v
HANDIE AXIS
I /-1\
\\\/
/rN-\
xloo
r"TJil3.',?*
panel
-234-
Table
2.2
Element functions
Name
Function By selecting an execution program then pressing this pushbutton, automat ic operation is started . During automatic operation, the lamp inclicating automat ic operation is on.
hlhen
this pushbutton is pressed drrring automatic operation, the tool decelerates then stops. Select a mode, depending on the operation type.
By pressing this pushbutton, the tool is fed rapidly. By pressing this button, manual continuous or sEep feed is executed. By rotating the handle, the tool is rotated in the corresponding direction. By placing the single block switch in Ehe 0N position, automatic operation is executed by one block. By placing this switch in the 0N position, the optional block skip is executed. Bv placing this switch in the 0N posiEion, the dry run is executed. By placing this switch in the Oll position, reference point return is executed.
Lhen the rapid traverse override is to be executed, this
Single block
Optional block skip switch
h rrr ".J rr rn
Reference point
return
amounE
Lock selection
llanual
ab
solute
manual
selection
Handle multiplying
selectlon
During manual handle feed, select the multlplier moving amount per step.
of the
-235-
2.3
Tape Reader
t)
Name
Tape
6.
Grips
3.
Capstan
opera.tlon swrtcn
reader
i _
,1
1- Cable stored
p a11
2.
Optical
reader part
l-ll I ll
)3."., lock
l
10.
fl] ,111_
_-]---r
lj l: .l ,
13.
Readeri puncher
,lr ii
interface
lll
Lowering
Iock
Iever
Photo
amplifier
5. Tape
box
Fig.
Tabte
2.3.1
2.3.1
Functi-ons
Light Sources
An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted for each channJl and for ihe feed hole (9 diodes A built-in Stop Shoe functions in total). to decelerate the taPe. The light source is attracted to the optical reader by a magnet so that the tape will be
held in the eorrect position. Thls unit can be opened upward, by turning the tape reader control switch to the RELEASE position (this turns off the magnet).
Reads data punched on the tape ' through a glass wlndow. Dust or scratches on the glass window can result in reading errors' Keep this window cLean-
Optical
Reader
Capstan Roller
by
-zJo-
Table
No.
Name
Functions
4.
Tape
AUTO
...
or used to open the light or source. When loading this unloadi-ng the l tape, position is selectbd. The tape is set to fixed position by the Stop Shoe. The feed and stop of the tape is controlled by commands from the Control Unit. During a taPe-controlled operation or data input from tape, the Light Source must be closed and this position must be The tape can be fed in the If forward reading direction. another position is selected, the tape feed is stopped.
selected.
MANUAL
Tape Box
A Tape Box is located below the Tape Reader. A belt used to draw out a paper tape is located inside the box. The paper tape can easily be pulled out using this belt.
6.
7.
Grips
I^linder
-237-
Table
2.3.1
Functions
Metal fitting
Push
To remove rewound tape, decrease the internal diarneter by pushing the fastener as shown in the above figure.
Cover lock
While the tape reader is being carried, sure to keep the cover under this lock.
be
I^lhen the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism secures the reader. As a result,
the tape reader is not lowered. The latch is locked with this lock lever. Thus, the latch is not released by raising the tape reader with the grips. I{hile the tape reader is kept under the 1ock, the lever remains horizontal. When storing the tape reader, release the lock by pressing this lever. Then, raise the reader wlth the grips, and release the latch. After the latch is released, the tape reader can be stored in the tape box. After storage, secure the tape reader wlth the cover lock.
-238-
Tabf e
2.3.1
No.
Name
Functions
ll
1')
'I ?
The power and signal cables The cable length is I.5 ro.
Tape reader photoamplifier.
are rolled
up.
Photoamplifler
Reader/puncher interface adapter
+ reader/
2) Tape reader handling a) Preparations (1) Remove the cover lock (9). Raise the tape reader with rhe grips (6) until a click is heard. Then, lower the tape reader. At this t1me, the tape reader is viewed and seeured. Check that the lowering lock lever (10) is horizontal. @ Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage box (Il). Connect the signal cable and the poner cable to NC's reader/puncher interface port and power source, respectively. b) Tape loading IP Set_ the Tape Reader swirch to rhe RELEASE position. (, Lift the Light Source Uni-t, and insert an Nc tape between the gap. The tape must be posltioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.
Feed hole
<\__ -----l
!y1r- the tape until the top of the tape goes past the capstan roller. check that the NC rape is correctry pbsllionei by the Tape Guide. (q) Lower the Light Source. (6) Turn the switch to the AUTO position. }x Suspend the top and rear-end of the tape in the Tape Box. \1-i c) Un1 oading the NC tape (i) Turn the switch to the RELEASE position. X (2) Lift the Light Source and remove the tape. /1\ Lower the Light Source.
(41
the cables into the cable box (11). the lowering lock lever (r0) dor,mward at both sldes. (, Raise the taBe reader wlth the grips (6) (ratch release operation). Then, lower it. (A t!!"t setfing the cover lock (g), carry the tape reader with the grlps (6).
-239_
2.3.2
1) Precautions on tape loading When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within rhe tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape should be set as shown in the figure below.
(
Ir tt
|
Set the tape so that this section
is under the glass
I
window.
Actually, the end of block code (;) is in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable Don't disconnect or connect CNC +-) tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC and tape reader po!/er supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of CNC controller nay be broken. Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before dj-sconnecting or connecting the connection cable, accordingly.
2.4
CASSETTE ADAPTOR
NC connecting connector
Fio^f
l-"-.
See the FANUC CASSETTE Operatorrs Manual (B-53484E) for rhe FANUC CASSETTE operat ion. See Chapter III-12 in this rnanual for data input/output operation from and to FANUC cassette.
-240-
2.5 FANUC
PPR
An I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and prlnter in'one systep. Interface is reader/puncher interface.
Printer
Switch unit
FANUC PPR
Paper tape reader read speed Paper tape punch punching speed
1.2 line/sec
PPR
for the
FANUC PPR
Operatlon.
3. 1)
POWER ON/OFF
Turning on the power q2 check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. lD Turn on the power according to the instruction manual of the machine tool data a Check that somefan is being displayed on the q!) Check that the motor is rotating.
builder.
CRT
screen.
NOTE: When
pressing the POWER ON k.y, do not touch any other CRT/l-DI panel Ja llvL keys. Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed t uv -^+ ts^"^L LvuLll keys are used for the maintenance or special operation purthem. Some pose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.
z) Tur ning off the power ri\ Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel /;\ Check that all movable blocks of the NC machine tool is stoppi.ng. (3) If I/O devices such as the tape punch unit are connected to the NC rnav chine too1, turn off the power to these devices. e) Contlnue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds. >.< (q Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to the machine.
)
j I
-242-
,* 'd
5
't,
-:';tj
:.i:,i:;.t
4. 4.1
MANUAL OPERATION
Manual Reference Point Return
,t-
Ser the
MODE SELECT
swirch to Ehe
MDI
JOG
position.
POINT
RETURN
switch.
ON
OFF
Jog Feed
The tool Boves along the selected axis to the decelerated point rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference point at the FL at the speed. A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse
moti.on.
-243-
REFERENCE POINT
/A/n\/A\
Yl\/_Y
(Note
REFERENCE POINT RETURN COI.IPLETION LED light s at the completion of reference point return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN swirch is rurned off. (Note 2) The REFERENCE P0rNT RETIIRN COMPLETToN LED is extinguished by either of the following operations: (i) Moving from the reference point. (ii) Entering an emergency stop state. (Note 3) For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to reEurn the tool to reference point, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
1)
Once the
4.2
The
machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows. Set the MODE SELECT sr^ritch to the JOG position.
MDI
o"'o
uo,,
lS1,o"
+Y
{ {N
\'rEP/HANDLE
A A A\ V V V
+X
+Z
(())
/A
-X
/A /A V
-Y
_Z
\\
\r'
))
(Note i) rf 3 axes are selected simultaneously by three swi-tches, I axis selected at first only moves because Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. (Note 2) when the mode is switched to the JOG mode while po\rer is oD, axis will not move even 1f it has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.
-244-
FEEDRATE mm/min
Feedrate
Metric input
mrn/min
0
I
)n
1t
0. 08
2 3
0. t2
5.0
7.9
12.6
20
32
4
5
1.2
I
9
50
79
2.0
3.0
r + t
? F 3
10
t26
200 320
500
5.0 8.0 l2
20
lt
L2 t.3
i
a "{
:
i
t4
790
L260
30 50
t *
$ ;
l5
(Note 1) The feedrate error (about +3%) affects on the feedrate in the table
above.
-245-
@ Rapid traverse
TRAVERSE
button
.RAPID TRAVERSE
It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed. (Note 1) Feedrate, time constant and rnethod of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in
prograrmed
command
STEp
posirion.
MDI
STEP
xr0
XT
x10000 x100000
l\|
xl0
001
rnm
xl00
run
x1000
rnn
0.
0.01
0.1
L
0.
rnm
0.000I inch
0.001 inch
0.01 inch
I inch
'i
-246-
:9
*
lt: 3
Wtren
the switch is pressed once, the axis Eoves by the anount speclfied in lts direction. Then when the switch ls pressed after releasLng it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.
(Note 1) The feed rate is the same as the jog feed rate. (Note 2) The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse over-
feed rate can be adjusted precisely by usLng the manual pulse generator. ri) Set the MODE SELECT swltch to the IIANDLE position. s./
Awo
//
----l-t-
srep/HaNor-e
..*( @),""
O Select an axis.
i'
t
I
t t
F
-247-
/A v
a
clockwise rotation counterclockrrise rotation
(The
a
* direction
Movernent amount In some cases, thejperatorrs panel is provided with the following switch. xl0 nultiplies the movement amount.by l0;x100 by 100.
xl0
X100 (Note 2)
Handle Multiplier
Movement amount
per degree
x100
Input
system
XI
xl0
0.01 nn
0.0O1 inch
0.00I nn
0.0001 inch
0.1
nsl
0.01 inch
(Note 1) 9!6"1 amount may be usecl depending on machine tool. (Note 2) rf the handre is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there ls a difference between the handle rotation amourrt and the machine Ioovement distance. (Note 3) Rotating the handle too fast when X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.
-248-
4.5
Ihis switch selects whether the amount of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value. 1) Wtren the switch is ON.
Yaxis
Xaxis
the switch is
of
manual operation.
OFF.
x2 x1
The coordinate values do not change. (Exanple 1) Suppose the next tape comands
:
G0lc90xr00. 0Y100.
x200.0YI50.0
x300.0Y200.0
0F0 10;
a)
Wtren
; ;
(X-axis +20.0'
r2o.o,2oo.o)
Qzo.o '250.0)
Manual
200.0 , 150.0 )
-249-
b)
l.then the feed hold button is pressed while block @ is being executed, manual operation (y-axls +75.0) is performed, and che cycle start button is pressed and released.
( 200.0 ,225.0)
( 150.0 , 200.0 )
Manual operation
+
(
200.0 , r s0.0 )
( 1s0.0 , 125.0 )
1ioo.o,2oo.o)
c)
the feed hold button is pressed while block is being execured, manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) i_s performedr the @ iontrol unit is reset with the RESET button, and block @ is read again.
I'ltren
(300.0,275.0)
( 200.0 ,
225.0)
Manual absolute srvitch OFF
(l
sos ,200.0
.-\ -e_
lr{anual absolute srvitch ON
(
300.0 , 200.0 )
Manual operation
(
200.0 , l 50.0 )
( 1s0.0
,I
2s.0 )
( r 00.0 , 100.0
-250-
Fd, axls
When
returns.
cornmand,
only the
-ri
conmanded
N2 X200.0; N3 Yl50.0;
?
I
I
Manual absolute switch ON
OFF
e) When the following' commands are incremental conmands, operati-on is the same as when the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set to OFF.
(Note 1) The followlng occurs when manual operation
compensatlon.
1)
Tfre I{ANUAI ABSOLUTE swl-tch ts OFF and cutter compensatlon is being performed. Afteilnanual operatlon ls performed with the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ln the OFF position durLng cutter compensatlon, autonattc operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if nanual novement had not been performed. The anount of separati;n eguals to the amount that was performed nanually.
""'ot
oo"r"rrol
/ /
-251-
2) The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON and cutter compensation is being performed. Operation of the machine upon return to automatlc operation after manuaL intervention with the manual absolute switch in the 0N position during execution with an absolute command Program in the cutter compensation rnode will be described. The vector, the remalning part of the current block and the beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel the amount of manual movemenL performed is included in the calculations of the vectors of the two blocks subsequent to the current block. This also applies when manual operat ion is performed during cornering. a) During block executj-on
(Exarnple 1)
vaz
VO ,/l
r6
a\
t,
VBl
\--,/,
Pp
-/1vc2
\ \
Absolute command program Path
VBl'
Y
\
\
-(\ \
\rn
)\
Tool center path before manual operation
.'i-t'I
\/
PH'
-252-
Assume
*
i
t'
that the feed hold was applied at. point Pr. whlle moving from p^ to of prograrmed path P^ , Po, and P^ and that th6 tool was manually ntved td PHr. The block end^polfrt Po moVes to the point Po'by the amount of nanudl movement, and vectors V-i and V-^ at P- also mo'7e to V-,t e.nd V-^t. Vectors V.' and V", between tff6 next tfso blo"cks Po - t,- anf,!,- - prrofre discarded "alnd new "vbctors V^r t and V^"t (V..rt = Y ni in t'he examlle aSove) are produced from the relaUton betwE'en Po*'- P""?nd Pn - Pn. However, since Vor t is not a newly calculated vecflor, co"rrect olfset "ls not performed trf block Pr' - PC. 0ffset is correctly performed after PC.
Po
(Example 2)
l'B2
l/rt
\..
t''cz
lrBl
s
\,-' \
'.
t"\
--\ \
\
Absolute command program path
vBl
*
(r
i.\.Y r. _==\41
Y.-.-\
,,.
vB2'..t /\\ /\
/,
\YB\
\\\ \\ tt\
a\
_t
Tool
\ ) center puth t
\\ \\ \
l'A2
ru\,i VAI
Manual operation
t.
f t
F E.
V,aZ'
Pn'
V.A.
l'
-253-
This is an example when manual operation is performed during cutter compensation cornering. VAZt, VBlr' and Vg2t are vectors moved in parallel wlth V62' VBl and Vg2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from VCt and YCZ. Then correct cutter compensation is performed for the blocks following Pc. b) Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated single block stop.
by
l'B2
VCl
VBl
Manual
operation
Vn
t'
,/
vst'
/4
\/" \
Absolute command program path
vectors Vg1 and vg2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation Subsequent processing is the same as case a) described above. An MDI operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation. The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
-254-
5.
AUTOMATIC OPEBATION
Operation Mode
5.1
Load the program to the memory (III-9) Select the program to be operated Set the node selector to the AUTO posltion
MDI
--r---.-\ Awo'/
,o,,(
@ Press the cycle start button.
srpp/rHNor_s
),""
Cycle start tamp lights
/A
@
V
hltren
Cycle start
pressed, automatic operat.ion beglns and the cycle start larnp lights. be entered frour the CRT/UDI panel- for execution.
I
MDI mod.e.
|
b)
Push rhe l-pRocRAlt
/ ,4)t \-
/--]\
srEp/HANDLE
uo,,\
I burton.
\tt"y ^t
il\
1,o"
-255-
c)
|W
GAR
G1? P G96 A G94 H G21 N GzlAS
BI9
GBA
GE
Are.
?
I'IDI
d) p""h
e)
button. The dara, xlO. 5 , is inpur and displayed. lrf you are aware of an error in _the keyed-in number before pushing the fTNryil buttonr push the [CAil but,ion and key in rhe correcr number again. If notice an error after ttre I fnFUfl button is pushed, key in rhe data again from the beginnins. rTr rtr Fl -l-0-l "[ I . t-s-r kevs in this order. f) e""nl i s s
keys
in this order.
p) o/
I 1_3l'"dl ; I rnstr l-rllFuT-l key. The dara, y200.5 is input and displayed. If you pushed $tong number keys, correct the operation following the instruction described above.
PRSRtr'1 0,'rDI) X Y
(F0m_)
l'
I'
TW
LS.WB M.ffi
GMR GgI
GT? P G96 e
E1
t'l
G4A S G49 T
B8
9=
Rm.
I{D I
-256-
2) canceling Y200.5 of XI0.5 Y200.5; before pressing tn" I-SfAnfl button (cycle
D
+^' F L4r L
L.
and the [El,.N] buttons in this order. "r,a l-rllpJTl h) Prrsh the I S1'ART I brriton or the evcl e sf erf button on the machine opeI
rator t s pane1. (Note) Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data again.
Wlth the MDI operati.on - B specification, it is possible to prepare a program and execute it similarly to usual registration program, in che MDI mode. l) Program preparation If the I'IDI program screen is selected, display of the format below is
PROGRAM
shown.
(}DI)
00010
N0010
00000
(MODAL)
c00 c17 F R
ADRS
G49 c80
G54
G64
5300
T0i01
I'IDI
Tho nrnor'- No. t'00000tt is automatically inserted. Thereafter, prepare the program to be executed by operation similar to normal program editing.
Word search, address searchr program
Insertion, modification, deletion of word star! search, etc. Since a prepared program is noE deleted by a reset operationr perform the operation of Note 3) to delete the program.
Note 1) Operation on the regi-stered program is not possible. (Registration, deletion, punch, comparison, etc.) Note 2) The length of a program which can be prepared is limited to one page of
a CRT screen. In the above case' the longest program is 6 lines with specification of the Parameter (No. 0028 MMDL), if the mode is switched to Ehar of no modal information display, up to t0 lines of program can be prepared. If the number of lines of program exceeds the limir, Z(ER) will disappear and insertion and modification operation will become
L)
2) Program execution
(mr1 00000 c00 xr00.0 I'103 i c01 2L20.0 F500; P9010 ; M98 20.0 ; c00
PROGRAM
o/
Y200.0;
00010 N00r0
(I'IODAL)
G49 c80
G9B G67 H
G54
G64
M03
s300
r0r01
MDI
ADRS
CURRNT
3) Cautions a) Programs registered in the program tnemory can be called as subprogram. In thi-s case, the nest of subprogram is up to 2-loops combined with automatic operation (AUTO) program. (If a custom macro option is provided, up to 4-loops combined is possible.) b) If the custom macro option is provided, even in the MDI mode, custom macro program preparation and execution is possible. However, macro call is not possible. c) A program to be prepared in the MDI mode uses program memory vacant area. If there is no vacancy in the program memory, program preparation in the MDI mode is not possible. d) Programs prepared in the MDI urode will be erased in the following cases: i) In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed. ii) In AUTO mode, if memory operation is perforned. iii) In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed. iv) Background editing is performed. e) The editing operation during the stop of MDI operation will start from Ehe cursor position which makes start, but not from the current cursor Dosltion.
Set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermedi.ate point is possible. ) Push "START" key or Cycle Start button on the operatorrs panel. By tiris action, the prepared program will start. When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed, the prepared prograrn will be automatically erased and the operation will endr. By command of M99, return to the head of the prepared program is performed.
d rif
-258-
5.2
i
?
r)
ry operation Select AUTO mode. Select execution program. Press cycle start button on the machine operatorts
pane1.
5.3
Afr er automatic operation is started, the following are executed: A one-block command is read from the specified program. (2) The block command is decoded. at The command execution is started. >< The command in the next block is read. (' Buffering is executed. That is, the cornmand is decoded to allow irnmediate
e
6
executi-on.
@ Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the nexE block can be started. This is because buffering has been executed. I{ereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the st.eps @ to
a;\ \v'
5.4
There are two means to stop the automatic operaLion. One is to command a stop command in a program where the exeeution is to be stopped (See 5.4.1 - 5.4.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate button on the operator's panel (See 5.4.4 and, 5.4.5).
Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all exlst.ing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by specifying an | NC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
5.4.1
Similarly to M00, cycle operat,ion is stopped af ter a block containing I"10 1 is executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operatorts panel is set to 0N.
5.4.3
l) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory. 2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.) 3) OnIy M30 The control is rewound to Ehe start of the program in memory operation. (This differs with the machine tool builder. Some machines indicate rewind with M02.)
-259&,
button on the operatorrs panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time. I Press the feed hold button.
Fecd hold lamp lighrs
I{hen pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cyc.le start lamp turns off.
Turns off
t()l
At i) ij-) iii)
5.4.5
Cycle start
Feeding stops if the tool is moving. Dwell execut.ion stops, if executing. l'1, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
this tine,
tF
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be rnade to the reseE state by using RESET key on the CRT/IDI panel or e*ternal reset signal. 5.5
Program Re-start
Reset
'i !i at
l!
il
fi
This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be re-started when a tool is 'broken down or when it is desired to re-start machining operation after a day off, and re-starts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used as a high-speed tape check function. I) When a tool is damaged (P tYPe): a) Press "Feed Hold" to escape the too1, and replace it with a new one. I'iodify the offset amount if it varies. b) Turn the program re-start switch on the machine operation panel 0N. c) Press t'PRGRI'I" to display the present program. d) Find -the program head. Press "RESET". , During memory bperation, select ttAUTOtt mode, and press o t. e) Press P "Sequence No." +, and search t.he block with Sequence No. to be re-starEed. When the same sequence No. appears many times, for examplet when the subprogram is accessed several times in searching Sequence No. in the subprogram, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequence No. in lower 4 digits as illustrated
below.
P.r
2 3 4 0 r 2
Frequency Sequence
No.
-260-
time, the upper 4 digits can be onitted. Furtherr the leading zero can be ornitted except Sequence No. when the frequency is specified. f) After completion of block search, the CRT screen is changed to the progran re-start screen.
FR@Ffi
GA IM1B RESTffiT cDESTtMTIfi) I'fls a1a 6tL @ gls @r9 gv 6 w u4 x L@.m 65wgnwffi Y Ln.w d7? @. w2 @. gLs z L@.@ A&.444 UA 955 ... A A.W (DlSTFr.tCE TO @) ..r r.. r.. 2 x L@.w 3 Y Lg3.@L r gLgL @. s w 4Z e,@. 8...." A.@ 1A
l"**l
**l
machining re-start posi-tion. The figure at the left side of the axis name shows the order (parameter settj-ng) described later when the tool moves to the re-start posit.iotr. M..... Shows M-code commanded recently 35 tirnes in the past. Shows M-code commanded recently 2 tiures in the past. T..... S ..... Shows S-code command in the last. B' . . . . . Shows B-code command in the 1ast. Display the most previously commanded code in the head. Each code is cleared with the program re-start command and the cycle stalt command in reset condi-
(DESTINATION) shows the position where the machining operation is re-started. (DISTANCE T0 G0) shows the distance between the current tool position and the
tions. g) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 c0) flickers. h) Check the screen, and if M, S, T or B code should be output, select the MDI rnode, and output M, S, T or B code from MDI. Each code in this case is not displayed on the program re-start screen. During memory operationr select "AUTO" mode, and check that the distance i) of (DISTANCE T0 GO) is correct, and that the tool does not hit against the work and others. If it is about to collide with an obstacle, move the tool manually to the location where it does not collide, then press '?Cyc1e Start" button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axis in the order set to the parameters (No. 0124 to OI27), thus re-starting machi.ning operation in succesWhen
2)
re-starting machining operation after the following cases (Q type) polrer is turned OFF once the emergency stop buEton is depressed once the coordinate system is changed after auEomatic operatj-on is previously stopped For example; I When G92 was set from MDI 2 When the coordinate system was shifted 3 When the automatic coordinate sysEem was set by the reference point return 4 When the coordinate system was nodified by "RESET". i) ii) iii)
When When When
sion.
/h
a)
is turned 0N or emergency stop is released, perform all necessary operati-ons at that time, including the reference point return. (See
b) Move the tool manually to the program starting point (machining start point), and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the same conditions as at the machining start. c) lf necessary, set and modify the offset amount. d) Turn the program re-start SW on the machine operation panel ON. e) Press "PRGRM" to display the program. hhen it is not the specified one, search the specified program. f ) Find the program head. Press t'RESETtt. Du::ing memory operation, select t'AUTOtt mode, and press o t. C) Press Q t'Sequence No.t' +, and search a block with Sequence No. to be re-started. When the same sequence No. appears many times, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequency No. in lower 4 digits. h) Upon completion of block searching, the display on the CRT screen is ^L^'.^^l cnangeo +^ tne program re-start screen. Eo i) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 G0) blinks. j) Check the screen, and select the MDI mode if there are M, S, T or B codes to be specified, and output M, S, T, or B codes from MDI. In this case, each code is not displayed on the program re-start screen. k) During memory operation, return the operation mode to ttAUTO" mode, check that the distance (DISTANCE TO GO) i-s correct, and thar the tool does not LjrL d6qrrlD rrI '^''r-^t a fork and others when moving to the machining re-start position. If it is likely to hit against an obstacle, move the tool manually to the position where it does not collide, then press the cycle start button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axj-s in the order preset to the parameters (No. 0124 to 0127). (Note l) Under the following conditions, the program re-starting of P type is not executed. i) l{hen no autornatic operation is performed after power ON. ii) When no automatic operation is performed after releasing the iii)
emergency stop. Lhen no automatic operation is performed after the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted (the external work zero point
{
* I l
*.
offset amount is changed). P/S alarm (No. 9l) for i), ii) above or after releasing P/S alarm (No. 94 ro 97) P/S alarm (No. 94) irtleen the coordinate system is set P/S alarm (No. 95) When the coordinate system is shifted P/S alarm (I{o. 96) When the coordinate system is changed The blocks to which the tool can be correctly returned by the P type program startup are those for which coordinate system is set and modified just before the machining operation is interrupted. (Note 2) When the tool moves to the machining restart position by one axis with type P or Q,lt is possible to stop the tool each at a single block ,after completion of single axis operation. However, it is imposiible to intervene IDI there. l'Ianua1 operation is possible there, but the already returned axis does nof move by the returning operation. (Nntp ?'\ , T)rrrinr -t ----..g searching operation, the tool will not return to a correct machining re-start position if the conditions of input signal and offset amount, etc. are made idential to those for machining. Even with the single block switch 0N, searching operation is continued.
-262-
(Note
4)
Lrrhen
(Noce 5)
(Note 6) (Note
7)
"Feed Hold" is applied during searching or when re-setting operation is performed during searching or after searching, re-start Ehe program re-start operation frorn the beginning However, after search completion, resetting operation in the MDI node is according to the parameter No. 045: CLER. When the program re-start SI^l is 0N, the cycle start is ignored. Perform manual operation with "Manual Absolutett ON before and after the machining. As a rule, the t.oo1 cannot be returned to a correct posit |on under the following conditions. i) When the tool is operated manually with "Manual Absolute" OFF. ii) when the tool is operared wich the machine ro6t and Z-axis
(Note 8) (Note 9)
(Note
10)
iii) When the mirror image is used. iv) When the coordinate system is noE set at the beginning of a program in the incremental mode. v) I,rhen manual operation is performed in the course of axis movement for returni-ng operati-on. Vi) When the machine lock is released after directing the program re-start under machine lock conditions. vii) When the program re-start is commanded for a block between the block for skip cutting and subsequent. absolute command b1ock. viii) When the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted after completion of searching operation. However, for (3) above, resetting operation is possible in P type for the ON-OFF switched blocks. At this time, maintain the mirror image signal in the same conditions as during inEerruption. rn any case, it should be noted that no alarm is produced. When no specified block is found, P/S alarro (No. 60) occurs. When a move conmand is given with MDI before axis movement afcer completion of seareh operation, P/S alarn (No. 99) is produced. "RSTR" flashes at the lowermosE part of the CRT. display screen until Ehe last axi-s completes returning after the program re-starE is commanded.
ignored.
(Note I l) When the 4th axis is a rotary axis, the reference point return direction is rr-rr, and G28, G30 or subsequent incremental couunand is given just before a block for which re-start is commanded, the absolute position of 4th axis may deviate 360 degrees. (Note l2) When an absolute pulse coder is provided, no operation for reference poi-nt return is requi-red when poTrer is turned ON or emergency stop is
released.
the following conditions. l) Mode Other than HANDLE and TEACH IN HANDLE mode. (Norrnal handle feed is done in JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode, if the manual pulse generator is effective. ) 2) Operating condition Operating conditions other than machine lock and interlock. 3) Handle interrupt axis selection signal Llhen Ehe handle interrupt axis selection signal (HIX, Y, Z) is turned on in the axis to which the handle incerrupc is attempEed. (The FANUC PMC is required for inputting this signat.)
-263-
The move amount by handle Interrupt is determined by the manual Pulse generator scale and the handle feed magnification (xl, xl0, x100). Since the interrupted move 1s not accelerated/decelerated, xl00 magnification is not selectable. The move amount per scale at xl magnification is 0.001 nur (mrn output) or 0.0001 inch (inch output). (Note) This move amount is 0.001 mrTr (nm input) or 0.0001 inch (inch input) in
manual handle feed.
This move amount is overlapped with the move amount by the automatic operation in the automatic operatj-on mode. 2) Relation with various signals The following table indicates the relation between various sienals and the movement by handle interrupt.
u r6.rdr
Relation
Machi-ne tool does turns on.
l-fachine lock
not
move when
this sisnal
Interlock Mirror
image
turns on.
Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction command, even if this signal turns on.
3)
Relation with various posirion display The following table shows the relation between various position disolav data and the movenent by handle interruDt.
Display
Relation
4) Display of move amount by handle lnterrupt If the handle interrupt function is provided, one page of position display screen is added, and the move amount by the handle interrupt is displaved on *t^ l, +L LrlE aLrI -^-^ PdEE. The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently on the handle interrupt move anount display page. a) Handle interrupt move amount in i-nput unit systeur (rNpur uNrr) b) Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system (OUTpUT UNIT) c) Position in relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
{
.r.
-264-
:5i
E 5 ?
(DISTANCE TO GO)
HANDLE INTERRUPTION
02000 N0150
(OUTPUT IJNIT)
(INPUT UNIT)
The handle interrupt move amount ls cleared r"rhen the low speed reference point return ends every axis.
l[hen the lnput unit and output unit are different from each other, the machlne coordinate value (MACHINE) does not always become 0 when the high-speed reference point return (G28) i-s executed on the axis in which the handle interrupt move amount is not 0. However, the reference polnt return end signal is output even ln such a case. (The devtation of the nachine coordinate value is maximum 2 pulses when the high-speed reference point return ends.) If the handle interrupt ls done during the reference polnt return, lt is possible that the reference point return end signal ls output, even if the nachine tool does not return to the correct reference point yet.
5.6.3
-265-
6. 6.1
TEST OPERATION
When
the switch is set to the MACHINE LOCK position, move conmand pulses are suppressed. Consequently, the position dlsplay is updated as specified by the program, but the tool does not move. This function is used to check a program.
OFF
DISPLAY LOCK MACHINE LOCK
(Note 1) When a G27, G28 or G30 command ls specified, the tool does not go to the reference point and the REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED does noE go on. (Note 2) The M, S, T and 2nd auxl-liary function (B) are executed.
6.2
When
the switch is set to 0N position, the axis does not move during manual/ automatlc operation.,r Position display updat.es as if the axis were moving.
SINGLE BLOCK
Lock
the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operatorts panel, M, S, T and B function operations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch. (Note) M00, Mol, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed, even if the switch is on.
-266-
6.4
Feedrate Override
With this dlal, it ls posslble to overri-de the feedrate designatdd by the program.
An override of 0 to l50Z can be applied. (Note 1) In some machines, thi.s switch is common to the jog feedrate switch.
6.5
The rapid traverse override switch of lO0"A, 502, 25il and, Fo is provided. When the rapid traverse rate is 10 n/min and this dial ls set to 50y", actual rate becomes 5 n/nin, t'Fo" is a constant value specified by the mnchine tool_ builder.
Thls function is available in the following movements. t) Rapid traverse by G00 2) Rapid traverse durlng canned cycle. 3) Rapld traverse in G27 and G28. 4) Manual rapld traverse. 5) Rapid traverse in manual reference point return.
6.6
Dry Run
If thls sv/irch is set to ON in the Cycle Operatlon, the feed rate specified the progran is ignored and becomes as follows:
OFF
by
Rapid traverse burton Rapid traverse button Rapid traverse button (Note
Prograu
ON/Opf'
Conrmand
Rapid traverse
0N
OFF
Cuttlng feed
I'Iax.
1) JOG
JOG
Rapid traverse
JOG
feed rate
feed rate
l) This
RDRN
speed can be ser to the rapid traverse rate by settlng paraneter No. 0001.
-267-
Single block
block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again.
One
(Note 1) For G28 and G30, the single block function is effective at an lntermediate point (Note 2) I! a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of O, @, and (0 shown below. When rhe single block function is eFfective a-points O or @, the feed hold lamp lights.
F------t!)
+?
(D
G)l
t
,A I'
/A
- .-
Rapid traverse
.'-..-..-..-------.-...* Feed
(Note 3) Single block stop is not performed in blocks conraining M98P_; M99; and G65. However, single block stop is even perforrned in a block with M9BP or M99 command, if the block contains an address other than O, Nir P.
-268-
7.
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
If
movement
you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operatorts panel, the rnaghins stops in a movement.
EMERGENCY STOP
This button ls locked when pressed. Although it varles wlth the machlne tool builder, the button can usuaily be unlocked b-y twisting Lt. (Note 1) EI"IERGENCY sroP interrupts the current to the motor. (Note 2) Causes cjf trouble must be removed before the button ls released. 7.2 Overtavel
When
the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the nachine tool linit switch' or when lt enters , the stored stroke linit inhlbltion area spectfled by the setting data or the program, an OVER TRAVEL ls dl.splayed and the tool slows down and stoPs. In this case, press the reset button to reset the alarrn after moving the tool to the 'safety directlon by manual operation. For detalls on operation, refer to the operatorfs manual of the machine tool bullder.
-269-
If an error code is displayed, refer to APPENDIX 9 "List of Error Codes" to check the cause of the error. If the error number ranges frorn 000 t'o 128, the error is related to the program or setEing data. Correct the program or the setting data. 2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT There are cases in which the system is executing some process and it seems like the machine operation is stopping. Refer to Maintenance Volume, Section 2.4 rrCNC slatus display". 3) Refer to Maintenance Volume, Chapter 2 "Troubleshootingrr.
-2lo-
$ ttt.tt '
9.
&
9.1 Preparation
The following preparatlon is necessary for the part program storage and edltlng
operation. l) Set the reader/puncher. 2) Set the data on reader/puncher. (See il.3) 3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY). Some system doesntt provide this key. 4) Set the operation mode to EDIT rnode. 5) Press the PROGRAM key and display the program.
g.2
Registering Program
to Memory
9.2.1
Registering with MDI key \ l) Select EDIT mode. \ 2) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 3) Key in address 0. 4) Key in the prograrn No. 5) Push the [-ttqsRT I key. With the above procedure, the program No. is registered to the memory. Thereafter, key in respective words of the program and press the [fnS-nT I key to register them.
f R\ \U)
2) Set the NC tape on the tape reader. 3) Push the PRGRM button. 4) lJhen there is no program No. on the NC tape or when the program No. is to be changed, input a program No. (This is unnecessary if there is a program No. on the tape and lt is not to be changed.) i) Key in address 0. ii) Key ln the program No. 5) Push l-Nut I key. 9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory
(B)
0222
M30;
n?1?1
Mn?. rrv4,
Proceed in the same \ray as registerlng the NC tape to the memory. Data is read up to ER, and many programs are registered. Program No. is set as follows: l) When the program No. is not set from MDI. a) The value of O (N of the first block when there is no O) ls set as the
program No. b) When a program having no 0 nor N appears on the NC tape, a value obtained by adding I to the previous program No. is set as the program No. 2) When the program No. is set from MDI before the NC tape is registered. The value of 0 on the tape is ignored, and the set value ls set as the program No. The subsequent program Nos. are set by sequentially adding l.
27r
9.4 Program
trrlhen
there are
.-
Program No.
is searched.
1) Method t a) Select EDIT or AUTO node. b) Push the PRGRIi button. c) X.ey in address 0. d) Key in the program No. to be searched. . CURSOR e) Push r---'button. ' l+l f) When searching is over, the program No.searctred is indicated at the right top of the CRT screen. 2) Method 2 a) Select EDIT or AUTO mode. b) Push the PRGRM button. c) Key in address O. button. If it is kept pushed in the EDIT mode, the regi-stered programs dre disglayed sequentially. (Note) After displaying all program Nos. registered, the display returns to the first one. 3) l,Iethod 3 a) Select AUTO inode. b) Reset the machi-ne. c) Set the signal for selecting the program No. on the machine si-de at 01 to 15. (For details, see the instruction manual of the machine tool builder. ) d) Push the cycle start button. The program No. (0001 to 0015) correspondlng to the signal on the machine side is searched, and automatic operation starts. (Note 1) The program No. is not searched when the signal on the machine side is d)
Push
CURSOR
1fr"
lnnl
on
the rnachine side is not registered in the memory. (Note 3) In the reset condition, the cycle operation larnp is off. instructi-on manual of the machine tool builder.)
zAr
(See the
\v/
t) Set the mode select swltch to EDIT. 2) Push the PRGRM button. 3) Key in the program number and push the I keyed in number will be deleted.
DELET
I button.
272
9.6
(9)
and
To delete
2) Press the PRGRM button. 3) Kev in address O. a) xey in I:1, lTl, [-tl, l-tl,
t'1
all programs registered in memory. l) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
Fl
and push
.gi
3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
;Punching a Program
To punch out a regi-stered program in the memory l) Make the Eape punch unit ready. 2) Set the punch code by setting parameter
Set the mode select switch to EDIT. Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. Key in O. Key in the program number. Push the l-ffiTl punched out.
be
ER
Program
t (z)
(Note 1) The space code for the TV check is automatically punched. (Note 2) Trro CRs are punched after LF in ISO code.
LF (Note
CR
CR
3) If the feed of 3 feet is too 1ong, push the TeAil button to stop ing feed holes nidway. (Note 4) pushing the I RESETI iutton stops punching.
punch-
3) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 4) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Key in the address 0.
27_1
6) Key in
and l-srARr
lbutton
spaces Program
I foot of
Program
rogram
rogram
I foot of spaces
(Note) The order of punehed programs is irregular.
9.9
Sequence Number Search finds a sequence number halfway in a program and it is usually used to start or restart the program at the block of that sequence number. A block or blocks skipped during the search does not influence the NC; the coordinate values, M, S, T or G code, etc. in skipped blocks do not change the coordlnate values and nodal values of the NC. So specify necessary M, S, T or G code, coordinate system setting, etc., in the first block at which the program is to be star$ed or restarted with the Sequence Number Search. The block searched for by sequence number search is usually at a break point in Ehe processlng. If it is desired to search and start a block during process, examine the condition of the nachine tool and NC and specify M, S, T and G code, coordinate system setting, etc. from the MDI as required.
ol1
11
02222 . ,. N4030
...
03333 ....
I,II'
\/")
Object sequence
number
Selected
program
number
1\
Sequence number search for a program in a) Set the mode select srvirch to AUTO. b) Push PRGR-II button.
menory
274
c) Select the program number to which the sequence number to be searched for
belongs.
to d) when the program contalns the sequence number; Otherwise, execute Program Number Search to select a program number to whlch the
Proceed
d) Key in N. e) Key 1n the sequence number to be searched for. . CURSOR .button. f) Push the 61 lYl g) The sequence number searched will be displayed top right on the
(Note
the search is completed.
1)
CRT when
Coordinate values and modal data are not altered during a search. Specify these data from the MDI after the search ends as requlred. (Note 2) During a search, the following items are checked. o Optional block Sktp ' P/S Alarm Check (Alarur No. 003 to 010) (Note 3) M98Pxx:o<(subprogram call) is not executed during a search. Searching for a sequence number within a subprogram called frou a currently selected program in AUTO mode generates alano No. 060.
01234
Subprograu
05678
M98 P5678
N8888
Turn on the protect k"y, execute the same operation as the registration of NC taPe lnto memory, and the reglstered progran and NC tape will be co1lated. 1) Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO). 2) Lock the protect key. 3) Load the program tape to be collated into the t.ape reader. 4) Push PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Push fINPUfl burron. 6) When the tape contalns several programs, collation ls performed rrntil ER (7") is encountered.
275
(Note I) A rnismatch during collation generates rhe alarm (p/s No. 79). (Note 2) If'the above operation is executed wi th the protect key released, the program will be registered into the memoryi the prograrn will not be co 1lated.
:.'
{
r
'1
j
+
:
9.11
:
,.1
This function is used to modify a program in memory. I) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 2) Push the pRGRM key. 3) Select a program. When it has been selected, proceed to (a); otherwise, perform a Program Number Search. 4) Search for the hrord to be modified. A scan or a word search can be used. 5) Modify, i-nsert, or delete the word. (Note 1) Words and editing unit A word includes an address and the number following it. But in user macros, the concept of a word is not clear. Consequently, "editing unit" is used. This is the object of modification and deletion in one operation. One scan causes the cursor to indicate the beginning of the editing unit. In insertion, data is inserted after the editing unlt. Definition of editing unit I) From one address to the next address exclusive. 2) The address is an alphabetic charaeter, IF, WI{ILE, GOTO, END DO, =, or; (EOB). According to this definition, a word is also one editing unit. The word referred to in the following explanation on editing should strictly dle termed the editing unit. (Note 2) It is not allowable to conEinue a program again after changing, inserting, or deleti-ng data to the program while temporari.ly suspending the machi-ning by single block stop, feed ho1e, etc. during the execution of the program, otherr,rise the program is not always executed correctly as specified by the program data being displayed on CRT after the continuance of rnachining. If it is desired to change memory data by parE program editing, change them under the reset condition, or perform a reset operation after editing without fail, before executing the program.
9.11.1 Word search 1) Word scan
CURSOR \ rusn tnef+ a) N I 'tcey
F
.* ?:
{ .L
11
$
E * a
*
:
t
Nl 234X1
00 . Ozl250
3 S I 2 ; N5 67 8M03
tr TTEE E
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor displayed below the address character of a selected word.
It:
276
. o) vusn cne
CURSOR
I-T_l
burron
N1234X100
. 0z L250;
S5
6;
N56 7BM0
=-J
'-1-
E tilEE
The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; trrie cursor is displayed below the address character of a selected word.
(Example)
Scanned here.
ffiB N123
t
r--l
c/
Keep pusnlng cne
CURSOR
EDIT
r-;t
key to make a continuous search. [Fl . PAGE d) Push the|-+_l key ro display the following page and search the first
. or the
CURSOR
f)
Keep pushing
o. ffi
-217 -
2)
Word search
forward
Nl 234Xi00
Currently searched word (word indicated by the cursor)
. 0ZI
a) Kev in address S. . b) Key an I H I ano f-t]l. IF .l .. (Note i) Keying in only SI does not execute a search for Sl2. (Note 2) Keying in 59 does not execute a search for S09. Key in S09 to search for S09. "0" of S09 cannot be omitted. n\ Prrchino k"y -!..." CURSOR 1---- starts the search. The cursor is displayed v,/ ! uolrrrr6 rh- -il" below S in SL2 at the end of the searctr.
Til
I
backward.
A specified address is searched for from the current position in the forward
for
addresses only
direction.
N1234XI 00. Oz 1250; s t 2; N567I M03 Current searched -word (word indicated by the cursor)
a) Key M03
to
be searched
for
in address M. Pushing 1ir" CPT9 key starts the search. The cursor is displayed below -l+l aE the end of the search. M . CURSOR If pushing the ;:-1" key, the search starts backward.
I 1 0'0
Head of program
0 0 0 I X L 2 . 3 4 3 Z I 5 . 6 7.; c 0 I X I 2
5;
*
(r
-218-
::
..{
't
a)
Merhod I
b) Method 2 c)
Press th" I ngSET I key when the EDIT mode is selected and E.he program screen is selected. f,he program will be displayed from its head after completing the heading.
Execute a Program Number Seareh. Method 3 Set a Pushthe mode select s\^rirch ro d Key the PRGRM keY. () in 0.
AUTO
or
EDIT.
Push the
ffi*
u"r.
( I ) \u/
T15
to be inserted
Nl 2 34xl
00 . O21250;
To be searched for
S1 2 ; N5 57 8M03
1)
2) Key
Search for or scan the word immediately before the insertion location in T (an address to be inserted.)
r:r
LJ-l'
4)
W Zlm
i
NL?5/.
N}1.
EDIT
Before Insertion
-279-
PRmRFf1 Wj
s12
;
0ffi8
N123
N1234 X1uB.6
Zrm Tl5
t'66'Ul
j@., z
ttt3
EDIT
After Insertion
By a push on "INPUT" k"y instead of ttINSRT" continuous words can be inserted according to the setting of parameter (No. 18, EDTB=1). However, finally, press ttrNSRTtt or t'EOBtt key.
(Example)
Key
Froo
Iroal'
cotxt23.
(Note) The last word qE a block can be inserted as follows: lTlt1 (instead tTtil Key in zt00 of 2100 [ rNSRr lt r.gj lrtlsnnrl. rhe resulr is l;6; | the same. ) /(d\ 9.11.3 Changinsaword ( \t \u/
)
N1234Xl
00 . Ozl 250T 15 ; S I 2
To be changed to Ml5
1) Search forlscan the word to be changed. 2) Key in the address to be changed. In the above exarirple, key in address 3) Key in data. ( [l )
M.
N123
4x I
00
. oz L 2 5OEJJ; s I 2 ;
Modified program
-280-
9.11.4 Deleting .
*rrd (
8) UI
I 5;
S
Nl 234X1 00 . 0zI250T
21250
I 2;
to be deleted
word
to be deleted.
a\ D)
Program
after deletion
23
4l
x I 0 0 . 0 z L 2 S 0 r I s M r 3 ;l s I Z ;
deleted
Pushing the I flR I and the I DELET I key deletes up to an EOB and causes rhe cursor l_"* I to move to below the address character of the next word.
e.11.6 Detetins arcars
ffi1
( 8 ) \u/
The area from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified sequence number is deleted. Current searched word (word indicared by the cursor) N2233 to be keyed in
I
I
N1234M10;M15xl0
0;
Tt2;N2233'S12;
Area to be deleted
1) Key in address N. 2) Key in, 2, 2.3, and 3 in this example. 3) Push the l-5ftEt I key. The program up ro the N2233 block is deleted. cursor moves to the address next Eo the deleted block.
The
281
P,n I
'j
i,)l
i'g.lZ \__
EDIT mode. When EOB is keyed in and ttren [-ttqSRtl key is pressed, the sum of the current sequence No. and Ehe incremental value (value set to SEQINC of parameter No.
I " it is possible to automatically insert a sequence No. to each block-when programming via the MDI keyboard in
0550) is automaticalty stored in the memorv. I) Set the setting parameter S-EQ to I.\
4\
z) >erecE. trIJrt mooe. 3) Push I PRGRM I key. 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in the initial value of N, e.g. 10. 6) r,-,sh [-JNsRtl key. 7) Insert each word of the dat.a in one bIock. lti-l 8) Key i" I l.i" l.
9
) Push [_]N$!J key. EOB is stored in the memory . In case 2 is set at the incremental value parameter, Nl2 is inserted to the next line and indicated.
PRmRFT'1 Wt NlBG92nYAnt
ul2
cEtulS
twrz
EDIT
(Note (Note
l) If
N12 is desired qgt lo be inserted in the next block in the example above, push tft" FELET-l key ro delet Nl2. If Nl00 is desired to be inserted to the next block instead of Nl2 in the example above, key in N100 and push fgf,fgRl key. Wirh rhis, Nl00 is registered, and the initial value is changed to 100.
9.13
Background Editing
This function permits background editing regardless of mode selection and CNC nnn.lirinnc (in automat.ic operatlon or not, etc.). No alarm which takes place during background editing affects foreground operation. Conversely, background editing is not'affected by an alarm in foreground.
-282-
key "BG-EDT't
PPO@fr1
B.i-EDIT
Ql,{=.
,-*.1;\[;"lf-_-][_-lE;;1
2) Specify a program to be edited. a) When generating a program: 01234 trNSERl-], f or example b) When edi ting th.e existing program: 3) Program edit
0L234
FiUT|]
[TER-fl, for
example
The program editing is' the same as with the foreground program editing operation. Graphic conversational programming can also be carried out in the same manner as with the foreground program editing operation.
BG-EDIT
W.t
AAAA2 NAZZA
Mg Y1g.
r'5 t'114 ;
rB T61S1
f'133
;
Y7AWXAY8, t@;
ADRS. NUTO
4) Background edit end It is necessary to save a program completely edited in background into the
foreground program
r3-d:END-l
memory.
':1i4::..j
5:
-1.
-283-
CNC taPe
Registration operation is the same as r^Iith the foreground editing operation method, but in this operation, the Program is registered to the background editing area. The background edit end is required to register the program into the foreground program qemory like the back ground editing operatj,on. t) l-01 TProg;mNolf INPUf-l or [-rNpurl : It is registered from CNC Tape. 2) [BG-ENp ]
9.13.3 CNC tape punch CNC tape is punched
in the same procedure as in the foreground operation. As function is concerned, it is possible to punch out a program belng far as this selected in foreground as we11. O E I Prosr"' No.l l-srenrl : The specified program is punched out. The whole program is punched out. [=;te3l l-sreRrl @
(Note
In background editing, it is possible to edit programs other than a program being selected in foreground. If an attempt is made to edlt a program being selected in foreground, BP/S alarm (140) occurs. On the contrary, if an attempt is made to select a program being edited in background, in foreground (program number search and program access by external signal), P/S alarms (059, 078) occur in foreground. (Note ,\ No program can be input/output by the external start signal (MINP) or by the I/O device external control during the background editing. (Note J) For the background alarm, a P/S alarm similar to one which is seen during foreground program editing occurs; however, "BP/S" is displayed on the data rinput line of the background edit screen in order to discriminate between background and foreground alarms. This alarm is reset, automatically by editing operation (some input
1)
(Note 4)
operation) . background editing is carried out, a vacant area (not used) may be present in the program memory. This area cannot be used as program memory as it is. Therefore, it is necessary to compress program memory in order to eliminate such a vacant area. This program memory compressing operation can be performed by a push on the soft k.y ttC0NDNS" or ttRESETt' on the foreground program direcEory screen. (Note 5) During background editing, all programs cannot be erased.
When Menu Programming
9.14
To assist programming in EDIT mode, the following menu is displayed on the CRT. 1) When G is keyed in, the G code menu is indicated on the lower half of the CRT s creen. 2) htren a G code selected from the menu in (t) is input, the standard format of the one block corresponding to the G code is indicated. For example, when G is keyed in after inserting N102, the G code menu dD shown below. is indicated on the CRT.
-284-
NPB
t
NWI38
Gffi : POSITiSIIi
FA2
G81 GA3
<O)
<O>
after G04 can be sequenrially indicared by pushing rhe lTl ot l-+l k"y. For example, when selecting G0l, key in 0 and l, and rhen prr"n rlrsnr-l I but ton. At this time, G01 is inserted to the memory as shown below, and the standard format of the G01 block is indicated on the CRT screen.
The G code menus
PRIERFI1 UI@ t N1BG92}Y8zlJt f@ GPB XLW. Y-9. fa6 861 ffitffi
t
l2B3
X(Z,Y)_ 4re.
@1
tl_ s_ T_
EDIT
Insertion of x
one
_ l-IffiTl,
Ir -I
l-NsnT-],
TltrnDl I
lvu
PRmRFr.l ffi7n Btn t N1BG92reYAZIjt FeA GA Xtn. Y-fi. t fBa Ga1 >@. Y-&. FW M ;
N48
12248
EDIT
-285-
'.)^'^'
..g.q.-Program Loading by TEACH lN Mode
HANDLE mode
,n" rEACH IN JOG mode and the rEACH IN If the prtyu."t-op;;;;;;;;l are added. In these modes, the machine position obtained by the manual operation is stored in the memory as a program position and a program can be created. The words other than X, Y and Z (O, N, G, R, I, J, K, F, H, II , S, T, P, Q, and EOB) can be stored in the memory in the same way as that conducted in the EDIT mode. l) Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 2) Move the machine co che required positi.on. 3) Push the PRGRM key. 4) Enter the address ,X.* 5) Push the [-rllsnf Lt ey,-F.r, the machine position along the X axis is stored in the rnemcif!. X10.521 Absolute position (for metric input) Xl052l Content stored in the program 6) Push ril I, I INSRT | [-E-lI and I fNSnf I tey, then the machine position along the |; |I IIi Y and Z axes is stored in the memory.
Note 1) After entering the address X, 'I or Z, enter a numerical value and push I INSRT I key, then the value entered is added to the machine position. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. Note 2) The coordinate value registered in this way will be an absolute coordinate value. Enter G90 (Absolute programming) at the beginning of the program. {r Note 3) The command to be entered before and after machine position shall be the same ' entered byregisteringoperation as that conducted in the EDIT mode before and after the machine position, respect.ively. f t tn Note 4) Insert the EOB ( l;6; | ), the block registration completes. Example) 01234 Ni G92 X Y Z ; ... Point P0 N2 c00 c96-x-v-; ... Point Pl N3 cOl Z_Fm; ... . . Point P2 N4 1402:
P0 0----{P
I I
t^
t
I
I I
rz
The program of the above examplezis stored in the following procedure. I) Set the setting parameter "SEQt'to I (For the incremental value parameter, t'It' is assumed. ) 2) Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 3) Make positioning at P0 by the manual pulse generator. 4) Push the PRGRI'I button. 5) Enter the address O, numeric value 1234, and push tftu l-fllSnfl t"y. Then the program number OI234 is stored in the memory 6) Enter the address N, numeric value l, and push the I INSRT I key. The sequence number I is stored in the memory as the initial value of the automatic insertion.
:l
i
'*
:#
ii
*
i
-286-
E
s
7) Enter the address G, numeric value 92, and push tn" Fllffl tey. Then the G92 is stored in the memory. 8) Enter the address X, and push tn" f-iGiill t"y. __lEnter the address y, l-rNSRTl, address Z and push rhe I l;l I u"r. Then the machine position at p0 is stored in rhe memoiyl9) After the step (8), the EOB is inserred and inpur of rhe block AL234 Nl G92 X Y Z ; completes. 10) ny ttre step (g), NZ is stored in the memory by the sequence number automatic insertion function. ll) Make positioning at Pl by rhe manual pulse generat.or. 12) Enter the address G, numeric value 00, IINSRTI k.y, addrels__lQr_ numeric ^ I rxsnt value 90, r--=:----------- I key, address X, ENSRI_I k"y, address Z, ana I i;i I in this
sequence so that the 2nd block N2 G00 G90 X
N3 is stored in the memory afrer srep (12). 14) Make positioni,ng at P2. 15) Enter the address G, numeric valg1Ol, I lusnEl k"y, address Z, I rtqsnr I tuy, -T1]]'l| address F, numeric value 300, l;i; I in this sequence so that the 3rd block llvul N3 G01 Z---F300; is stored in rhe uemory. 16) Then the N4 is stored in the memory. Enter address l'I, numerie 02 and to store the final block N4 M02; in the memory. With lhis, registration of the program example is .completed. The contents of the program can also be checked in the TEACH IN mode with the same operation as in the EDIT mode.
i3)
memory.
; is stored in the
lEUpl
x Y z
(AESO-UTE)
OLZU
rW
23.723
3.ffi -a.ffi
Are.
Tlt{D
-287-
9.16
9.16.1
l) Depress the PRGRM function button. The screen will be displayed shown as follows if the other program has not. been entered. If the other program has already been entered, the currentlY selected program will be displayed on the screen wi th the usual format.
PRGAI1 W IAM
S
EDIT
OT
Fis.9.16.1 (a)
2) After inputting address O and the program number of the newly registered program for entry, depress the EOB key. When desired to entry the program of program No. 10, forFinstance, depress the EOB key after inputting 0, 1, 0 by key operations. A new program is then entered. 3) L{.hen depressing the soft key "IAP" on the screen of Fig. 9.16.1 (a), G code menu shown as following in Fig. 9.f6.1 (b) is displayed on the screen.
wla vm
C1,J
PRIERFI1
Gffi :
GP1 : LINEAR IPI-. G@ : CIrctLtrR IPL. GA3 : CIRGIAR tPL. CO! B4 : U,ELL G16 : CFFSET \JALLE SETTII'G 61? : X/ Pt-$E G18 : Z< PLSE Gi9 : YZ PIAE PB : IFrchl @1 : I,ETRIC @11 : REF. POINT RETLRN CtEg< nm' EDIT
POSITIONING
<o) <0)
<C)
(b), input G code corresponds to the function 4) On the screen of Fig.9.I6.I one desires to program, by key operations. When desiring positioning, for instance, the G code menu shows G 00, so input G 00 by key operations. If functions desired for programming are not displayed on t.he screen, depress the Page Key I-+l and then allow to display the next G code menu. Repeat this operation ti11 the function desired for programming appears. If the function desired to program is not G code, leave it without key After Ehat, when depressing the soft key "I,IENU", a detailed screen of the G code inpuE by key operations is displayed. An example of the detailed -288operationb.
screen of G00 is shown in t.he following Fig. 9.16. I (c). When inputting anything by key operation, the detailed screen standard format is displayed. (See following Fig. e.16. i (d) )
PROGRFT'I
of
the
Gm : POSITIONIT
PRMRff
STCNMRD
FORT'IAT
WL 122ffi
t1
,'
(x, ,'
-GGGG XY
z
JI
HF R14 JK P8
1/ B/'
E.'-'-rlnn
EDIT
Fi9.9.16.1 (d)
(c) or (d), allow to travel 5) In the detailed screens of examples Fig.9.l6.i the cursor ti11 obtaining required data while depressing the cursor key. During this time, the address in the figure corresponding to data shown by Input numeric data by depressing numeral keys, the cursor will flicker. depress the INPUT key after completing to inputting one piece of data. Then, the inputting of one piece of data is completed. By repeating these operations, input all data required for the G code. (See following Fle.9.16.r (e))
PRIERNT GZI : POSITISIING WGGG x L@. Y z
H l1
J. B
WBLA
ISLA
54.
OFFSE
f NO.
>
7/
ull
E'B{,lnf-_.1
Fi9.9.16.1 (e)
b)
?\
With screen 9.16.1 (e), depress the INSERT key. Thenr orr block of data has (b) is registered in the program nemory. G code menu in Fig.9.16.I displayed on the screen, and another block of data is permitted to 'be entered, so repeat the operations from (4). After the registration of all programs is completed, depress the leftmost The programs that have been registered are then displayed on soft-key S] the screen, converted into the conventional format. Depress the RESET key to return the programs to the program head.
-289-
:,1?ff
9.16.2 Confirmation of
program
1) Depress the PRGRM function key. Search the program for which confirmation is desired by using the MDI key. (Depress the cursor key l-+l after inputting address 0 and the program number which you desire.) The program is displayed on the screen in the usual format. (See following Fig. 9.16.2 (a))
PROGRRh WLA t frtw eaa xraa. Yffi. tffi t"t?.2 ;
owlg tW
:
gI
EDIT
Fis.9.16.2
(a)
2)
After allowing the cursor to travel till the heading of the block for which confirmation is desired on the interactive conversation type screen, depress the soft key rrIAPrr, and then contents of its block are displayed by changing them onto the inte;:,active conversation type screen. (See following Fig. e.16.2 (b)) When contents of a block are displayed on the interactive conversarion type screen, eontents of its next block can be displayed on the interactive type screen by depressing the Page Key | * | (for instance) on the screen of Fig. 9.16.2 (b). Besides, by depressing the Page Key | + I as the same, contents of one block before can be also displayed on the int.eractive conversation type
screen.
F@r4 ffi : POSITIOTIING G G ffi-6 z
H 11 5,'
J/
wlg rwm
OFFSET
NO.
z'
<x,Y,z, .r'
B/
ull
Fis.9.16.2 (b)
9.16.3 Editing of
program
While displaying the contents of the one blockr s program on the interactive conversation type screen, their contents can be edited. Editing of the program with the usual format was executed by one word units, including basic insertion, replacement and deletion. On the oEher hand, on the interactive conversation type screen, they are all edited by one block uniE.
-290-
Replacement of block
Allow contents of the block desired to replace to be displayed interactive conversatj-on type screen. After allowing the cursor to traveI till the heading of the block one desires to replace on the usual format screen, this can be executed by depressing the soft keyttIAP"; or from the beginning, by depressing the soft key rrIAPrr and bringing up the display of the interactive conversation type screen, and then repeating to depress Page Keys l-t-l or Fl. When replacing data, except G code which will be a headline, input new data by depressing the INPUT key after allowing the cursor to travel to the data required by using the cursor key and inputting a numerical value by depressing the numerical keys on Ehe interactj-ve conversation type screen. When replacing the G code itself which becomes the headline, depress the soft k.y "G.MENU", then the G code menu is displayed. Accordingly, select the G code required and input its numerical value by operation keys. For instance, when replacement is required to t.he feedrate, the G code menu shows G0l, so input 0i by k"y operation. After that, when depressing the soft key "MENU", the detailed screen of G codes that are already input will Accordingly, refer to 9.16.1 (l) and input dara. When having completed the above replacing operations, depress the ALTER key. By this operation, one block of the program can be replaced just as it is. ,\ Insertion of Block Allow to display the block just before the section desired to insert a new block by using the Page Key on the interactive conversation type screen. On the usual format screen allow the cursor to travel till just before the section desired to insert a new block by using t.he Page Key or Cursor Key. After allowing to display the G code menu by depressing the soft key "c.MENU", refer to item 9.f6.l (4) and 9.16.1 (5), and inpur data of a new block. When completed the above inputt.ing operations for the data of one block, depress the INSERT key. By this operation, data of one block is inserted just as it is. ?) Deletion of a Block I A1low contents of the block for which deletion is desired to display. After that, by depressing the DELET key, contents of the block displayed in deleted from the program memory. On the screen, the contents of the next block is displayed with Ehe interactive conversation tyDe screen. 9.17
Number
aPPeare.
of Registered Programs
programs:
125 programs
Number
of registered
(Standard; 63 programs)
9.18
can
Lo / 20 / 40 / 80
I r20 / 320 n.
be seleeted
from
the
followine:
-29r-
9.19 Editing
1) Editing of custom macro B 2) I'lodification and insertion of numeric value only. (However, deletion
search cannot be made.) 3) Several words and blocks can be edited simultaneously. (However, the of characters edited should be within 32.) Note) Set the STDP of parameter No. 0014 to 0.
and
number
A program is edited when the program protection of EDIT mode has being cancelled in the same way as in normal editing. But the following points differ.
a) Shift key Press thettSHIFTttkey once to change the key i-nput cursor, which appears next to the key input data, from norm"t tt.tt tottntt. In this status, press the key with symbols or characters marked on the lower right corner of key top to a11ow those symbols and characters to be input. Input one character to a1low the key input cursor to return to normaltt<tt. Also, the key input cursor can ret.urn to the normal tt.tt by pressing the shift key again after pressing it once. b) Cancel key Press t.he eancel key I'CANrr once to delete one character in the key lnput If the key input cursor is shifted, namelytt<tt, one character is deleted and the shift status is cancelled at the same time. (The key input cursor returns to the normal tt.tt.) c) Deletion, changej-and insertion of prograrn When the custom macro which has already been input is editedr the cursor can be moved to the position where only t.he following characters and symbols are located: I) Address 2> // of top of left side of substitute statement 4) Top characters of IF, WHILE, GOTO, and DO One blank character is set before characters and symbols above on the CRT screen. A program is deleted, changed, and inserted with the area fron the above cursor position to Ehe position one character before the next cursor position being one unit.
Example: Position of cursor area.
3) /, (,=,
N00I xr-//100
?Ft = Noo+
Tzt
i-itz z+r : NOOS 7S = 1 +1 - /t10 ; rr itlT Ne 0l coror0 ; wHrLE ufz LE 5l DOl ; Ttzooo + +2) = +7 * To ;
+ rll
Itz=#2+I;
lnoT
-292-
within
;
parentheses.
ThE-cursor does not stop at these posidions. However, when the parentheses are not a pair, the cursor moves as
( XI00. Y100.)
following:
in
the
Cursor forward
LTo' jto9-tti"
- T---:f-
Note
nodifying rhe 2200 ia Xt00 z:200g using the 100,'ALTER" key, the XI00200 is obrained I{owever, there is no change in the following case; when insertion is made using the 100 ttINS'r key at the 2200 of X100 2200 ; , XL00 7200 f 001 resulrs. Never perform this procedures at the program number.
two
d) Abbreviation of words of custom macro B When the words of custom macro B are changed and inserted, the top characters or more can be used instead of the whole word.
Namely,
wD XO
c0 SQ BI R0 -
WH
TA AB FI EN AN
GO
AT
S] -
GOTO
SIN
Exaurple) Keying in WI{ [AB [/|2]LERO I#3ll is rhe same as rhar of WHILE [/lzl LE ROUND t#31 l. A1so, rhe program is indicared in rhis
IABS
e) Control out/in
Comments can be
Note l) The words of macro cannot be abbreviat,ed. However, do not input them by dividing them into two or more sectors since they rnay be converted. Note 2) The ttOtt, tt tt can also be input. Hotrever, cautions must be taken when inputting them by dividing thern into two or more sectors. Note 3) No period can be input af ter the rort and rtNrr even within the parent.heses ( ) .
f
-293-
10. 10.
Offset Amount
10,1.1 Setting and display of tool offset values (function t eyr lottretl)
Parameter IOF (No. 0001) selects absolute input and incremental lnput. I) Input of absolute offset value. a) Push [oFsgTl tey. (For the soft key, press the soft key lorrsEfll when the other screen is displayed.) b) Push a PAGE button to display the requlred page where the requlred offset number is given. W }'W FFSET Fn. mTA mTA ttr. ffi A-W LA.W _ffir Atg ta.effi w -L.ZzB a.w af. -n-w n3 g.em a.w atz w n.w 813 ffi A.W a.m a14 re 8.2ffi 6.m Bls w7 a-?ffi g.w aL6 m 0.828 MTLFI- POSITIO.{ (RELRTIL) x a.w Y s-m
l.O. Wl
s.w
=
I'IDI
Continuously
Movine the
Page.
push
the
CURSOR
key.
The
cursor will
move in seguence.
[Tl
CURSOR
l+l
Method Key in
and
offset
l-rNFilfl tey.
d) Input the offset value (input with decimal point is also possible) with the data input keys. e) rush [-tNPuT I key.- The offset value is input and indicated. (Exanple) I,"hen 15.4 is input for offset No. 25.
W |W FFSET h0. mTA mrA t'tr. g.w !5.M ar? Jffi m A.W 8.W a1B @7 A.m s-wB 619 @ a-m a.wB w @ 6.WB A.?n at a3a a.zffi 6.w @. a-m 431 a3 z.nB g.w 632. a-m w4 (RELATILE) rcTLH- PGITISI Y 8.w x s.w g.w z htr. m=
MDI
-294-
2) Input of incremental offset value Input an increase or decrease value of the offset value a) Shift the cursor to the position of the offset number to be changed. (Same as l)-c)) b) Input the incremental value (input with declmal point is al-so posslble) with the data input keys. c) Push t INPUT-I button. ih" ittcremental value is input, and the offset value corresponding to the sum of the incremental value and the current offset value is indicated. This value indicated is the new offset value. (Exarnple) Offset value currently set z 5.678 Value input (incremental value) :' 1.5 New off set value z 7.178 (= 5.678 + 1.5.t (Note) When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the neht offset value does not become effective immediately. It becomes effectlve after the H code specifying the offset No. corresponding to it is designated.
1O.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: lFFRAfvtl)
MDI.
MDI
STEP/HANDLE
2) Push
key.
3) Push
PAGE
@mt@B
-FEu( = 6 RELn/ A
(SETTII.G 1)
= TIIN = O IS[l = I
(6:EIA
lsu )
Ir.0{)
r.o. RE\x
4) Push a CURSOR key and move the cursor to the iten to be changed. 5) Input I or 0 according to the following description. a) REVX Setting X axis mirror image I : X axis mirror image 0N 0 : X axis mirror irnage OFF b) REVY Setting Y axis mirror image I : Y axis mirror irnage ON 0 : Y axis mirror irnage OFF
-295-
'
-}.'.\
-(Note) If X and Y axis mi.rror images become effective, the X and Y axis movement directi,on in AtlTO mode is opposed. However, the movement direction in manual operation or the movement { direction between the reference point and the intermediate point in auto- i'{{ matic reference point return are not opposed. i
-1
c)
TVON
d)
TV check when registering a program from a paper tape into a memory. 1 : Perform TV check 0 : No TV check rso Setting code, IS0 or EIA, when punching a program in the memory onto
nrnar l-tna
{
1
e)
f) L/o - Setting reader/puncher device for prograrn input/output with reader/puncher /' interf ace. Select a device of a channel I set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STEP2 (parametaer No. 0002) and BMTED (parameter N0. 0552) . Select a device of a channel 1 set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STP2 (parameter No. 0013) and BMTE1 (parameter No. 0553) . Select a device of a channel 2 set by parameGrs NFED, and STEP2 (paramet6,er No. 0050) and BRATE2 (parameter N0. 0250). SeIect a device of a channel 2 set by parameters NFED, and STEP2 (parameter No. 0051) and BMTE3 (parameter No. 0251). g) ABS c.-.l+nL'i-^ between absolute and incremental comrnands in MDI mode. owrLgrrarrS I : Absolute command 0 : Incremental command h) sEQ Qarrino eequence number insert.ion automatically when registering a program in the memory using the keys on the MDI panel. (See section III-14. ll for details) I : Perform automatic sequence number insertion. 0 : Does not perform aulomatic sequence number insertion. i) Setting the tape format of l0/il series conversion. I : Tape format is converted. 0 : Tape format is not converted. 6) Push I INPUT I key. Each paramerer is set and displayed.
-296-
control unit. In CNC control unit, the nachine movement is followed up as if move conmand r{ere com-anded. So, when the servo po\^rer is turned on, the uachine position and the NC coordinate system value match each other. So, by using this function, it is possible to move the machine by hand using the mechanical handle. For this function, PMC is required.
15.2 Follow-up
Signal *FLWU
DGN.
No.
0104 *FLWU
*FLWU
I
0
This signal becomes effective when the system is provided with the mechanical handle function (optlon) and PMC. When the circuits for signals SVFX - SVFZ are closed, the servo off (No current flows to servo motors) condition is set. Since the positioning control does not function under thiF condltion, an error is produced when the machine tool moves. For thls deflection arnount processlng, the following remedles are selectable according to whether the clrcuit for signal *FLWU i.s open or closed. o When the circuit for signal *FLWU is closed; No follow-up function is alive. The servo error amount ls recorded on the error counter. In this case, the machine tool moves to cancel this error when the circuit for servo-off slgnal has been reset to be open. o When the clrcuit for signal *FLWU is open;. The fo11ow-up function is a1lve The present posltlon of the control unlt is changed to reset the error counter to zero, assumlng that the command has been applied by the moving amount of In this case, the machine tool remalns devlated even after the circuit fot servo-off signal ls reset to be open. However, since the present position of the control unit changes ln correspondence to the rnachine tool position, the machine moves to the correct position when the absolute cormand is applied
next.
No
emergency stop
or servo alarm.
0
15.3
Input'Signal
DGN.
No.
0105
SVFZ
SVFY
SVFX
svFx, Y,
zo
XrYorZaxls X,YorZaxls
-330-
1) Depress the soft key lmFfl after depressing the function the following will be displayed on Ehe CRT screen.
key
GRAPH/AIIX
S
flJTO
BT
the automatic operation. Note 1) Since the graphic drawing is done when coordinate value is renewed during automatic oPeration, etc., it is necessary t.o start the program by automatic operation. When necessary to execute only drawing, '
Note 2) rn case the feed rate is high, drawing may not be executed correetly, decrease the speed by dry-running, etc. to execute drawing. Note 3) When the aut.omatic operation is started under reset condition, the program is executed after deleting the previous drawing automatically. Note 4) When necessary to display a part of the progran, search the display start block by the sequence No. search, and set the sequence No. of the end block to the PROGRAI'I STOP N of the graphic parameler before starting I the program under continuous operation mode.
mode.
-329-
1) AXES
2)
AXES=0Select(1) AXES = 1 Select (2). AXES = 2 Select (3). AXES = 3 Select (4). AXES = 4 SelecrJ5). AXES = 5 Select (6). The rotating angle (horizontal , vertical) for isometric di.spaly of 5 and 6 is fixed at 45" in both cases. RANGET (uax. (MrN.
xJ= l=
),
)(=
l=
Set the maximum value/ninimum value of graphic range desired to display the screen. o Setting range: 0 - +9999999 (unit: 0.001 nm or 0.0001 inch) In this case, the value of MAX needs to be greater than that of MIN. Set the graphic ruagnification 3) SCALE o 100000 (unit: 0'01 range: 0 - ioooo0 (unit: 0.01 tine) Setting
4) cRT
on
.ENTER
[= |= /,=
Set the coordinate value on the work coordinate system at graphic center. Llhen MAX and MIN of MNGE are set, the values will be set automatically once drawing is executed.
s)
PROGRAI"I STOP
.t
Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partially The value is cancelled automatically once drar.ring is executed.
dispaly.
6) AUTO ERASE
1. Erase .the oldest drawing automatically when the automatic operation is started under reset condition 0. Not erase automaticallv.
* -328-
Example
Gc (=30mmJ0mm)
Graphic origin
origh
ls given, the graphic point ls The tool path is shor.m with broken line for rapid feed
G92
of
moved
as
shown by the
cutting feed.
and
Various parameters need to be pre-set for plotting. These parameters can be set under any mode.
is depressed, Ehe parameter setting screen is displayed. In case the screen ls not displayed, depress the soft key the screen is displayed. I
GRTFHIC
PNRfl'ETER 92ffi2. NO',$ AXES 4 -ts (XY 4, YT- t, ZY=z, )C=3, )C/Z-:4, Z{y=S) R$GE ct'p<. ) x= 115@F rWS (NIN. ) RFI.GE )F AY= ab SCFLE K= n
GRFFHIC CENTER
X=
5?5m
PRTERFI1
fl.JTO
ERffiE F
P=
ST(P IF
Y=
mF8 g'
1
t'oI
oT
2) Depress the CURSOR [L [Tl t" move the cursor 3) After keying in the nun r-ir data, depress ttre
4)
to t,he desired posirion. by which the graphic lffil, parameter is set. Perform the above steps 2) and 3) repeatedly to set all graphic parameters.
-327 -
As shom in the example of the above flgure, the maximum drawing range will be the area of approx. 144 nrn (wldth) x 108 mn (length). In case the range to draw ls greater than the maxlmum drawing range, the drawlng magnification is used. The drawing ruagnificatl-on is 0.01 to 100.00 times, which is usually determined as follows; o Drawing rnagnificatLon = Drawing magnification (H), or drawing rnagnificatlons (V), whichever is smaller o Drawing magnification H (length on program to horlzontal dlrection axis) o Drawing magnification V = o/ = R/(length on program to vertical direction axis) c : 144 nrn B: 288mn The drawing magnification is always based on the center of screen. Gc: Center of screen
magnification
Program Gc
After magnification
In case the tool path will not exist near the center of screen, enlarging the screen will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the drawing range. To avoid such cases, the following four graphic parameters are prepared t (range: X MAX.) " RANGE x (MAx.) (range: X MIN.) " RANGE x (MIN. ) O MNGE Y (MAX. ( range : Y llAX. ) ) (range: Y IIIN. ) " MNGE Y (MIN. ) O RANGE z (MAX. ( range : Z I'{AX. ) ) (range: Z IIIN. ) " MNGE Z (MIN. ) With the above parameters, the center of screen (Gex, Gcz) can be calcuLated as follows; Gcx=X(MAX.)+X(MIN.) Gcz=Z(MAX.)+Z(MIN.) The value will be 0.001 rnm or 0.0001 in. depending upon the input unit. The graphic origin and graphic center point will not be changed even if the work coordinate origirr is changed. In other words, the work coordLnate origin is always consistent with the graphic origin.
-326-
14. GRAPHIC
14.1
FUNCTION
Drarruing Range
It is possible to draw the prograrmed tool path on the 9-inch cRT screen, which to check the progress of machining, while observing the path
rn addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen. Tool path drawing is possible on six coordinate sysEems.
The size
t
I
54 mm
72nm
?2 mm 54 mm
I I
-325-
Library screen
Software key
READ
Software key
DELETE
Software key
SRHFIL
Software key
RET
-324-
3) Delete
File
No.
FILE
Press the soft key "EXEC". Delete the file with File No. designated by FILE NO. After execution, subsequent files are shifted up one by one. 4) File search Press the soft. key "SRHFIL". The cursor indicates File No.
SEARCII
FILE NO. = I
NUM.
EDIT
First,
ttEXECrr.
the file
screen.
13.7.3 Other precautions t) "CAN + INPUT"
of FILE NO. and PROGRAI'{ NO. becomes blank. 2) The left-end soft key when the soft key is indicating "EXECt' is a return key, which returns to the display screen of screen fornat No. I or No. 2. 3) Shift the screen from the directory display screen to other screens, and press the function key "PROGRAM": a normal program screen is selected. 4) The device type shall be a floppy cassette. Set parameter channel 1to No.0.0038 (RSCI,ID = 0), DEVFL = 1). Set paramerer channel 2 ro No. 0.0038 (RSCMD2 = 0, DEVFL2 = l). 5) For the numeral input ln the data input area with FILE N0. AND PROGRAM NO. ' only lower 4 digits become valid. Example: l{hen file No. = L2345678 is entered, 5678 is an actual data as Flle 6) When an improper data is entered into FILE NO. AND PROGRAM N0., an alarm (P/S 71, P/S 86) is produced. -9999 and -9998 of FILE N0. becone invalid. 7) Program read . with KEY (edit protect) signal OFF corresponds to program 8) The parameter is input and output on the parameter screen in the same manner as usual. Ilowever, the output file naue is reglstered as 9) The offset is input and output on the offset screen in the same manner as usual. However, the output file name is registered as "OFFSETi'. l0) Enter 0 in FILE No. and PROGMM No. "1" is displayed. 1l) On the program screen (not exclusively for the floppy cassette), no program can be selected autonatlcally for punching, and the program is punched at At this time, the designated prograrn No. , the last of registered file. becomes a file name. (The file name for 0 to 9999 is registered as "ALL
PRGMM". )
''PARAMETER''.
No.
check.
-323-
(Example)
FLOPPY A
"READ". The cursor indicates FILE indicates File No. previously cued.
_FILE NO, = I
PROGMM
NO.
NO.
NO.
NI]M.
EDIT
2)
Deslgnate Filesl{o. to IIFILE NO. tt. Press the soft key "EXEC". At this time, input program No., program can be replaced and read. After execution, File No. is I up automatically. Output (Punch) Press the soft key "pUNCH". The cursor displays Program No.
PIJNCH
No.
NIJM.
_FILE NO. =
PROGRAM
NO.
EDIT
At this time, if no File No. is entered, punch a program at the last of the registered file rf F1le No. is entered, the program is punched at File No. designated. However, i-f File No. already in use is designated, subsequent files are deleted and .File Name is registered as ttFCA3". when all programs are punched in one fi1e, input -9gg9 to program No.
Input
Program
name.
-322-
(METER)
PARAl"lETER
t0.2
2.6 4.9
11.8 5.5
EDIT SRHFIL
5) In screen format No. I or No. 2, when other soft keys than depressed, the display is as shown in screen format No. 3.
Example: I{hen
"PROGR.M,t
are
"RLAD|'
is
depressed:
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
NO. i. 2. 3. 4. 5.
FILE
NAME
PARAMETER
OFFSET
ALL.
00002 00003 00004
OOOIO
PROGRAM
7.5
'
6. 7. 8. 9.
00020 00030
2.6 4.9 1r .8
5 PROGRAM
.5
C01
READ
NIIM.
_FILE NO.
=I
NO.
N0.
FILE
VOL.
NAME
(METER)
Indicates File No. Indicates the file name. The file capaclLy is converted to a paper tape for display. It can also be expressed in t'(FEET) ", using setting parameter (fnCU=t1. Indicates the status when the file has a multivolume.
321
Fig. 13.6.3
(b)
Display
input
and
The directory is displayed in the edit and background edit nodes. Following the display operation.,_ 1) Display a normal pfogram screen. 2) Press the soft key "FLOppy" or selector key "pRoGRAM" twice. 3) Screen format No. I is displayed. Screen format No. I
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
1S
NO.
FILE
NA},IE
(I,TETER) vol,.
0000r
N0001
-320-
il
for cassette Note 2) When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request the cassette but reset after replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, has been rePlaced.
13.5.2
The red and green lamps of the 1) Red laurp lights Writable: This larnp lights protect slide of 2) Green lanP lights Readable: This lanp lights 3) Red larnp flickers Write in progress 4) Green lamP flickers
cassette uPward
(RECORD
side).
5)
6)
Read or searching of file head in Progress Red and green lamps alternatety flicker cassette is not lnsert.ed, or cassett,e exchange request Red and green lamps concurrently flickers File deletion in Progress
is in progress.
alano
Note
The cassette is provided with a write-protect key in order to Protect data written in the cassette when data is input, when file deletion is performed, etc. I) Writable Slide the write-protect key Ln the direction indieated by the arrorr (see diagraro). Data can not be written in the cassette'
Fig. 13.6.3
(a)
r:
-319-
The following operation enabl-es offset data input from the cassette to the
1) Z) 3) 4)
Selecr the EDIT mode. Select the of f set screen by pressing I-brSET-l tey. Operate as same as program input operation. The input offset data will be displayed on the screen in the form of offset value input by prograrnming (GI0), after completion of input operation. R GIOP : 5) Select che ofGt data display screen and check that. the offset dara has been correctly set.
Thg following operation enables
CNC.
CNC.
CNC
l) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Press the. EMERGENCY STOP butron on the machine side. Select the paramerer screen by pressing l-pAffi.l t.y. Set the setting data P\^IE to 1. Alarm PSI0O is displayed ar rhis rime. Operate as same as program input operation. NC parameters are input to the memory for NC parameter by this operation. Normally, alarm PS000 will activate after completion of paramet.er reading. 6) Set the serring dara pWE to 0. 7) Turn on the NC power over again if alaru ps00o activates. 8) Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
2) Push I-PRGRI,I l. 3) Turn off the protect key r@\ ). \ lt 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in file No. I to 9999 to be deleted. 6) Push ttre l-sffiTl tey. With this operation, the k-th file input in (5) is deleted. Note I) After the k-rh file is deleted, file Nos. k+l to n change to Nos. k to n-I. Before deletion After deletion t to (k-r) I to (k-1)
(k+1) ro k ro (n-l ) Note 2) Deletion is possible only when the write protect key of the cassette is set to the upper posirion (RECORD side).
13.6
Precautions
can
be deleted as follows:
Deleted
13.6.1 Request for cassette replacement l^ihen one file has been entered
over two cassettes, the red and. green lamps on the adaptor fla'sh alternately on completion of data input/output between the first cassetce and the CNC, prornpting cassette replacement. In this case, take Ehe first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/output will continue autoroatical-Iy. Cassette replacement is pronpted when the second cassette is required during file search-out, data input/output between the CNC and the cassette, or fil-e deletion.
Note I) Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptorr oo special operation is required. The CNC will inrerrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserLed into the adaptor.
i
:{
-318-
The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette. i l) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Select the tool offset data display sereen by pressing OFSET key. 3) Press the START key. 4) Specify file search-out when required. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.3.3 CNC parameter output
The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette. I) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Specify file search-out when required. 3) Select the parameter display screen by PARAM key. 4) Press che START key. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
A program can be input fron the cassette to the CNC by operatlng as described ln "CNC tape input" after searching the file head in EDI'T or AUTO node as described
above.
1) Search the file head. ' Push Nl to N9999, N-9999.or N-9998 l--ffil t.y. 2) Push INPUT button again. (Data is input by this operation.) (When changing the program No. r push as follows.: f O-l r program No. +
button. ) (Note) If the above input operation is conducted by turning on the protect key r(d\. ( V ) the program in the memory is collated with that in the cassette '
INPUT
tr*"rpriiti;*r"."ring
(Operation I)
N2 [-rNPUr
second
(Operation 2)
N2
l-rNPUfl
l-iNP-uT-l
INFUT-I
... ...
Second Second
file
head searching
t-irFdf-l
N3
FN-FU-f-l
N-9998
file input
frNFur I
N-9999
l-rNPufll
[TN-mtl |_Txmtl
rTN'mrl
N4
| rNpur I ... Third file head searching [TFFU-T-] ... Third f ile input
t-lN-FTf] .. . Fourth f i1e head searching
ITTFI-fl]
| ?t\lDrrT I rrrr ur
I
I
N-eeee
t-ffi]
N-eeee l-lNFtrT-l
Ns
I rNPUfl
fTFmil ...
Quick
f rNPUr I
Slow
frNpur
Quick
-317-
Note I) when files exist in the cassette, designations of N0 NI the same effects. However, when the files do not exist and the resulr in in an ararm is indicated if Nt is designated (since there 1s cassette, no first file). When N0 is designated, an alarm is not indicated since the head is searched regardless of the existence of file. N0 head searching when writing the programs from the beginningconduct cassette of the "fil.". after cancelling a new cassette or a1r of the Note 2) An alarm is not in'uoediately indicated in the cNC unlt even "*i"ai'g an alarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or whenlike). the P/S alarm 86 is indicated when the inpui/output operation is performed arEer Enat. Note 3) The same result is obtained both by sequentially searching files by specifying Nos. Nl ro N9999 and by firsr searching one of the ro N999b Nl and then using rhe N_9999 searching nethod. The searching tj_me is shorter in the latter case. 13.3
Data Output Operation
The file next to that accessed just before is searched. d) N-9998 When N-9998 is designated, N-9999 in (c) is automatically inserted each time a file is input or output. This condition is reset by the designation of (a), (b) or (c) or reser.
c)
N-9999
Observe the follcwing procedure to output data from the CNC to the cassette.
13.3.1 CNC program
output F A program can be output frorn the cNC Eo the cassette by the folrowing operation. 1) Output of one program . o + program No. + [-srenFl tey 2) Output of all programs o + _e999 * l-stenFl ruy lfith this operation, the program is output as the. new file after existing in the cassette. A new cassette or a cassette in which old the files files are made invalid and new files are to be written from the beginning, use the above output operation after the N0 head searching.
Note Note
Note
Note
Note
r) when P/s alarm 86 occurs during program output, the cassette i,s restored to the condition before the outpuc. 2\ when program output is conducted after NI to N9999 head searching, new f_ile is output as the designated n-th position. rn this case, the r to n-1 files are effective, but the files the old n-th one are deleted. rf an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n-I files "rt", are restored. 3) The cassette is provided with the wrj.te protect slide. the slide to the upper position (RECORD side) and inserr the cassetteset rhe adaprer. ro rn thie condition, make sure that the red lamp lights. Then, start output operation. 4) Head searching with the file No. is necessary when the file output from the cNC to the cassette is again input to ir," cNC memory or conpared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, irnme4i3g"1, after the file is output from the CNC to the cassette, record the file No. on the memo sheet of the cassette. 5) To efficiently use the memory in the cassette, output setting parameter NFED of parameter No. 0002 or 0012 to 1.the program by
.a
-316-
..1r"r,
13.
13.1
The
unlt of data, which ls lnput/output between the cassette and the CNC by one input/output operation (pressing the l-REID-l or l-?ffiettl k"y), is called a ttf iletr. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette, for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file. Files are assigned file numbers I,2,3r4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
Flle I
One Cas-
File
File
File n I
Blan]c
flle can also be written over two cassettes as folLows: File I File
2
sette I
Cas-
File
File(k-1) I File n I
FrLE k
sette
Onee
ntinuation of file k
File (k+l )
Blank
file numbers. This correspondence cannot be data contents and file numbers are outPut to the CNC and verified, unless the displayed. Therefore, wtren,writing data Ln the cassette, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo column.
ence between the data contents and
can subsequently
Offset data
NC
progran
00100
the program is input from the cassette, the file to be input first nust
be
searched.
2) Push l-Pnffil t"y. 3) Key in address N. 4) Kev in the file No. 5) Push ttre l-rllPur I tey.
a)
N0
The beginning of the cassette is searched. b) One of NI to N9999 of rhe file Nos. I to 9999, the designated flle is searched.
-3r5-
12. DATA
OUTPUT
2) Setfing the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press OFFSET key. 5) Press START key. 6) Offset values are started to be output and OUTPTTT is displayed during output ting . 7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of remaining offset data cannot be started.
12.2
Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the parameter tape format. 1) Setting the data ousput interface Set the data output interface in the parameter. Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casserte, or ASR33/43.
2) Setting the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press PARAM. 5) Press START key. 6) Parameters are started to be output and "OUTPUT" is displayed during out7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of rernaining parameters cannot started.
Put t ing
.
be
-314-
11.9 Clock Time is displayed on the status indication line (line l5) setting I screen.
PARA]"IETER
and
thg parameter
00001
N000i
(SETTING
I)
= REVY = TVON =
REVX
0 0 0
1:rSO)
1:INCH)
1:ABS)
Correction of time can be urade on the parameter setting I screen. llove the cursor to the itern'to be corrected, enter correct time, and then press the rrrNPUT" key. However no time is set if a negative value is entered or the maximun value ln each item is exceeded.
Item
Year I'1onth
Day
Maximum
99
L2 31 23 59 59
value
Time
Minute
Second
Note) The time at the status indication line (1ine l5th) is not displayed rhe "NOT READY'I is displayed.
when
313
HOLE PATTERN
An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. BOLT HOLE Pattern name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters. The machine tool builder should program character strings of menu title and pattern name by custom macro, and load thern into the program memory. Enter the desired pattern number by keying operation. r--] -;l: I TJIINPUT l, for example
Menu
title
2) Pattern data display When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are di.splayed.
UAR.
: BOLT HOLE M1@ t&glz NO. ].|ANE DNTA COHHENT Tma _5S8 541 KIJUN X E .BoLT HOI-E SAzKIJUNY A CIRCLE* 543 RNDILIS 8 SET PRTTERN 544 S. ANGL B DATA TO UAR. 5Z5r{_E. No a ND.5AA_5A5.
a 5A? a ACTUq- POSIT IOI.I (RELRTITE)
566
@.w S gT
I
I1D
BOLT HOLE
TOOL
....
Pattern data title An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. Variable name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters.
Corment statement An optional charaeter string conment can be displayed
up to 12 characters/line, g lines. The machine tool builder should program the character strings of variable name and comment statement by custom macro, and load thern inlo the prograrn
memory.
Enter necessary pattern data value. set the, cursor to a desired variable by
udLd
cuRSoR
vdruE.
tf
After inputting all pattern data, select the AUTo mode, and depress the cycle start key, and the desired machining can be done.
example
-3L2-
,i*Ffi;i
b)
Usage
When
parts and the number of nachined parts ar Therefore, create the program so that t
the _proce
xs
the
command
of
M02
or
1,130
is
executed, the re
machined
ar -eJ eggg e- 4-*-eJeJJ- !-lne i"_9!_ ot. -par_t.-iE Furthermore, even if the M code set to Ehe pararneter ry count.ing is made in the sinilar manner. Also, it is possiJrle- to-*itle counting even if the M02 or M30 is executed
number of marc.--h1_-ed parts reaches the number of required parts' signal is output to the PMC. However, when the number of require-d. paEts is ttOtt (inf init{ maximum), no outPutismade.Fordetai1s,Sachinetoo1builders.
Alarm Display (Function t<ey.
11.7
IEAF'M])
ALARM
When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displdyed at bottom, pressing the button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below. See APPENDIX 9 for the meaning of the alarm number.
CL.RI,I
WEB IWB
+X
+Z
Note) When an alarm occurs the alarm message is usually automatically displayed. 11.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Display
l) Pattern menu display a) Select an offset or custom macro variable cRT by depressin,
Et#rlo.r.
b)
Depres"
key again.
I.E}{.J
: HX-E PNTTERN
Ot@ NIWB
S
MDI
gT
311
I
PART COUNT
:
RUN TIME
CYCLE
TIME
Indicates the number of parts. I^Ihen M02 or M30 is executed, it is increased by +I. To preset the PART COUNT to "0", press P and CAN key. Indicates the total run time during automatic operation' excluding the stop and feed hold time. To preset the RUN TIME to "0", press R and CAN key. (It is not preset Lo "0" by cutting off power. ) Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is automatically preset to ttOrr when a cycle sEart is performed at reset state. (It is preset to "0" by cuEting off power.)
1.6.2
PrnflIER
(SETTIhG 2) -RElr4 = A TNPEF=
(m1 h@
pt = 1 (O:DISAH 1:ElRHl) g
PffiT
I TgTfl- = A 15 PART CIII.IT = 1Ht6r,l cYol Tll anlgtE!; Ftl.t rric fO. RE\4 = FDI 29:3:l:43
Pffif FFT|JIROE
lPffi*4
llFGll
ll
ll
a) Display contents and setting l) PART TOTAL (tota1 number of machined parts) It is incremented by one when the M code specified by M02, M30 or parameter fnO. --7T-91. i.s. commanded. The setling cannot be made on this screen. On-FTetting of parameter :(\0: !ll2)'can be made. PART REQUIRED (number of parts required)2) It is used for setting the number of machined parts required. When the trOrr is set to it, there i-s no lirnitation to the number of parts. A1so, its setting can be made by the parameter FO:lqC] 3) PART COUNT (number of machined parts) It is incremented by one along with the total number of machined parts. 4) RllN TIME (operation time) The operation time added during automatic operation is displayed. 5) CYCLE TIME (cutting tine) The run time during one automatic operation is displayed.
Note 1) Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of ttMtt andttStt of run time is valid from 0 to 59. Note 2) Even if a negative value is set to the parameter nunber 0779 of the total number of machined parts, a positive value can be displayed. Do not set a negative value since the value is decremented by one when
counted.
-310-
iv) Actual rate display The actual feedrate per ninute of machine can be displayed on the current display screen and program check screen by setting the parameter (No. 0028
DACTF).
Fact
i=I
r (fi)z
where,
n fi
: Number of axes : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axls or rapid traverse rate Fact: Display speed
The display unit: mm/urin (Input in units of mn).
inch/rnin (Input in units of inch. However' t\^to places below the decimal point are displayed.)
In the case of per revolution feed and thread cutting, the dtsplay speed is displayed by the speed per minute rather than that per revolution. Note 2) In the case of shift of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the shift speed of rotary axis is 50 deg/rnin, the following is displayed: 0.50 INCtiiM Note 3) Display is made only during automatic operation on the program cheek
Note 1)
screen.
When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are
'
o2@@@ NA19A
x Y z
-1,2.5@A -42.5@@
@.@@@
RrN
t;_ll-.*lr*Jfun
-309-
ii) In the relatlve coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft
key I REfl. )
a@@@L
x Y z
224.359 285.449
1H1$1 Crc-E
L9@.299
PRT qINT
l'lDI
N@A@@
R.H
llv'tl
The relative position is displayed in which the position reset by operaEor is zero.
an
ffi;
lii) '
thG-G-Aisplayed, prss the l-Xl, l-Fl or l-ilI tcey. The address on the display witl flicker. Then press the l-Tffi-l key. The relative position of the flickering address will be reset to zero.
Overall display
simultaneously:
(It can be displyed by pressing soft key lTi,L-].) The current position in the following coordinate system is displayed (a) Position in the relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) (b) Position in the work coordinate system (ABSOLUTE) (c) Position in the machine coordinate system (MACHINE) (d) Residual movement amount (DISTANCE T0 G0)
trruf_ P(FITtg{
x &.*156 Y G.
z
(REIJTII)
X E_641 Y W.Tn 7 1g,.5E,62 PRT CCI.|.|T 15 R_N TIt ltAl CYCLE TIl Or 61455 FCT. F t@ rwtl 21:35: S llDI
x &.* Y
(DlsTF}G
(SEILIJTE)
tE61
r.@
S. 156 Z 4r.97
TO Gn)
ll
ll
The residual movement amount lndicates the uovenent amount remalning in one block of a conrnand, and is displayed ln AUTO or MDI mode. The unit of the machine coordinate system is the saue as that of Ehe -achine system.
-308-
W2 IW, CHECK Wt ira egz ><B Y8 F8 , t@ w xLffi. YLa. t t{fi @l Z16. FL6.5 t (G) (PFSA-UTE) (DIST TO GO) 6.@A W VA 6? '/, -ts.na x a.w GL? g9 Gg '( -5.%6 Y a.qaa G% w 64 z -15.n4 z A.AW G94 GS A -a.sw A GzL t=Jg trPHS ttr657 P o
PRMRFfl
RDRS.
f,JTO
f*l
The data is displayed only in |'AUTO" mode. For the display of a Page of block being executed withi.n the memory, the block being executed is displayed at the
top. The position (ABSOLUTE) in the work coordinate system or relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) and remaining movement (DIST T0 G0) are displayed.
11.5 Current Position Display (Function key. lilSl)
(2) Push a PAGE key. Data will be displayed in one of the following three ways. i) In the work coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-AEil.)
rruH.
PCSITI(N CNF(IUTE)
o@@@1,
x Y
z
RrN
27I.58?
*"-
339.483
I"*ll
displayed.
6 PrRT CofiT TtrG 1Ht3,| Crc-E TIt An il'ets ACT.F ten l'nfl llDI 2g:15:B
ll*ll-lt-l
-307-
r
I
111)
Command
il
values entered fron the MDI or nodal values prevlously speclfied are displayed. (It can be dlsplayed by pressing soft key llmt l.l
PR$RFr'r 0'1D I ) x Y . (]2m
(ttrDnt_)
M138
La'fl2 M.ffi \
G@R
G1?
GgB G21
F
P
O
&B
2
15
GgtH
N
fi
Are.
iiil
. BlaS G49 T
GM
Gga
w.
6?
I'IDI
Hii
il
lv) one page includLng a block currently executed in the p 1ayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-FRGRM l. )
PRfERtr,I W: \t<9
N1@ G32
N11A G!f1
program
ls dls-
TPM tg138
\g m. t VB Y-'78. : t Nlz Z-n. N13a G1? 4L GaL X1?.5 l FnzB t N74Z U2 G39 l-l?.s :
N1s6 Br1 GA3 X-1?.5 Yi.?.s R1?.5 ; N16A G81 X-?F. t
Nr? GzP
N18[| G61
N1*t
BErt
YEt ;
Are.
flJm
Program Check
The program check screen is displayed by pushing the CHECK soft key. The display includes the page for a program block in memory being displayed at present, th'd present positi-on, and modal value previously conuranded.
-306-
[FR-GF-M)
i) Push tt'e I-FIcnt't] tey. 2) Push a PAGE button. Data will be displayed in the following four'ways. (Each screen can be selected by soft keys.) i) Cornrnand values being executed, and modal values previously specified are
displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing sofr t.y l-cunnrlrl.)
(l'nDfl-)
GA1
tP@ l130 m
2
uL
G8A Bf
SEl
s6?
AJTO
11) Cornrnand values being executed or to be executed next are displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft tey I nnxrl.;
(FEfi)
G3Er
tP@
I.813B
-t?.VB
BA
l'-*''11""...-l[_*;lnn
Ef
RUTO
-305-
a) b)
PRoGRAM
NO.
USED
C)
PROGMM
LIBMRY LIST
The number of programs which can be registered additionally. The capacity of the program memory .in which data is registered (indicated by the number of characters). The capacity of the program memory which can be used additionally (indicated by the number of characters) .. Program Nos. registered are indicated.
subprograms)
Also, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting the parameter No. 0040 (NAMPR). 0n the program name display screenr. the program number and program name are displayed.
0615
00010
01
N0001
55 37 44
I !
00001 00002
LIBMRY LIST
(MACRO-GCODE. I'lArN)
or000
ADRS.
EDIT
Note l) Always register a program name beEween the control out and control in codes irnmediatelv after the program nunber.
oDfrl
(aaaa. -__I
to 31 characters.)
Note 2) Note 3)
Up to 3l
characters can be used for naming a program within the parentheses. If 31 characters are exceeded, the exceeded characters are no! displayed. Only program nuurber is displayed for the program without any program
name.
-304-
11.
DISPLAY
Program Display and
11.1
sequence number
seen
PRMRtrI
@;
N1@ G92 \i<9 N116
Yg Zn. t m1 6n Y-79. , lll?fj Z-',n. t N138 Gl? BI1 GB1 X1.?.s IJaP. FAEB ' Nr4E H2 Gi39 I-1?.5 ; N158 Bl1 m3 X-1?.5 Y1?.5 R1?.5 ; N16g GA1 X-8. t N1'7g GEP }u7.5 Y27.5 p7.5 , N1E[| GA1 X-15. ; N1*t G@ ru YA t
ADRS.
IIJTO
the program ls being edlted tn EDIT mode, the program No. being edited and the sequence number just prior to the cursor are indicated. In case other than program edit, the program No. and the sequence No. executed last are indicated. Or, lnnnediately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the program No. .and the sequence No. searched are indlcated.
11.2 Displaying Program Memory
Used
Proceed as follows:
I ) Select EDIT rnode. 2) Push the PRGRM button. (For sof t key, press scf t tey [TnCml l. ) 3) Kev in address P.
4)
p"strlrllpurlbutton.
Or re-push the
PRGRM
PRGRtr'I
(]2@ l.o1$ WB _ 6L : S I FREE : 36 FREE 2 37TO I'E}.FV ARSR IJSED : PRTER*I LIMFff LIST EEBI WzB CEEEB VE$) BtN OT& u9@. wB3
S/STE}I EDITI$I PRmRfl1 l.O. LEED
EDIT
-303-
#
6)
Shift the cursor to the offset number position in the l-6-1 rhe of f ser value
rrNpur r played as an offset value.
same
r---T,1
way as in setting
".,0
7) Depress
;",' ;'J:l#
::ij.
JJj
::r"ffi..:Jr:r|,*+1":n,,.
o,"-
Reference
tool
This difference is set
as an offset value.
I
I
I
I
Fixing point
(Note)
rf
.:
,t
!t
-302-
CPERITO?'S
FFIL OLW IW3B SKIP : IOFF El.l -B-OA< B-OCK : Sltg-E FF l0.l lGCtlll LOO( : IFF S{ : IFF S{ DRI Rtfi PROTECT KEY : TPROTECT RELEffiE : IOFF til FEED F0-D
MTLNL
x z
P6ITIO{
g.w g.w
(ABSO-UTE)
g.w
6T
t"-"".lffi--il_-1l---1n
c) Push
d)
the desired condition. 2) Jog feed operation a) Push the key to display the screen of the software operatorrs
b) Select JOG node c)
[Tl or fTl key, and march rhe cursor ro the position of the desired Push l-Fl or [Tl key to march the mark ! ro an arbitrary positlon and set
switch.
panel.
Jog feed can be performed by pushing the desired arrow key. Jog rapid tr.averse can be conducted by pushing the key together with the arrow key.
Note l) When the CRT indicates other than the software operatorrs panel screen, jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed. Note 2) The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (paramerer Nos. 0f30 to 0135). 3) General-purpose switches Eight optionally definable switches are added as an extended function of che software operatorts panel. The name of these switches can be set by parameters as characEer strings of max. 8 charact.ers. For the meani.ngs of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
I/
/ 10.8 Tool Length Measurement --l:I Setect a reference tool, and attach the reference tool to the rnachine fixing point (or fixing point on the workpiece) manually. 2) Display the relative coordinate positlons by depressing l-pOS I and PAGE keys. tAl 3) Preset the Z-axis relative coordinate value- to a.by depressing |)L |ana -zero a,t.,t.1 |
4) Select an offset
l-aAN
same fixing point manually. A difference between the reference tool and the tool to be measured is displayed as the relative coordinate va1ue. (This is also displayed on Lhe offset page)
-301-
Data
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. rf it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
key
A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of parE program input and editing. For where the kev is mounted, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
1O.7 Software Operator's Panel
I^lith this function, functions of the switches on the machine operatorrs panel can be conducred from the CRT/MDI pane1. The following can be conducted via the CRT/MDI panel. a) Group I : Mode select.ion b) Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapid traverse c) Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse g"o"irtor feed axis, selecgion of manual pulse magnification xl, xlO, xl00 d) Group 4 : Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override e) Group 5 : optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock, dry run f) Group 6 : Protect key g) Group 7 : Feed hofd Whether to operate from CRT or uachine operator's panel can be determined bv the parameter OPGI to OpGT (No. 017) for each group. I) Setting of mode selection, etc. t-- EE-r a) Push | ALARM | .."::t-1. I.
b) ry"n ffi "I1a key to display rhe necessary page (rr can be disptayed by pressing soft t"v ftpft-l]l
Pfl\FL 01@ tt&I3A ; IF1DI FUTO EDIT t+{U_ JG ZRN _IODE FFNq-E RXIS : IFrX I{Y IZ. f-FND-E FllT. : l*1 'L@ RnPID O,RD. I ate2Y. gz 'f@ n4, FA Jm FEED : 5cE1 tt'l,,t'ltN Err FEED O.RD. : fff-r...... ACTI-H- PGITIS.| CNBSS-UTE) g.w x Y 9.@
UcEqqTO?'S
i
I
'
a.w
g1
t"tDI
-300-
in a__p.ereqgter value by data input keys. Depress lT?u-il. The paramerer value is input and displayed. s) h) After all parameters have been set and confirmed, turn to
f)
Key
?)
the setting screen, and return the PWE setting to i i) Depress the RESET key ro release the alarm condition. When alarm No. 000 has occurred, turn off the power supply and t,hen t.urn it on, otherwise Ehe alarm is not released. Setting of parameters using a tape This method is effect.ive only when the reader/puncher i.nterface option is combined. Parameters can be input from the tape reader or teletypewriter
ASR33/43.
L N
7o
L
F
L N F
(e)
L
F
Vo
(a) N
I
(b)
L
F
\+
(c)
(d)
a) Punch 7" (ia case of ISO code) or ER or CR (in case of LF of EIA code) at the start of the tape. b) Punch the data number following address N next to the end of block code (lf i.n ISO code or CR in EIA code) . c) Punch Ehe data to be set after address P. Punched data at the address should correspond to the parameter number punched at address N. d) Punch the end of block code. Continue steps b), c), d), as required. A data number following address N must be punched at the start of each block. Leading zeros of parameter data following P are omittable. F (in case of rso code) cR or t )--f) Punch LF and Z input from the tape orfinished ER (in case of ErA code) finally. Data with'the input of these is t codes. E t Parameters not speclfied on the tape renain unchanged even if the parameter setting tape is input The Parameter setting tape prepared by the above procedure can be input f according to the following proeedure. i) Ser PWE = I (CRT/MDI lanet). ii) Select EDIT mode on operator's panel. iii) Select PARAI'I on CRT/MDI panel. iv) Turn on INPUT button on CRT/MDI panel. v) SeE PWE = 0 (CRT/MDI panel). vi) Turn on RESET key on CRT/I'{DI panel. (Turn on and off the pov/er of CNC, if alarm number 000 occurred.)
(rf
?.
Note l) The tape stops traveling when any of the following alarus ls detected. i) TH or TV (with TV check rurned on) is in pariry error. ii) An address other than N and P was input. iii) An N or a P value is disallowable. Note Ll Depress RESET k"y, if iE is desired to stop setting from the tape halfway. Note 3) A part of parameters doesnrt become effective unless power supply is turned off (when alarm No. 000 occurred). Note 4) Parameters related to the reader/puncher interface must be set from MDI, etc. before inputting paramet.ers from the tape.
-299-
1) Setting of parameters by using buttons on CRT/MDI panel paqE-l . a) Press I LEGI n"r. display setting parameter Press page key to page. (Ir can be displayed by pressing sofr key fSETmil.)
PFRtrTER
(SETTI}S 2)
IWB
m.
PlEi
TT-] _ Press cursor button and set the cursor ro PI^IE. Key in I j f l rurut l, and i n t-parameter is able to be written. NC is placed to P/S alaru No. 100 con-
dition.
b) Select tp_MD.lnFde (or ser rhe emdrgency stop condition). c) Depress I PaneU I key ro display parameters on the CRT screen. d) Depress the page key to display a desired parameter Daqe. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key lTExr l.l '
I
PARFTTM f0. mTF _mt wtffi w. wffit @3 Wt w ww7 w6 w^r ffiwr@t6w w7 wwffi! w@w@raw wE w @74 Wtn
I'O. @11
=
W IefEN hn. mTA e6tl w taIz w @13 W @74 W @ts w eftt1 11111111 e3L9 W @ @
MDI
| il IPRR4
e)
r-----l lloaruos ll u
--_-.|
Method I
CURSOR
number
to be changed.
Depress FdGsoE-l tey. If this button is depressed continuously, the cursor shi.fts sequent ia1ly . If the cursor exceeds a page , the next page appears on the CRT screen.
Parameter number
a.'a
lrxFirill.
!
I
I
I I e
I
1
-298-
CRT by
\NRIRH-E mTA fn. fo. rw 1@ _l@ T61 6 LW L@. -W LLA 143 6 ItI IU t?sffl.L LIz 166tL3f, 16 a L14 fn6115A rcI,.H- PGITIO.I (RELFTIl,E) x s.w Y
|WEb
A
mTA
$EM L$Pffi
1
mffi
6.WE
z s.w hE- L@
=
lrDl
When
the absolute value of variable exceeds the value 99999999, rr**********tr is displayed. l) Display \ Push t;:-:_ a) s .IMENT-I| .butron. I urJlr b) Display the desired page by pAGE butron. (It can be displayed by pressing sof t key I I,tecno-l.l 2) Serring a) Display the desired page. b) Move the cursor to the desired variable number. (Sane as item 10.i (l)
I
(c)
c) Key-in the variable value by data i.nput kev. d) Push I-INPUT lkey, and rhe input value is displayed. ' 3) Setting the coordinate value to variable a) Move the cursor to the desired variable number b)J* [-fl tr.. X axis) , (ror Y axis) or l ; | (for Z axis) while pushing
k.y.
lLl
c)-pustr'I INpUT I burron. The relative coordinate value for X, Y or Z axis is input and displayed on the variables. 10.4
System Parameter
Parameters must be set correctly so that' the servo machine tool specifications, and machine tool functions NC is connected to the DC servo motor or nachine tool. meters depend upon machine tools, refer to the atEached by the machine tool builder.
10.4.1 Parameter display
motor charact.eristlcs, are fulIy displayed when Since contents of paraparameter table prepared
l) Depress [-F-AnMl button on CRT/MDI panel. 2) Select a desired page by depressing page k"y (,T1,[r]).
-297 -
15.4 Caution
1) Work coordlnate system revlsed by follow up becomes effective {rom the next automatlc operation. 2) Inch/uretrl.c converslon functLon can not be used with this function.
.:
, ".r*;ii!'i"'
, / .,.
;'Jd;*t4t*ciuz
'
-331-
16.
OO-MB
The CRT/IDI panel of 00-I{B consists of a CRT display (14" color) and keyboard.
Contents of display and operation by k.y input are completely different depending on whether the CNC screen or I'ffC screen is displayed on the CRT/Mnf panel. In this manual, the operation when only the CNC screen is displayed ig described. Refer to the manual of machine tool builder for MMC screen.
Reset key
Shitt key
Program
edit key
Input
key
Function key
Fig.
16
-332-
*63ii'#
^:'!6*^
.t
16.1 Display
Press "CNCtr key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen when the MMC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/I{DI panel. The bnC screen consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the part that is surrounded by the fraue at t.he bottom right, and its display contents are the same as displayed on the 9" CRT display of O-MB. Therefore' the screen selecEed by function k"y, page k"y, cursor k"y, and soft key is
displayed. The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display contents are position data, operation time (optional)' modal data,. and S, T command value, as shown on the screen in the Fig. 16.1. Display -iterns of this section cannot be changed by the screen selecEion operation. However, its display contents are always renewed.
N.E F(EI'IOI 6EOIJIE)
x
Y
z
I
c!'|rn e .@60 0a@a9 ffi rl' zn ,i Er' a . oo@ @,a@a N@aag cl.'E'fc o'i"'6
@ N}. _@1 @ @ a4 E G g, @ @ ale DfiN !@tE @11 EW 011181t1 t11t0111 XT ott @12 613 a14 A!5 81118111 @15 at1!R111 017 4$ @Ll ef,t9 u@!4 &D !t@1ss @ q&nt m @ @&D @@ @94 @
rogfim0
hTA
omt 64@F
61?
R
0111111t
I F *?
61
l-|r-rrqnntrlrl[ti-ll--l
Fis. 16.1
16.2 Operation Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently arranged on 00-MB. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0-l'IB. The page key t *, cursor key t *, and selection key <- + on the software Press the operatort s panel are of combined use wich the function k.y. key for use as a page key, cursor key, and selection key on the corresponding software operatorrs panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the ttFUNC" key as the function key. Five keys on the righc half ten keys are effective for the varl-able section, and Ehe other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position display data in the fixed section.
-333-
-i
:t
a
:l
.l
t t
,,.,,,
, -:i!#
.::.1
IV
MAINTENANCE
{
*
i-
1.
When
a fuse blows ln a part of the CNC unit, find and correct the cause of failure and replace the fuse. Fuses used in the CNC unit are as follows:
Specif ication
the
1.1
of
Fuses
Fuses used
in
CNC
1.1
Nrtne
of unlt
Parts svmbol
F11, Fl2
Fr3
Capacity
Use
Power supply
5A
3.2
L
-0194 #5.0
A60L-0001
-a046
F14
113.2
5A
1.6
A
A60L-0001
-0046 #5.0
Additional I/O 81
F5l
A60L-000r
-0046 llr.6
Input unit
PCB
Fl,
F3
F2
l0A
0.3 A
A60r-0001 -0901
#P41C0H
A60L-000i -0r72
/iDMo3
Fot' power
control clrcuit
ON/OFF
1.2
1.2.1
3.2 A fuse
(Fl3)
5A fuse (Fl4)
5 Afuse
(Fll,Fl2)
-337-
81
1.6A fuse (F5l)
I
.
DI/DO connectors
without
servo
-l
F--l .-
:L
=b
rpz
0.3A
(F3)
Fuse
(Fl, F2)
10A Fuse
;
G .;
-338-
-_ *
f
2.
1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
General
2.1
Check
Is the problem in an auxiliary function? What is the alarm nuuber? 2) Check the frequency of occurrence: When did the probleur occur? What is its frequency? (Was another machine also being operated?) What is the frequency on the same workpieces? What is the sequence number? Which program is it; Is the problem related to a specific mode? Is the problem related to tool replacement? Is the problen related to the feedrate? 3) For re-occurring problems: Go through the program tape where the error occurs rePeatedl-y. Check the numerical value in memory of NC and conpare it with the prograrlmed
numerical value. Is the problem due to an external cause? Check the stored offset amount and the amount remaining after distribution. Check the response to override (decrease or increase the override amount). Ask the operator about details of the problem.
Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control .
the type of problem: In what mode is the controller? What is displayed on the CRT/MDI? What is the status dlsplay? Is there a posltioning error? If so, on whlch axis and by what amount? Is there a tool path error? If so, by what amount? Is the speed normal?
2.2
l)
Check the lnput voltage: Are there fluctuations in the input voltage? Is there a drop in the i.nput voltage? Is front or rear door opened (door interlock)? Is there some other device using large amounts of current? Is there an electrlc discharge machine or welding nachine nearby? 2) Check perlpheral conditions: What is the temperature of the controller? Did the temperaEure change? it excessive? Is the fllter dlrty? Is the tape reader dirty? Is there oil or cutting fluid about? Are there any vibrations? Is the unlt in direct sunlight? 3) Check for any external causes: Has the machine recently been repalred or adjusted? Has the magnetics cabinet recently been repaired or adjusted? Has the NC unit recently been repaired or adjusted? Is there a source of noise nearby? (Example: Cranes, High-frequency machines, Electric dlscharge machines) Has a new machine been mounted nearby? Is there another NC with the same problern? Has the user adjusted the NC? Has the sarne problem occurred before?
Is
-339-
4) Check phases of operation: Has the operator been properly instructed? Has the operator been rePlaced? Is the operator familiar with the program? Does the program finish too early or vras lt lnterrupted? Does the program contain an incremental command? Is the tool compensation value correctly set? If the tool compensation value was changed, was it done correctly? Does the rnachine change to another mode of operation? Is the block skip function used correctly? Is the tape set correctly? Are there any tape coding errors? Has the machine tool been operated incorrectly. 5) Check punched tapes: Is there dirt on the tape? Are there any folds or wrinkles on the tape? Are joints normal? Did the program previously run norrnal1y? Was the tape copied from a Baster tape? Was it the punched tape? Was the tape correctly punched? Is the tape puncher normal? I{as the wrong tape used? Is the puncher in good condition? 6) Check the program Is the program new? Was the program crated according to the OPEMTORTS UANUAL? Are addresses in the right order? Does the problem occur in any specific block? Does the problem occur in the sub-program? Was the list of tapes created for checking? 7) Check for changes in operation Has any change or adjustment been made in the operation procedure? Has a fuse been blown? Is the NC in the emergency stop state? Is the machine tool ready? Is the NC in the alarm status? Is the MODE SELECT switch set correctly? Is the switch on the tape reader set correctly? Is the override switch set to the zero position? Is the NC in the nachine lock status? Is the NC in the feed hold status? 8) Check the machine itself: Is the machine properly installed? Does vibration occur during operation? Is the tool tip normal? Is there ahy offset due to tool exchange? Is there sufficient backlash compensation? Are there distortions in any part of the machine due to temperature changes ? Was the workpiece measured correctly? (1 meter of steel Was the measurement nrade at a constant temperature? changes lOp in length at a temperature change of loC) Are the cables normal (bent, broken or damaged)? Are the signal lines and power lines separated?
':
;
rit
'z
-340-
9)
Check the lnterface control: Are power lines and NC cables nounted separately? Is the shield normal? Is a noise suppressor attached to the relay, solenoLd, and notor?
control unit external conditions: there damage to the cabinet? the CRT/I"IDI panel normal? the filter clean? the reader clean? the door of the reader closed? Has operatlon nade with the door open? Check that chips accurnulated on the cabinet did not fall inside when the door
Is Is Is Is Is
2) Cheek inside the control unit: Is there dirt in the control unit? Is the fan motor normal? Is there corrosion? 3) Check the power unit: Is the unit correctly connected? Are all fuses OK? Is the circuit breaker normal? Is the voltage htithin the allowable
.4) The grounding Is the grounding connectLon OK? Is the shield ground OK?
was opened.
Are the shield and cable duct grounded correctly? Is the wiring path OK? Are all terml-nals fully tightened?
range?
5)
6) Check prlnted circult boards: Are all PCBs mounted properly? Is the plug connector OK? 7)
Are cable connectors fully pushed ln? Are there any abnormalities in internal cables? Are there any abnormalities in external cables? Are there any scratches, bends or breaks?
Check
all
cables:
Are physlcal condltions normal (no distortlons, etc.)? What is the PCB editlon? Are connections between prlnted circuit boards good?
Check the CRT/MDI unir: Do the push buttons operate norrnally? Is the tape cable nornal?
CNC Status Display
2.4
When
l-t seems that the CNC is executing nothing during cycle operatlng status, the current status of the CNC is displayed on CRT screen at the diagnostic number 700, 701 or 712 by pushing the DGNOS burton.
-341-
F'
Diagnostic llo.
0
7
CSCT
CITL
COVZ
CINP
CDWL
CMTI\
CFIN
a digit is 'rlr', the corresponding status ls effectlve. CFIN: The M, S, or T function is being executed. CMTN: A move command in the cycle operation is being executed. CDh{.: Dwell is being executed. CINP: An in-position check is belng executed. COVZ: Override is at 02. CITL: Interlock signal (STLK) is turned on. CSCT: Speed arrival signal of spindle i-s turned on.
When
Diagnostl-c
0
7
No.
CRST
CRST: One of the followlng: The reset button on the MDI panel, energency stop, or remote reset is on.
Diagnostic
0
No.
,,
STP
REST
EMS
RSTB
CSU
RESET:
EMS :
RSTB
: CSU :
This is set at the followcondition. External reset signal has been turned on. Emergency stop signal has been turned on. Feed hold signal has been turned on. Reset button on the CRT/IDI panel has been turned on. The mode has been changed to the manual node, such as JOG, HANDLE/ STEP, TEACH IN JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE. (f) Alarm has been generated. (Soure alarms may not set the flag.) This is set when one of the external reset, emergency stop, or reset button has been turned on. This is set when t.he emergency stop has been set on. This is set when the reset button i.s on. This is set when the emergency stop has been turned orlr or when the servo alarm has been generated.
2.5
805)
Diagnostic
0
8
No.
0
SVERRX
(X axis) (Y axis)
SVERRY
SVERRZ
(Z axis)
-342-
No.
J
SVERR4
(4th axis)
SVERR5
SVERR6
'
8251
No.
0
ABSMTX
(X axis) (Y axis)
ABSMTY
ABSMTZ
(Z axis)
ABSMT4
i;
ABSMT5
ABSMI6
(6th axis)
The machine position from the reference point can be displayed on the CRT screen as fol1ows.
i' mTLH_
t.
PtlSITI0.t (RET.CTII) x 19.868 Y -?.*t z -27.?L6 (FM{IF) x 5.141 Y -48. LZ? z L. r73
@24 tWffi X Y Z
CABSA-UTE)
18.86A
-27.7L6
O.qBB
-7.W
(DISTFTG TO E])
X Y Z
A-zBB
A.@B
T;_ll;-l|;_]T**ll-___l
The values displayed under "MACHINE'| are these value.
-343-
APPENDIXES
APPENDIX
1
t'
o
,naracter
I
3
4
5
S0 code
7
3 2
I
o
Character
0
L
EIA code
8
'l 6
4
0
I I
Meaning
o o o o
o o
o
o
o
6
7
at
o o
9 A B
D
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o
o o 3
o
o o o
o o o
o 4 o o 5 o 6 o o o 7
8
9
Nuneral 2 Numeral 3
4
5
o o o o o o o o
c
Nuneral
o
o o
o o
o
o o b o o d o E o f o c h o lo J o o k
o o
o o o
o o c
o
o 0
I
K
T.
o o o o o o o o
o o o o
o o
o o o
o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o c
o
o o o o o o
o o o o o o o
!1
o o o
o 1 o m o o n o o o
n o
o
P
Y
I
o o o o o
R
5
o
o o
T
U
o
o o
U
ti
A I
o o o o o o o o
o o o o
O
p o o o o
o
r
q
o o o o
o o
cant information section in ISO code. Assumed as program No. tn EIA code.
o o o o
Numeral 6 Numeral 7 Numeral 8 Numeral 9 Address A Address B Address C Address D Address E Address F Address G Address H Address I Address J Address K Address L Address M Address N Not used at signifi-
o o o o o o
t
u
o
o o
o
o o o
o o o o o o o o
o
o o
o o
x o t
o z o o o De1
o o o o o o o o o o
o
?
?
DEL NUL
o o
o o o
Blank
o o
BS
BS
Delete (cancel an error punch). x Not punched. Can not be used in significant section in EIA code.
x
Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
l.rl
X Y
Z
o o
-F ]P
u
or
o Tab
o
NL
c
?
o o o o o o
o
CR
o
SP o ER
or
o o o
EOB
o o o o o
o
o o
Carriage return
:t Space
o o o
(2-4-s)
(2-4-7
)
o o
Absolute rewind stoD Control- out (a comment is started) Control in (the end of a conment)
-347-
IS0 code
Uharacter
.-
6 5
Characte
EIA code
8 7 6 5 o o o 3 z
1
I Meani-ng
o o o o o o o
o o o
o
o o 1-
*
o
o o
o
o o o
o o o o o o o
o o
poinE )
It
o
&
*
,
o
o o o o o o o
o o o o o
o
&
o
o o
o
o o o o o o o
o
o
o o o
o o
o o o
o o o o o o
.?
Comma
o
o o o
Ouestion mark
Commercial Ouotat ion Left brace
G
1t
o o
o o
at
mark
o o
Risht brace
(Note
information section, the codes are ignored. (Note 2) ?: when readr in the signi.ficant information section, an alarm is generated. However, it is stored in the meruory. (Note 3) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct. (Note 4) codes with incorrecc parity cause che TH alarm. But they are ignored without generating the TH alarrn when they are in the comment section. (Note 5) A character wi-th all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm even in EIA code.
1)
r
-348-
t t
APPENDIX
The symbols
IP_:X
As seen above, the format cons{sts of a combinatlon of arbitrary axis addresses among X, Y, Z, A, B, and C.
x: First basic axis (X usually) y: Second basl-c axis (Y usually) z: Third basic axis (Z usually)
Functions
Illustrations
GOO ]P
Tape format
Positioning
(c00)
Start point
Linear interpolation
(c0r )
Start point
GOI]P
Circular inter
polation (c02, c03)
c17
{:33}'
lco:l
{:33
f G02't
GI8
' - {l - , _ }' _t
,
Gl8
'
,- [=-_i'
_t
-,{} - * _ i' -,
Dwel1 (c04)
{X
- i'
R
Exact stop
(c04)
G04;
program (ClO)
of offset value by
Change
GIOP
-;
-349-
;#
Functlons
Tape format
Cutter sation
(c3e
compenB
Cutter compensation C
(c40
c42)
c42)
Itl
$lorz /'l'v
/-\/
H: Tool offset
Yo40
Jc43 \ lc44 J
[c44J
c43l 7 vl --"-'
H
"
No.
{:ii}t:n}ii
G49z Cancel
{:[]t:n]offset H: Tool
Inch/metric
conversion (G20, G21) Reference poin return check
(G27 )
Start point
':,
-t-/"
G28 IP _; G30 IF _;
Reference point
rerurn (G28)
(c30)
point return
2nd reference
G29 rP
_;
Skip function
(c31)
i:Tl'-s*
-350-
Illustrations
General format R/i k; m : Specifles macro
c6sHnP#IQ/ij
Tape fornat
G67:
... -;
Cancel
of operatlon
result
(Meantng) lfi=llt @ #t
Operatlon
Canned cycles
IIm
c80
c89)
...
Cancel
xYz
P_-a_R_F_K_;
;
G91
Absolute/incrementaL program-
G90
G91 G90 _
ming (c90/c9l)
Change
_;
coordinate
(ce2)
of
work
G92 IP'
-; -;
I point
c98 c99
point
-t
Z point
-351-
#i.
APPENDIX
(a)
Linear axis {in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
lou
Standard
0.001
0. 001
o. 1u
Least input
increment
inerement
0.01 0.01
+999999.99
0.000r
0. 000 I +9999.9999
Least
command
Max. programnable
di,mension
+99999.999
100 , 000 rnrn/rnin
Max. rapid
traverse
*l *l
240,000
urm/min
24,000 rnm/nin
12 , 000
I -
150,000 mn/urin
0
100,000 nrn/nln
nrn/urir
0 0001
0l,
0.001
Tool compensation
Backlash compensation Dwe1l time
0 - +999.99
rnm
0 0
+999.999
0 0
999.9999
rnrn
0 - !2.55 m
99999.999 sec
*0. 255
nrn
- 10.255
urn
99999.999
sec
9999.9999 sec
-352-
Table 1
(b)
Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
lou
Standard o. 1u
Least input
i-ncrement
0.001 inch
0.01
0.0001 inch
0.001
0.00001 inch
0.0001 -F393.70078 inch
Least
cornmand
increment
Max. programmable
dimension
+99999.999 inches
240
+9999.9999 inches
100
Max. rapid
traverse
*1 *1
'
000 n'n/min
,000
rnm/min
24'000 01
mm/min
0.01
6,000 inch/rnin
480
inch/min
inch/ step
Tool compensation
Backlash compensation
0 - t99'.999 inches 0
199 .99999
inch
!2.ss
99999.999 sec
+0.255
mn
Dwell tirne
9999.9999 sec
l:
p
F'
|:i
-3s3-
:FG
Table 1
(c)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
Standard
Least input
increment
0.00I inch
0.001 inch
+99999.999 inches
0.0001 inch
Least
command
0.000I inch
+9999.9999 inches
increment
Max. programmable
dimension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
*1
4,000 inch/rnin 0.01 - 4,000 inch/rnin 0.0001, 0.00I, 0.0I, 0.1 inch/step
Feedrate range
Step feed
0.00r,
0.01
inch/ steP
Tool compensation
Backlash
comPensation
- 40.255 inch
o99999.999 sec
Dwell time
-3s4-
Table 1
(d)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
I0u Standard
o. 1u 0.000 l
Least input
increment
0.0r
0.00r
Least
command
0.001 inch
+999999.999
0.0001 inch
+99999.999
0.00001 inch
19999.9999
uur
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
*1
9,600 inch/urin
4,000 inch/urin
960 inch/min
I50,000 rrn/min
10 0
mrn/ s t ep
100,000 rnm/uin
0 0
12,000
mm/min
01, 0.1, 1,
001, 0.01, 0. t,
rnrn/ s
tep
0001,0.001,
01, 0.I
nm/
tep
Tool compensation
Backlash comPensation
+999.99
+999.999
999.9999
mm
*0.255 inch
99999.999 see
+0.0255 inch
99999.999 sec
- +0.0255 inch
9999.9999 sec
Dwell tine
-355-
-!G
qF
Table 1
(e)
Rotation axis
Increment svstem
Standard
deg
0.001 0.001
deg deg
increment
+99999.999 deg
+9999.9999 deg
*l *l
100,000 deg/min
24,000 deg/rnin
1 - 100,000 deg/rnin
Step feed
Backlash compensation Note to Table f (a) - (e)
0 - +0.255
deg
+0.255
*l The feed rate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC interpolation capacity. When ragarded as a whole system, limitations depending on servo system must also be considered.
t i:
;
Z
it
t
-356.t
APPENDIX
MONOGRAPHS
1.
The leads of a thread are generally incorrect tn 61 and 62, as sholrn ln Fig, l, due to automatic acceleratlon and deceleration. Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of d1 and 62 in the program.
Fig.
1) 62 is deternlned by cutting speed V (nn/sec) and time constant (T1) of the servo system as shown below. 62 = Tl . V (m) (1) ..... ..... where T1 i-s in sec., and V is in nrn/sec. v is determined by thread lead L and spindle speed R as shown below. V = R (rpm) t (urn)/60 L (run) Lead of thread R (rpn) ..... spindle-speed o Time constant T, (sec.) of the servo system: Usually 0.033 sec. 2) How 61 is determined The value of 61 is determined by cutting speed V in thread cuttlng, tlme constant T1 for the servo system, and thread accuractttatt as shown below. 6r = {t - Tr * T1 exp (- f')i v (mm) (2) , t. a = exP ,- Tt, (3) , . . o. . . . . . The lead at the beglnning of thread cutting is shorter than the specified lead, L and the allowable lead error is AL.
Then,
a=T AL when the value of rrarr is determlned, the time 1apse, t, until the thread accuracy is attained can be calculated by formula (3) r The tine "t" is substituted in (2) to determlne 61. Constants V and T1 are determined in the same eray as for 62. Since the calculation of 61 is rather complex, a nomography is provided on the following pages. Instructions on how to read the appropri.ate 6l value on the nomography is shown below.
-357-
F.
{G
a
,tr (V = lgpp/sec
y: dQ66/sec)
y: !Q6p/sec
<lr
First specify the cl4ss and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy' a, will be obtained at C, and depending on the time constant of cuEting feed acceleration/dece1.r"iion, the 61 value when V = 10 urn/sec will be obtained at @. Then, depending^on the speed of thread cutting the approach distance O, witt be obtained ar @ for other speeds than 10 mm/sec. (Note) The equation of 6-1, 62 is for when the acceleration/deceleratlon ti-me constant for cutting feed ls 0.
Simple Calculation oll Incorrect Thread Length
l) o, =
2)
o,
=#'.
d
ffi
to.)
(-1-1na) =
6z
. (-1-lna)
L: Thread lead (rnm) R: Spindle speed (rprn) * I'Jhen time constant T of the servo system is 0.033 sec. And the "1-lna" follows as below.
i ;
(Exanple)
4.298
3.. 60s
3.200
nm
6l= 62 x 3.605 =
0.701
2.9t2 T
-358-
J
6
tl
,.1
.l
6 a FI
o
-.t
E
E
O
6 trc
6
'F9
eo
{{
&d
@ N
N^O
Aa
(o o (,
.ri
N @
.!
.3
!,
C'
o o
-o
d
,ui Gt
6zl
I
{3
Ec
.9s E o
Ea .9^ E
Jhh9d
o,
.E
2 EeeE 3
I
i""Ei' rEc{6 6:
o
(! gt
o
E
=a >{r
to .E ; 3 :^ .!9s R g
4..^
1c;
tI
I I
I
q)
I
I
-;3
Ei Ea
'r
ld
I
I
lI I I
6 .,o-
>J:
il'
3? oq
Ec
oh 3 ll
I^
l.E
E E
Ei:
o
N ll
lo
I
r! >J:
l'
6
-359i
2.
I) Descriptfon
sLrvo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning systern when a servo motor is used) is acconpanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (too1 center path) and the prograrmed path as shovm in Figure 2 (a). Time constant T., of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
Yz
Programmed Path
Tool Path
",f'
Fig. 2
(a)
This tool path is deternined by the following parameters: a.) Feedrate (V r, .Yz) b) Corner angle Gi c) Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (Tr) at cutting (Tr=0) d) Loop gain of positioning system e) Presence or ab-.ence of buffer register The above parameters are'used to theoretically analyze the tool path. Itlhen actualJy programming, the above items must be considered and programrning must be performed carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the desired precision. In other wo::ds, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision, the comrnands of the next block must not be read until the conrnanded feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used to stop the machi-ne for the appropriate period
shor^m
* t
,{
i:
t
in Fig. 2
*
.
* { i
,1
t
t
t
{
! tt
-360-
b) The
controller has a buffer reglster. error differs with the reading speed of characters of the next block, etc. )
(The
Fig.2
(b)
Gommand
n-(4r-{2)=o
(Description of synbol) V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornerlng Vx1: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of preeeding block , Vyr: Y-axis conPonent of feedrate of preeeding block Yx2: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of following block Vyit Y-axis comPonent of feedrate of followlng block . 0 : Cornerangle and X-axis tt:. : Angle forned by comrnanded path dlrection of preceding block and X-axis path direction of following block ,!; : Angle forned by connanded
-36r-
Initial value calculation -ttt" ittitial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution of the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.
Fig. 2
(c)
Initial value
(I) Vx1 (Tl + T2) : vyi(r1 + 12) Q) Y; time eonstant. (=0) fi, Exponential acceleration/deceleration(Inverse of position loop gain) positioning system Tz2 Tj-me constant of
Xs =
Tool path analYsis +thefeedratesforthecornersectioninX-axis Ttre equations below i.rePresent direction and Y-axis direction.
vx(t) =
t'l - rt' exp,- d,} t Vxr. , -Vx2L1-fr{r1 'exP(-r, - 12 ' exp (- i)) T1+T2 i) t. (- l-tr.exp,-t'rr]+vyz ttr. ""p d) vy(t) =ffi
(Vx2
- vxr) t r - #h;
{rr'
exP CE
+ vx1
(3) (4)
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the following equations:
Tt l'
Tz
t', - ta'
exp
(-
+ ] - vx2 (r1
- vyz (rt
exp
,- ,tJ - r?
'exp (- + )
-362-
3.
When
a servo motor is used, the positionlng system causes an error betyeen lnput commands and outPut results. Since the tool advances along the cornnanded segment' an error ls not produced ln linear lnterpolation, but when especially high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, an error is produced in the radius dlrectlon. This error can be sumnarized as follows:
Ar: Maximum radius error (m) v: Feedrate (m/sec) r: Circle radlus (m) Tl: Exponentlal acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec) at cutting (=0) Tzi Time constant of posltlonlng system (sec). (Inverse of position loop gain)
^r=+
since the machining radlus r (m) and allowable error Ar (rm) of the workpiece ls given in actual machining, the allowable lirnit feedrate y (m/sec) ls determined by equation (1). Since the acceleratlon/deceleration time constant at cutting which ls set by this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool builder's i.nstruction manual.
-363-
'q
APPENDIX
TAPE JOINING
punched tape is to be rnade or tape is broken or in similar cases, tape sections must be joined. Join these tape sections as described below. two a) Butt the two tape sections and paste them together, placing the section on the side on which the tape is fed' on top of the other. b) The joint at which the two tape sections overlap must be approx. 3 pitches.
If a loop of
, _-lr
3 pitches
Direction of feed
c) l'lake sure the punched holes of the overlapped cape sections at the joi-nt are correctly aligned. IIse special care with the feed holes.
I F
\Jl-.,
Incorect
fi-t. ll
o
Correct
them.
Trim
e) Ilake sure punched holes are not clogged up with the paste.
-364-
APPENDIX
Parameter (No. 045,. CLER) sets whether clear condition by reset or reset condition.
o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued. x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
I tem When on
turning
o
power
When reset
o o
When
o o
clear
serrinE Offset value data Data set by the MDI setting oPeration
Parameter Other data Programs in
o
o
o
o
o o
o: MDI
o
x: Other
x
X
mode mode
Display of
sequence number
One
(Note
x
1)
o (Note
x
1)
shot G code
I"lodal G code
Initial G codes. (For G20 and G21 the one eftectivi before cutting off the power is effective.)
Zero
o
Inirial are
noE
Zeto
o
S, T,
x
x
Repetition
count
(K)
specification
Zero
o o
Action oper-
Movement
Dwe11
x x
M,S
a
x
x
ation
x x
Tool length
compensat
i
I
o: MDI mode
Other
modes
ion
-365-
Item
When on
turning
x x
power
When reset
When
clear
Action
in
Cutter
compensation
oper-
ation
Storing called
x (Note
2)
output
signalsl
ALM
for
of
indicaEron
LEDs
Extingui shes
d!4lur
NOT READY
emergency stop)
BUF
Extinguishes
x
o: MDI
x: Other
mode mode
Extinguishes
o
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLE-
(x:
Emergency
(x:
EmergencY
TION LED
stop)
x x
x
o
stop)
o
S, T and B codes
I'1 code
x x
o
x
o
ready signal
ON
Servo ready
signal
CYCLE LED
ON (When other
than servo
alarm)
x
.START
(Note 1) When heading is performed; the main Program number is displaYed. (Note 2) When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to Ehe head of Ehe main program. Execution cannot be started . frsrn the middle of the subprogram.
-365-
ir
's.
t:
APPENDIX
7.
PARAMETER LIST
1.
PARAMETER DISPLAY
No;
1) Press the "PARAM" k"y to select a parameter screen. 2) Key in Address No. 3) Press cursor key or page key to change the screen instead of Address
too. Set parameters to 0 without fail,
if their usage is not specified in the following detailed description. Parameters dontt always function unless the CNC function (option) is provided, even if their usage is specified. Confirm which paraueter options 3re mounted in advance.
Note) The name of parameters on upper side are used for only T series: f or__Tutning machine (0-TB,..-00-_TB) , the names of Parameters on are used for only M series: CNC for Machining center (0-l[B,
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
CNC
,l
'I
-:1 e'.
.{
1 I
I
;l .l il
,l
Remarks
Bit
RDRN
No. 1:
0:
DECI 1:
Dry run is effective for rapid traverse. Dry run is not effective for rapid traverse.
oRc
ir
E.
1: Offset value becomes a radius designatlon. 0: Offset value becomes a diameter designation. l: Offset value is input in incremental value. 0: Offset value is input in absolute value. 1: Offset is cancelled by reset button. 0: Offset it not cancelled by reset button. 1: Offset vectof in G43, G44 rernains in reset state. 0: Offset vector in G43, G44 is cleared in reset state. 1: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel directly actuate the CNC start without going through the machine side (MDI mode only) 0: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel issues the signal to the machine side. The CNC start is actuated when the CNC receives the start signal
from machine side.
F
i
i'
IOF
i t
I
TOC
RS43
DCS
\
t
't'
F'
-367-
Parameter No.
Remarks
PROD
1:
0:
scI\I
Displays progranmed position in current value displaying for U and W. Displays actual posi-tion.
Less command increment is input in inch system. (Machine tool: inch 'systern) Less command ingrement is input in metric system. (Machine tool: mm system) If you want to change this parameter, turn off
power.
1:
0:
NFED
TJHD TJHD
IiSLE
Pi'OfY2
ASR33
PPD PPD
STP2
l
2 NFED
Ploryt
ASR33
STP2
T
)
Bir
NFED
No. 1:
0:
Feed is not output before and after progran is output by using the reader/puncher interface. (Sg.!_ "1" f or FANUC cassette. ) reEl*ii o"tp"t befd;;;"-a*"ii"r program is ourpur by using the reader/puncher interface. (Effectiver(rhen the setting parameter I/O is 0.) Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG node by manual pulse generator is possible. Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG mode by manual
,
* J
.i
TJHD
t:
O:
HSLE
When
0:
(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the uianual pulse generators are provided for (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regardless of the axis selecting signal.)
the manual pulse generators are provided for two axis, the axis selecting signal is valid
(Note)
PI'O(Y2, I
PlorYl
0
Shift direction
+x
i
0
-X
'1-
-Y
-368-
I t t
T {
Parameter No.
ARS33
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
I:
0:
The 2OmA current interface is used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PPR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/punch interface. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0..)
The relative coordinate value is preset when the coordinate system is set. The relative coordinate value is not preset when the coordinate system is set
PPD
I:
0:
STP2
1:
0:
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit is set by 2 bits In the reader/puncher i_nterfaee, the stop bit is set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
PSG2
PSGl
TLCP
6 GST
OVRI.
OVRI
zt{,4
zM3
ZI,4Z
ztfi.
ztff.
HSLE
zyw
zlu
ZI,[Y
Bir
PSG2,
No.
s43
PSG2
2l
Gear
Magnification
xl
x2 x4 x8
0 0
1
I
0
I
r=
Magnification
I{SLE
l:
When
0:
the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is valid. (When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is invalid. (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regdrdless of the axis selegting signal.) (When one or two manual pulse generators are provided, see ttOtt to Ehis parameter. )
-369-
Parameter No.
Remarks
TLCP I:
0:
direction being normal to the plane specified by plane selection (G17, G1B, c19) (Tool length offset B). The tool length offset is performed in the Z axis irrespective of plane selection. (Too1 length offset A).
Gear shift is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant) Spindle orientation is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant)
GST
t:
0:
OVRI
Setting values 0 and I can determine the direction in which the override value increase. See table 6 (a) in following page for details.
zl44
21"ff, z\N
zl4z,
(0M)
The reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Y, Z and 4th axis in order.
l: Mlnus 0: Plus
(Note) file Uactfash compensation is inirially performed when the axis moves in the opposite direction against the direction which is set by this parameter after the po\^rer is turned on.
zux,
ztq3,
zttz
zl{,4
(0r)
The reference poi-nt return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Z, 3rd and and 4th axis i-n order.
l: Minus 0: Plus
-370-
Pararneter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
Parameter OVRI=0
on
Parameter OVRI=l
I'tanual
Manual
Over-
ride
Over-
ride
50
nm/
inchl
min 0. 0t 0.1
1507"
o
o
o o
o o
o
10 20 30 40 50
140 130
inch/
min
30 20
L2
t2.6
20 30 50
79
60
o
L20
tl0
320
200
LZA
8.0
o t r
J
70 o o o
100 90 80
70
).u
3.0
JA
79
50
32 20
80
90
o
o
o
I00.
110
r26
200
t ti
o o o
o
120
130
140
320
500
1')
60 50 40
30 20
.o
o o o
790
t0
0
2.0
0
150
r260
50
(Note
1)
(Noce 2)
(Note
3)
o indicates signal is open and blank indicates signal is closed. When the override switch is changed during axis movement, the axis moves at the new speed. Generally, this signal is designated by the override
371
Parameter No.
Remarks
DMRX
GRDX GRDX
.+
DMRX
Bir
No.
DMRZ
GRDZ GRDY
D},IRY
Bir
No.
Dl,lR3
GRD3
GRDZ
6
D},IRZ
Bit
No.
D},IR4
GRD4
Bir
No.
-372-
DMRX
to
DMR4
Setting 654
0 0 0 0 0 0
code
0
I
r/2
I I
2
I
1
t I
I
I
0
0
I
I
0
3/2
3 2
s/2
5
7
/2
4
GRDX
3210
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
Analogue servo
0
for Digital
servo
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 7 0000 80000 90000
I
0
I I I
1
I
0 0
I
I
0 0
I I I I
I I
I I
0 0
I
I I
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
I
0 0
I I
I
1
I
0
-373-
Relationship
T)
Metric
system
l,loving distance
Axis
X
unit
(um)
Command
Detect multiply
ratio
(DMR)
Capacity of
re
Pulse
2000
Pulse
2500
Pulse
3000
4
ference counter
6000 6000 10000 10000 8000 8000
I
1
/0.5
I
z
X
4
.I
,t
* g
* I
6
T I
r/0.5
I
I
r
10
mn
Z
4 4
/o.s
1
'&
F
j
8mm
z
X
I
1/0.
s
zl'+
3
2
6000 6000
6mm
Z
I
1i0.s
t I
I
t
2/4
2
5000/ 10000
5000
nrm
z
X
I
I
'|
1/0.s
I
2/4
2
4000/8000
4000
4mm
L X
/0.s
I
L.5 /3
r/2
I
3000 / 6000
3mm
,
X
I
I
1.5
3000
2000 / 4000
1/0.s I
I
r/2
1
ntm
0.5
0.5
2/r
2
I
I
lmm
X
Note 1) Note
In thq above table, right side value is in diameter designati-on, and lett eiae value is in radius designation in X axis. ?\ Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiplY changed, but in that case there is limit for maximum ratio can be feedrate.
374
t * ,
Relationship among DMR, CMR, and GRD. (In case of series T)
Inch svstem
ltoving distance per I revoluCount
ing
Command
tion of motor
(Pulse coder)
Axis
X
unit
(
(de tec
tion)
Detect rnultiply
urultiply ratio
(CMR)
rario (DlR)
Pulse
2000
3
3
Pu I SE
Pulse
3000
10-4) 1/0. s
2500
0.6 inch
Z
l\
I
t
I
2l+
2
I
r
0.5 inch
Z
X
/o.s
2/a
2
s000/ r0000
5000
I
L/0.s
I
I
I
0.4 inch
Z
2/4
2
4000/8000
4000
0.3 inch
x
z
r/0.s
I I
I
I
L.s /3
t\
r/2
I
3000/6000
3000 5000 5000
0.25 lnch
L
/O.s 0.5
I
n L
r/2
2
0.2 inch
Z
r/0.s
I
r/2
I
2000/4000
2000
t
2
2
0.15 inch
Z
I.5
1.5
0. I inch
x
7
2
2
I
I
Note r) Note
L)
In the above tab1e, right side value is in diameter designation, left side value is in radius designation in X axis. Data in the above table is standard. Conunand and detect nultiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for naximum
feedrate.
375 '-
M)
Metric
system
(detection) unit
(um)
Counting
Command
mult iply
rat io
(CMR)
Capaclty
Pulse 3000
4
1,1
Pulse
2500
re f eretr1,1,
counter
6000
l0
mm
i
1
r0000
8000
2
4
3
I
I r
4m3mm
I
I
I
I I
t.5
I
2mm
I
0.5
I
L
lmm
.'
Note l) Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is linit for maximuur feedrate.
.'.
Inch system
Moving dj-stance
(detection) unit
(
Counting
Command
roult iply
Detect rnultiply
ratio I
I I
ratio (DlR)
2500
3
Pulse
2000
Pulse
Pu 1
2
1o-+r;
(cl,IR)
3000
0.6 inch
0. 5 inch
i
I
0.4 inch
0. 3 inch
I
2
1
0.5
1
2
1
0.5
0.5
1 2
I
1
3000 2000
Note 1) Data in the above table is standard. Comrand and detect mult ip lyratio can be changed, but in that case there is lirnit for maximun feedrate.
376
Parameter No.
E
Remarks
l r
EILK
I
OTZN
ADWI
ADWO
BiE
EILK
No.
F
I
performed for each axis. L is necessary.) 0: Interlock is performed for all axes or for Z axis (it needs that No. 012 ZILK=I) on1y.
(FANUC PMC-MODEL
l: Interlock is
NOFC
l: Offset counter input is not used. 0: Offset counter input is used. I: Z axis sEored strok check is not done. 0: Z axis stored strok check is done. 1: Rapid traverse override signal effective. (1002, Fo) 0: Rapid traverse override signal
(
OTZN
ROVE
ROV2
is
noE
R0V2
is effective.
}MPR
ADW2,
ADWO
Name
ADW2
Name
0
n
0 0
0
I
A
B
0 0 I
1 t I
I
I
0 0
0
I t
c
U
V w
t\
I
0
-377 -
Parameter No.
Remarks
TMF
TFIN TFIN
9 TMF
Bit
TMF
No.
43,2
l0
Time from M, S, T code issue to MF, SF, TF issue. Setting range 16 to 256 msec. (16 msec increment)
Time of reception width of FIN. Setting range 16 to 256 usec. (16 sec increment).
TFIN
T code
TF
FIN
LI I
TFIN
setting
0
l6
msec
More than 16 msec More than 32 msec More than 48 msec More than 64 msec More than 80 msec More than 96 msec More than l12 msec
0 0
I
0 0
0 0 0 0
0
I
,0
0
0
t
0
I
0
1
0 0
I I
I
I
12 msec
msec
t
0 0 0 0
I
0 0
I
0
I I
More than 144 msec More than 160 rnsec More than 176 rnsec More than 192 msec
I I
192 msec
-378-
Parameter No.
Remarks
TFIN
Parameter
setting
I
I
0 0
I
rnsec
I
I
I
I
0
I
1
APRS
WSFT
DOFSI
PRG9
ISOT ISOT
I
No.
0
APRS PRG9
Bir
APRS
Aut.omatic coordinat.e system when manual reference point 0: Automatic co.ordinate svstem conducted.
l:
WSFT
I: The di-rect measured value input for tool offset is set in the work shift memory. 0: The work coordinate system is not shifted. l: The direct measured value input for tool offset is effective. 0: The direct measured value input for tool offset is ineffeccive. 1: The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 are protected. The following edit function are
disabled.
When
DOFSI
PRG9
(l) Deletion of
the deletion of all programs is specified, the programs with program 9000 to 9999 are nor delered.
program
number
(2)
are not punched out when the punch of all programs is specified.
(3) (4)
i I
t-I
-379-
Parameter No.
Remarks
The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 can also be dated.
PRDY
OFFVY
1:
n.
1:
Servo afarm ls not actuated when VRDY is on before is output. Servo alarm is actuated when VRDY is on before PRDY is output.
EBCL
0:
ISOT
l.
In the display of the nto*t"t stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by * (asterisk). In the display of the program stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by; (semicolon).
Rapid traverse is effective even when reference point return is not conducted after turning the power on. Rapid traverse is invalid unless reference point return is conducted after turning the power on.
PMLI PMLl
0:
MCINP
SBKM
PML2
MCF
ADNW
I
No.
MCINP
G0l
SBIO,I
ADLN
PML2
Bit
543
Program input
2L0
the data input
MCINP
1:
is started with
MINP. MINP.
0:
-380-
Parameter No.
Remarks
c0t
SBKM
l: GOl mode when power is on. 0: G00 mode when power is on.
1: Machine
command.
MCF
l: EF (external operation slgnaL) is output when G8l positioning is completed. 0: EF (external operation signal) is not output when G81 positioning is not completed.
ADNW
l: Select B type for feed rate. 0: Select A type for feed rate.
(A type)
(1)
same AS
(2) Cutting feed upper lirnit feed rate Tangential speed is clamped at. parameter value for a1l axis.
(B type)
,
(1)
rate rates of basic axes and rotary axis can be set by different parameter (No. 565, 566). When an additional axis is moved with another axis in simultaneously 2 or more axes control, feed rate is the same as that of another axes.
JOG feed JOG feed
(2) Cutting feed upper liurit feed rate When command linear interpolation including addit.ional axis, (G01), clamp each axis feed rate at smaller than the setting value j-n another parameter (No. 567). In circular interpolation, tangential speed i,s clamped at parameter value. (Sane as A type) (3) Minimum rapid traverse rate (Fo) 0n1y additional axis is set by another parameter. (No. 0568) (4) Low feedrate (FL) additional axis at reference point return is seE to another parameter.
(No.0s69)
-38r-
Parameter No.
ADLN
Remarks
1: 4th axis is used as a linear axis. 0: 4th axis is used as a rotary axis.
When
4th axis is used as linear axis, there are following restrictions. 1) Circular interpolation including the 4th axis
cannot be performed.
2) Cutter compensation B/C in the 4th axis cannot.be applied. 3) Tool length compensation in the 4th axis cannot
be applied.
PML2, t
Pitch error compensation magnification. The value, with this magni.fication multiplied to the set compensation value, is outDut.
PML2 0
PMLl
0
Magnification
X1
x2 x4
I
I
(Cornmon
Fo
I
X8
to all axes)
I
No. 1:
Bir NFED
0:
G84S
Feed is not output before and after the progran is outPut by using the reader/puncher interface. (Set to "1" when FANUC """""tt" is used.) Feed is_ output before and after the program is 9::l"t by using rhe reader/puncher interface. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.) Type B is effective in canned cycle G74 and GB4 with S analog voltage output. Type A is effective in canned cycle G74 and Gg4 ' with S analog voltage output. (See connecting manual for type A/B.)
is set
by
-382-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
I:
0:
FXCS
In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed without outputting M05. In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed after outputting M05. In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindte CH/CCW rotation is performed without M05 code output. In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindle CW/CCW rotation is performed afcer M05 signal output.
The 2OmA currerlt Lnterface ls used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PRR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/puncher interface. .(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
l:
0:
w
Relative
parameter
ASR33
l:
o:
ZTLK
1:
0:
1:
Interlock is effective only for Z axis. Interlock is effective for all axes.
No.008i
EILK..
is
0:
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit 1S set by 2 bits. In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit ls set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
TCW
CI.IM CWM
ORCW ORCW
GMOFS
GOFU2
JHD
t
No.
3 TCW
J}lD
Bit
TCW,
CWM
cI.]M
Output code
0 0
M04.
I
0
Minus output for both !103 and M04 Plus output for M03, uinus output for
M04.
I
0Rct^l
Minus output
M04.
for
1:
0:
Minus output in orientation S analog output. Plus output in orientation S analog output.
-383-
.::,*
i$i ':t1
Parameter No.
INHMN
Remarks
l: 0:
GOFC
option is provided. The tool geometry offset is also cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. 0: The tool geometry offset is not cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. l:
1:
The menu ls not indicated even r^rhen the menu a programrning option is provided. The menu is indicated when the menu programming
GMOFS
0:
GOFU2
processing, i.e. tool movement. The tool geometry offset is conducted by the shifting of the coordinate system.
l:
0:
The geornetry offset number is designated by two high order digits of the T code. The geometry offset number is designated by the two low order digits of the T code.
The manual pulse generator is valid in JOG mode. The manual pulse generator is invalid in JOG mode.
JHD
1: 0:
T2T4
0 0
vI
I\JA
OFSB
STDP
SMCL
T2D
I
No.
Bit T2T4
3210
I,ltren
I:
0:
the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, it is regarded that the two high order digits are equal to the two low order digits and the T code is set to the 4-digit value. When the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, the two high order digits are regarded as 00, and the T code is set to the 4-digit value.
ir is
e
only
ffec t ive
when
T2D=0
WIGA
1: Setting of the tool wear offset amount ls lirnited to incremental designation, and the setting of the tool geometry offset amount is lirnited to absolute de s ignation. 0;. The incremental and absolute designations are possible for both tool wear offset amount and tool geometry offset amount.
1:
OFSB
o:
Tool offset is conducted by the T code block. (The tool geometry offset by the shifting of the coordinate system is conducted by the T code block regardless of this parameter.)
-384,i
Parameter No.
STDP
Remarks
t:
0:
displayed.
always displayed.
GMCL
1:
0:
T2D
Does
not cancel the tool figure correction vector by resetting. T code is specified in 4-digits.
CPRD
0:
REP
REP
PRWD PRWD
MORB
I
No.
l.
NWCH
CBLNK CBLNK
5 CPRD
Lvt2
SKPF
RILK
2
Bit
CPRD
0:
Unit is set to mm, inch or sec. When the decimal point is omitted in the address for which the decinal point can be used. The least input increment is set when the decimal point is omitted in the address for which Ehe decimal point can be used. the program with same program nuuber in the is registered through interface, the altarm does not occur and the registered reader/puncher program is replaced. When the program with same program number in the memory is registered through reader/puncher interface, the alarm occurs.
When
REP
1:
memory
n.
PRWD I:
0:
MORB
Rewind signal is output by portable tape reader. Rewind signal is noE output by portable tape reader. The direct neasured value input for tool offset and work coordinate system shift is performed by retracting both 2 axes after cutting and pushing the
RECORD
'I .
n.
is necessary for this function.) button is not provided for direct measured value input.
(FANUC PMC-L/M
RECORD
button.
The
Lr42
t:
0:
Makes valid stroke limit 2 (EXrM2 Gr29.6). Makes invalid stroke limit (EXLM2 Gr29.6) .
-38s-
Parameter No.
1:
Parameter (Upper
: T serles, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
0:
RILK
Dry run, overri-de and automatic acceleration/ deceleration is effective in skip function (G3l). Dry run, override and automatic acceleration/
1: Interlock processing is done at htgh speed. (FANUC PMC-MODEL L or M is necessary. ) 0: Normal interlock processing is done. 1: The character "W" is not displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display. 0: The character "I'1" is displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display.
't. 0: The cursor does not The cursor blinks.
NWCH
CBLNK
blink.
I'{DEC
RSTMB
RSTMA
Bir No.
MDEC
(not available)
NPRD
1: Input and display with decimal point is ineffectlve. 0: Input and display with decimal point is effective. 1: Start-up B type is effective i-n cutEer compensation
V.
SUPM
* *
I
0: Start-up type is effective in cutter compensation C. For details of start-up, refer to operatorts manual.
RST}ts
1: B group decode M signal (M21A, 1422A) is cleared reset. (not. available) 0: A group decode M signal is not cleared by rest.
by
RSTMA
1.: A group decode M signal (MflA-Al38) is cleared by reset. (not available) 0: A group decode 11 signal is not cleared by reset.
-385-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lo\rer :
M series)
Remarks
OPGT
OPG6 OPG6
OPG5 OPG5
OPG4 OPG4
I
No.
OPG3 OPG3
OPG2
OPG2
OPGI OPGI
OPGT
Bit
OPGT I:
0:
Feed hold is effected with the software operatorrs pane1. Feed hold is not effected with the software
operaEorts panel.
operatorts panel Protect key is not actuated with the software operatort s panel.
Optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock and dry run switches are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. The above switches are not actuated with the sofcrdare operatorf s pane1.
Jog feed rate, override, and rapid traverse override switches are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software operatorts panel .
software
OPG5
1:
0:
OPG4
1:
0:
OPG3
1:
0:
Axis select (IIX, Hy, HZ) and magnification (x10, x100) switches for manual pulse generator are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software3 operatorrs panel.
OPG2 I: Jog feed axis select and jog rapid traverse buttons are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. ' 0: The above buttons are not actuated with
software operatorts panel.
the
OPGl
l:
n.
select (MDl to MD4, ZRN) is conducted from the software operatorts panel. Mode select is not conducted from the software operatorrs panel.
Mode
(Note) The above parameters are effective only when the optional software operatorts panel is selected.
-387-
:{!l'eFfF
Parameter No.
Remarks
EDITB
0
TVC TVC
SQTYP
EDITB
Editing on standard keyboard shal1 be editing oPeration B, 0: EdiEing operation shall be as specifie{ in standard specifications. I: TV check at the conment. 0: No TV check at the comment 1: The program restart method should be R type. (not available) 0: The program restart meEhod should be P or Q type. 1: Handle feed magnification xl00 is ineffective for X, Y, Z and 4th axes' resPectivelY. 0: Handlerfeed rnagnif icati-on x100 is ef fective for X, Y, Z and 4t.h axis' resPectivelY.
(Note) The magnification of an axis whose rnagnification xl00 is ineffective becomes xl or x10 by signal MPI. MPI=1:x10 I MPl=0:x
1'
a
TVC
SQTYP
N)O{P2, NYI'IP2,
NZMP2,
NZMP4
DBCD
DCZ
XRC
DC4
C4NG
DC3 }lHPGB
I
No, 1:
9 DBCD
Bit
DBCD
n.
In the diagnosis display' the timer counter data is displayed in decimal. The diagnosis display is d isplayed in binary as usual.
M02, M30 and M99 command the end of registration into part program storage editing area. M02, M30 and M99 do not command the end of registration into part program storage editing area.
NEOP
l:
0:
MO2NR
I:
O:
Return to the head of program after executing Do not return to the head of program after executing M02.
M02.
-388-
Parameter No.
SRGTP
Lower : M series)
Remarks
l.
0:
1:
G135.0 is used for the rigid tap selection signal. G123. I is used for the rigid tap selection signal.
0:
XRC
1: 0: l. 0:
DC4
C4NG
0:
DC3
t:
0:
0:
Diameter designated for 3rd axis (Disable). Radius designated for 3rd axis.
MHPGB
B.
0
SFOUT
NCIPS BCD3
Bir
SFOUT
No.
1.
to
is output in S4/5 digit even if gear change is not performed. SF is output in S4/5 digit on changing a gear.
SF
0:
NCIPS
1:
In deceleration, the control proceeds to Ehe next block after the specified speed has become zero. The control does not confirm that the machine position meets a specified position. (No inposition
0:
checking) . The control proceeds to the next block after the spcified speed has become zero and confirms that the machine position has reached the specified position
in deceleration.
(Inposition ckecking).
BCD3
l. 0:
i
-389-
ma
.re:
l
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
APCZ
APCX APCX
I
APC4 APCZ
APCY
Bit
No.
When When
16
absolute pulse coder detector is optioned. absolute oulse coder detector is not optioned
APCX, 1: Y, Z, 0:
4
ABSZ
ABSX ABSX
ABS4
ABSZ
ASSY
t f
*
a
.t
t t
3
Bit
No.
A3SX, l: Y, Z, 0: 4
Reference point position in absolute Pulse coder Referepce point position in absolute pulse coder is
se
;
&
ttled
not settled. (It is automatically set to "1" when manual reference point return is executed. Do not change the setting without changing the detecEor') Set "0" without fail when primary field installation and adjustment and when position detector exchanging. And execute manual reference point return after Power on/off.
DITA
DCHI DCHI
DFRN DFRN
DGRM DGRM
DJPN DJPN
DITA
Bir
DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM
5432
screen ls displayed in Italian. screen is displayed in Chinese screen is displayed in French scteen is displayed in
German.
(ROC) -
DJPN
-390-
Parameter No.
Remarks
scTo
SCTO
IGNPM(
.+
LII
1O
IGNP}I(
Bit EDILK
No.
1:
0:
QNr
1:
0:
NEGWSF 1:
during offset writing Automatic selection of tool offset number is not done during offset writing mode.
When
0:
UWKZ
work shift amount is input in incremental system, sign is eonverted and input to memory. When work shift amount is input in incremental
I.
When
0:
INOUT
the work zero point offset value is modified' absolute coordinate value is changed at once. (Not available) After modification, the absolute coordinate value is updated at the initial preProcessing.
Outside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area. Inside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area.
,Progranmed
1:
0:
GNSR
1:
0:
position is drawn in graphic function. Actual position where tool nose radius compensation is thought in is dravm in graphic function.
Spindle speed reach signal is checked. Spindle speed reach signal is not checked.
SCTO LIIlO
1:
0:
1:
0:
IGNPMC
Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.01 unn/O.001 inch. Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.001 mrn/0.0001 inch(Usua1)
t.'..F
Control by PMC is made ineffective. (Same as without PMC) 0: Control by PMC is made effective
1. RSFT
EXTS MMDL EXTS MMDL
I
)ACTF )ACTF
]RCMSG PRCPOS
?RCMSG PRCPOS
8 PSG2
PSG
EXI
OD
Blr
No.
391
!F'
Paraneter PSGl,
2
No.
Remarks
Scale factor
PSG2
PSGI
0
I
xl
x2 x4 x8
RSFT
0
0
I
I
0
I
1:
0:
value is entered with a radius value in work coordinate system shift. lD( value is entered with a diameter value in work coordinate system shift. (It is valid only when radius designation XRC=I.)
l'fl(
EXlOD
1:
0:
EXTS
External work coordinate svstem shift function: 1O times the input value to the "ttr""porrds external work zero point offset value. The inpu= value corresponds to the external work zero point offset value
Search by external program No. search (01 to 0999 search) Search by external work No. search (01 to 015 search)
1:
0:
DACTF
1:
0:
Actual speed is displayed on the current position display screen and program check screen. Not displayed.
Modal status is displayed in MDI operation B. Modal status is not displayed in MDI operation B.
On
M}!DL
1: 0:
PRCMSG 1:
0:
PRCPOS
the program check screen, a message fron is displayed. (not available) The remaining motion is displayed
On the program check screen, the absolute coordj-nates are displayed. The relative coordinates are displaved.
PMC
I:
0:
-392-
Parameter No.
Remarks
DSPSUI 0
ADRC
DSP4
DSP3
G6OX
DSPSUi
G604
G6OZ
G6OY
Bit
DSPSUB
No.
0:
not display 5th/6th axis current positions for PMC axis. The axis name is in accordance with the parameters (No. 7130, 7131).
PMC
axis
ADRC
1:
0:
Use ttlil or tfKtr, not ttCtt for the address in chamfering and corner radius (R). For the addresses used for direct drawing dimension prograrnming, use tt,Ctt and ttrRtt (a eonma is put before C and R). For the address in chamfering, corner R, and direct drawing dimension programmingr use ttCtt and |tRtt as
c60x
per the standard specification. (3rd axis cannot be used with address "C".) Specify the approach direction in the unidirectional positioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th in
sequence.
The current position of 3rd and 4th axes is displayed in sequence. l: The present position is displayed. 0: The present position is not displayed.
ADW4O
ADW3O
EACl
EACO
Bit
No.
ADW30, 40
The nane of 3rd and 4th axes is specified in sequence. 1: The name is C and the Y axis control is used. 0: The name is B.
-393-
It, | ,,fr,, ,
l,/rr,tt
",
uoo .
Reuarke
axis control
ConErolled axis
4th axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
I
I
I
0
1
"l,'
Irtr
lllr1,,
l,E
11o.
CNRST
ESFC
ADDCF RTCT
ILVL
TAPM
SDRT
SNRL
l.
n.
rll'r
At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relative coordinate value is cleared. At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relatiye coordinate value is not cleared.
Even in the turning mode (signal COFF is closed) in Cf axis control, the feedback pulse from the position detector becomes effective. The feedback pulse in the turning mode in Cf axis control becomes invalid.
l:
o:
Alt11,
,
t:
tl.
GR2
(DGN
123) of
l'ltl
Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set ro cl18 (standard specif ications) .
address.
(DGN 118)
t;
t|:
tt\,1
In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, c87), the tool returns to R point level in the course of (B type) drilling. In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87), the tool returns by the retract amount in the course (Type A) of drilling.
updated by resetting.
t.
tl.
In the drilling
updated by resetting.
|
In the drilling
^l,ll
t.
lt:
In the tapping cyele, M05 is sent out first when the spindle rotates CW and CCW. In the tapping cycle, I'103 and M04 are sent out when the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
b=
-394-
Parameter No.
SDRT
l.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
IS IS
Remarks
0:
SNRL
The spindle indexing direction by M conmand minus. The spindle indexing direction by M cornrnand
plus.
l.
n.
The spindle indexing rnode is released by resetting. The spindle indexing mode is not released by
resetting.
ROTiO
BLIN
?NGMLK ?NGMLK
LIN4
LIN3
a L
Bit R0Tl0
No. 1:
The parameter unit of JOG feed, cutting feed upper limit speed, rapid FO speed and FL speed for
0:
.BLIN
l.
reference point return at the tine of inch output for Cs axis is I deg/min. The parameter unit is 0. I deg/urin.
n.
PNGMLK
For B8-digit input, the input unit when the decimal point is inputted is 1.000 (metric system) and 1.0000 (inch system) 1.000 regardless of the input unit.
n.
1:
In In
control, machine l-oek shall be intalid. control, machine lock sha11 be valid.
LrN3,4
1: 0:
Selection of linear /rotary axis for 3rd and 4th axls Linear axis
Rotary axis
ACMR
ACMR
LGCM
Blr
ACMR
No.
l. 0: 1:
Optional Optional
CMR
Cl"fi.
LGCM
0:
Low-and high-speed gear changing speed rpm depends on parameter SPDWL (No. 585). l.Ihen gear 3-step is used, low- and medium-speed gears, and medium- and high-speed gears changing speed rpm dpend on parameter SPDIO(L (No.585) and SPDUCT (No.586). Gear changing speed rprn shall be the respective maximum gear speed rpm.
-395-
Parameter No.
NDSP4,
Parameter (UPPer
Remarks
X, Y, Z and 4th Z, \, X, whether the current positions of axes are disPlaYed or not l: The current Position is not disPlaYed. 0: The eurrent Position is displaYed.
Bir
SCR
No.
n.
1:
1:
be 0.001 . The scaling rnagnification incrernent sha1l be 0.0001. The scaling magnification increment shall
GSPC
0:
SCLX, SCLY,
SCLZ
Special G code system "1"11 be C type' Special G code system shall be B type'
Each axis scaling is valid' Each axis scaling is invalid'
1:
0:
Bir No.
PLCOI
be used' 1: A pulse coder of 0'1u detection is to (Va1id for OG onlY) to be used' 0: A pulse coder of b'1u detection is not
SPTPX
to
SPTP4
TypesofpositiondetectoroftheX,Y(Z)'z(ct)andthe fturth axis in this order' as a 1: The separate tyPe pulse coder is to be used detector. be used as 0: The separate type pulse coder is not to a detector.
-396-
Parameter No.
Remarks
In
case of the FOG with 0.1U pulse coder, set the following parameters in units of lU. (The set data is multiplied by ten within the CNC) Paraueter
SERRX (X)
No. 0504
Contents
Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of X axis. Limitation value of position deviaEion amount during movement of Y(Z) axis. Linitation value of position deviation amount during movement ot Z(3) axis. Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of 4th axis. Grid shift amount of the X-axis Grid shift amount of the Y(Z)-axis. Grid shift amount of the Z(3)-axis. Grid shift amount of the 4th axis.
when
0505
SERRY (Z)
0506
0507
0508 0509
05
(x)
(Z) (3)
r0
051i
GRDS4 (4)
DEVFL3 DEC34
8 RSCMDl
Bir
RSCMDl:
DEVFL
1
No.
channel
RSCMD2:
DEVFL2
RSCMD
DEVFL
0
I/O device
used
PPR
0 0
Bubble cassette,
I
0
Floppy cassetEe
Paper tape reader Paper tape reader, etc.
I I
-397-
Parameter No.
FLKY
Parameter (Upper
: T seriesl Lower :
M series)
Remarks
t:
0:
CRT/MDI
CRT /},ID
DEC34:
Changes
return
DEC34
=I
7
:IDEC3
xI9.7
xI9.
5
x16.
*DEC4
xI7 .7
M6TCD
IGIN
IGSK
GRST
TLSK
LCTM
GST2
GSTl
Bit
No.
32
Following is the setring for tool life management.
te
M6TCD
1:
0:
IGIN
IGSK
Regards M06 and the tool group comrnand. Regards M06 and the
same same
block T block T
code
code
as the next
as backnumber.
1:
0:
1:
0:
GRST
Took skip signal is accepted only while the tool life tool is in use. Tool skip signal is always aceepted.
1:
0:
Clears all group executlon data at the tirne of tool reset signal input. (This is the same with when this operation is performed.) Clears execution data only for the group with the nurnber inputted from the outside at the time of tool reset signal input. (Only the group shown by the cursor positi-on when thj,s operation is performed from MDI.)
TLSK
1:
0:
At the time of tool skip signal input, Group No. is also entered. At the time of tool skip signal input, the group eurrently being selected is skipped.
-398-
Parameter
No
Remarks
LCTM
1: 0:
Designates the tool life by tirne. Designates the tool life by frequency. Designate the number of registerable groups in tool group setting.
GST2 0 0
I
1
GSTI /GST2:
GSTl
0
No. of groups
No. of tools/group
rl-
16 32 64
i-16 l8 4
2
t
0
rt coMc
COMC.
r1-
I ././.---*--.,--,^\
LOCC
128
TMCR
TMCR
RWCNT RWCNT
NAMPR NAMPR
0
J/
LOCC
'J <> 'i c) // Does not place 1oca1 variables (/tl to 33) in <vacant> state during resetting. Places local variables (lfl to 33) in <vacant>. state during resetting.
76
.>
s4i,
2r0
i'"i
coMc t:
0:
T},TCR
Does not place conmon varLables (#100 <vacant> state during resetting. P1aces conrmon variables (/1100 to 149)
to 149) ln in
<vacant>
1:
0:
.- RrtefrFl (i.i
*/-/
0:
NAMPR I:
Displays the program name on the program directory display unit. 0: Does not display the program name on the prograu directory display unit.
':
W:
6:
-399-
Parameter
No
Remarks
RIN
Bir RIN
No.
1:
Commands
0:
the coordinate rotation angle by incremental command. Commands the coordinate ro t at i-on angle by absolute
command.
ASTCD
I
I
ASTCD
I
EQCD
{+
EQCD
I
SHPCD
SHPCD
l
Bir No.
ASTCD/EQCD/
7
macro B
432
t
f-
SHPCD:
Set the hole parrern of *, =, /l EIA codes in sequence, using 8-bit data.
HSIF
CLER CLER NUASS CCINP
NUABS
custom
RAL
RAL
RDL RDL
HSIF
Bit HSIF
No.
76543210
14/S/T/B code processing sha11 be a high-speed interface. l{/SlT/B code processing shal1 be a normal interface.
I:
0:
1:
CLER
0:
Selects clear conditions, using the reset button, external reset signal and emergency stop. Selects reset conditions, using the reset button, external si-gna1 and emergency stop.
-400-
Parameter No.
NUABS
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
1:
0:
Returns to the status when the coordinate system is ON with machine lock signal OFF. (Disable) Does not return to the status when the coordinate system is 0N with machine lock signal OFF.
CCINP
1:
0:
In-position width between a feed block and a feed block is set by another parameter (No. 0609 to 0612) (Must not be used) In In-position width is set by nornal parameter.
puncher.
RAI
I: Registers only
0: puncher.
Registers all programs for reading in reader/ Registers a program after all programs are erased for reading in reader puncher interface. The reading is the same as in normal specJ.fication in reader puncher interface.
RDL
l.
0:
GRPOS
IGNAL SBAB
RSTSW
Bit
No. 1:
GRPOS
0:
IGNAL
I-S
only
0TT
1: Even when an alarm occurs on the other tool post, no feed hold status is reached. 0: When an alarm occurs on the other tool post, the feed hold status is selected l: Head 1 is upper on the conmon screen. 0: Head 2 is upper on the conrmon screen. l: 0:
The reset key is valid only for the tool post se lec ted The reset key is valid for both tool posts.
SBAB
only
0TT
RSTSW
only Ofi
-401-
,t
Parameter No.
Remarks
!13LMT
2SP
SEPH
SP2C
TlST
Bir M3LU[
No. 1:
0:
1:
only 0TT The range of the waiting M code is. (Parameter No. 243 value) x (100) to 999. The rane of the waiting 1"1 code is (parameter No. 243 value) x 100 to subsequent 100 pieces.
Two
2SP
0:
SEPII
spindle (Two spindle Two tool post) Single spindle (Single spindle Two tool post)
only only
0TT
t4,
I:
0:
The lst handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent to 1st tool post, and the 2nd handle pulse to the 2nd tool post. The handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent in parallel to both tool posts.
GraphiqS;
0TT
SP2C
1:
0:
TIST
1:
are drawn on a single screen for both posts. tool Graphics are drawn on a separate screen by both tool posts.
Tool post selecting signal is invalid (HEADI only). Tool post selecting signal is valid.
only
0TT
0:
0
0 4 8
*
n
IFE
ITO
IFM
FY1
TYO
,I
'$
,t
Bir
No.
76
54
;
2
.!
ri'
ti'
7
! !,
t
E
-t
-402-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
1 2nd tool post
M series)
Remarks
TYI 00
TYO
TYI 0l
TYO
-d-t*'oot
I
not'
TYI l0
TYO
TYI tl
TYO
IFE
[:
n.
the conditlons for tool post checking are established, no tool post interference is checked. I.lhen the conditioons for tool post checking are established, tool post interference is checked.
Even when
When
ITO
l:
0:
Offset No. 0 is designated by T code, interference check ls contlnued according to the current Offset No. Wtren Offset No. 0 is deslgnated, using T code, tool post interference check 1s lnterrupted until offset No. other than 0 ls designated by the next T code.
-403-
Parameter No.
IFM
Remarks
I:
Tool post interference is checked in the manual mode Tool post interference is not checked in the mnaual
mode.
RDIK
DILK
Bit
No.
FML1O
1:
The rapid traverse rate and cutting feed upper liurit speed parameter increment system shatl be l0 nun/min or I inch/min. ..g) For 100 m/min, the increment system shall be As per normal specifications.
10000.
n.
NPRV
1:
0:
EFML
position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command sha1l be valid. (The per-revolution feed command is converted automatipally to the per-minute feed in CNC.) When no position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command shall be invalid.
Even when no
1O
1.
0:
RDIK
The feedrate command (cutting feed) of control is used by I0 times. Standard specif ication.
pMC
axis
1.
0:
DILK
l.
The high-speed interlock signal sha11 be invalid when the each directional interlock signal goes off. The high-speed interlock signal shall be always
va1id.
0:
The each directional interlock signal shatl be valid only in manual operation. The directional interlock slgnal shall be invalid.
NFED 0 0
5
RSASC] RSASC]
>Lrz
STP2
0 NFED
NFED
RSASd
RSASC]
I
NFED
Blt
No.
-404-
Parameter
Parame t
NFED
No
Remarks
$'{
\
L
When
0:
RSASCI
the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, no feed is output before and after that. When the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, feed is output before and after that..
When
1:
0:
STP2
the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ASCII code is used. When the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ISO/EIA code is used.
Stop
*e 5
l:
interface.
puncher
puncher
IIODIC3
\toDIcz
'IODICY
NODICX 0
BirNo.
NODICX-NODIC6:
For increment systen 1/10, this sets wherfier the decimal point position of the current positLon display of each axis PMC axis control is made identi-cal to increment systen 1/I0 or not.
NODIC
1:
0:
sh.all be the same as in standard specifications, not in accordance with the decimal point position of increment systen 1/10 The current position display of PMC axis control is in accordance with the decinal point position of
increment system 1i tO.
-405-
Parameter
No
Remarks
LBLCD 0 0
5
LBLCD
I
RBLCD
RBiCD
I
Bit
No.
3210
t
:
LBLCD /RBLCD:
The hole pattern of [' ] in EIA code in custom macro B is set by 8-bit data in sequence.
]ROTCA 0
ETX
ASCII ASCII
I
5
?ROTCA
ETX
Bit
PRORCA
No.
10
protocol, protocol For "ororlication protocol, protocol communication
End Code shall be I'ETXrr. End Code shall be "CR".
A
B
I: ao.
0:
1:
is is
used. used.
:
I
EXT
0: ASCII
1:
0:
For all communj-cations except NC data, ASCII code is used For all cornmunications except NC data, ISO code is used.
D]C
il
7
$t'
"
u(\
t t
-406t .t &'b
-_
* ,
Parameter No.
Remarks
Refer to
parameter No. 00040007.
CMRX
0
CMRX
CI,IRZ
I
CMRY
cl'IR3 0
2
CI',IRZ
CMR4
cuR4
When
an optional comand nulttply (No. 0035 4CMR=1) is used, there are 2 types of setting methods as follows.
1)
When
|127z
2)
Note 1) For (2) above, be sure !o set a value such that the coumand rnultiply should be always an integer. Note 2) Set the backlash compensation and pitch error compensation values with detection unit when an arbitrary conutrand rnultiply is used.
-407-
Parameter No.
CMRX, CMRZ,
Remarks
for
X,
Setting
t
2 4
code
I'lultiplier
0.5
I
2
5
l0
20
10.
SPLOW
d
SPLOW
SPLOW
For spifidle speed during constant speed spindle rotation. For spindle speed at gear shift (when parameter No. 0003, GST=I), set as Gear shift spindle speed __ ,^^ x 4095
Maxi-mum
*oaoffi
'
rprn)
THDCH
Width of chambering for thread cutting cycle in Setting range: 0 to I27 (unit : 0.1 lead)
G92.
t s
-408E
.?
t'
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
SCTTIM
M series)
Remarks
SCTTIM
SCTTIM
Set the delay timer for checking. the spindle speed reach signal. This sets the time required from execution of the S function to the beginning of checking the spindle speed reach signal. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: msec) Spindle speed reach signal.
distribution
a
}{BUFl
0
}{BUFl
}{BUF2 0
I,IBUF2
MBUFI,2
Up to two
codes which are not subjected to for the next block can be set. buffering When 03 is set' M03 is not subjected to buffering for the next block.
14
-409-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
PSORGX
M series)
Remarks
PSORGZ
PSORGX, PSORGZ
Grid numbers at the reference point of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: o-255
OFCMP
,3
!j
H4NO+HZNO
tt
0
TLCMP
NUMHG
OFMAX
TLMAX
OFCMP
TLCMD
NU}4HG
OFMAX
value of offset number Setting valuez O - 32 value of tool setting Settingvalue: 0-99
number
TLMAX
Maximum
-4r0-
Parameter No.
HZNO
Remarks
In case of multi-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the Z axis in
spec
1, 2 or
H4NO
In case of rnulti-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the 4th axis specified, Setting valuei settlng l, 2 or
H4NO 3
1S
First digir :
HZNo
(Exanple) When the 2nd manual pulse generator is used for the Z-axis and the 3rd manual' pulse generator is used for the 4th axis.
Setting value.
32
MOLHPG
I I
MOLHPG
},IOLHPG
Multiplier n of the manual handle feed Setting valuez L - 127 Uultiplier n when selection sighal MP2 for the manual hand feed move distance in on, set to 100 as a standard value.
OFSNO
.l
I
I
OFSNO
Setting of tool offset number Ln tool offset value direct input function B (at the setting of work coordinate system shift amount). Setting valuet | - 32
- 4II -
Parameter No.
Remarks
GRPAX
GRPAX=0
GRPAX=6
GRPAX=4
LrJ(fA
=/
(Note) The difference between GRpAX=0, lr 2 and GRPAX=3,4,5 is the difference that the work coordinate system zero point is at chuck side or not.
PSRNQI
5 PSRNQ2
6 PSRNQ3
-4L2-
I
I
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
PSRNQ4
PSRNOI
Set the order of moving to the dry run restart position in program restart of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. Sett.ing value: I - No. of axes (Moves in the order of 1, 2, 3 and 4)
(eg)
When setting to PSRNQ1=2, PSRNQ2=3, PSRNQ3=4 and PSRNQ4=l, the tool moves to the restart
(Note) When all zero, the value out of the setting range or the same value is overlapped on the above parameter for setting, the setting is made automaticallv in the order of 4th - X -\-2.
UPKY
0
UPKY
a
DWNKY
DLINKY
RGTKY
)
RGTKY
LFTKY
0
LFTKY
FWDKY
J
FWDKY
-4r3-
Parameter No.
Remarks
BACKY
KEEHHE
Setting value: I to
Axis /Direc t ion
+x
6
Specify the JOG move axis and direction on the software operatorts panel corresponding to keys.
Setting Value
I
2
-X
+z
-z
+;t
-5
4 5
6
(Exarnple)
when
serri"c
ro *x,
RTDKY
LTUKY
RTDKY=7, LTOKY=8
-4L4-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper:
Remarks
a) In
UPKY,
DWNKY,
case
of T series
RGTKY,
LFTKY
trEHH;.'
Axis, direction
+X
Sets the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to
Setting value
t
2 3
-x
+Z
-z
*"'
b) In
URKY
LTUKY
(Examo 1e )
""..r",
to *x,
ro -x,
H.'
*2,
and
RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4.
of M series
EEtrEtr Eil EE
Axis, direction
+X _X +Y
Set the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to teY?'
Setting value
I
2 3
-Y
+z
4
5
-z
+4
6
1
-4
(Exanple)
When
setting to -X,
to
+2,
and
to -2,
to *X,
to *Y
-4r5-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
I
M series)
Remarks
NSWI
0
NSWI
i
0
2
\
NSW88
J
NSW88
The names of general purpose switches (SIGNAL 0 SIGNAL 7) on the software operatorts panel in the following figure are set as fo1lows.
OPERATOR'S
PANEL 02334 : : : : : : : :
N5678
ON IOFF OFF fON OFF ION ON IOFF ON IOFF I0FF ON 0N IOFF OFF ION
AUTO
-416-
Parameter No.
PRM.
Remarks
No.
140
PRM. No. 141 PRM. No. t42 PRM. No. 143 PRM. No. 144 PRM. No. 145 PRM. No. PRI"I. No.
of
SIGNAL
0 in the
above
figure is set.
Code (071) corresponding to character ttGtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (078) corresponding to character ttNtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (065) corresponding to character ttAtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (076) corresponding to character ttlt' of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (032) corresponding to character tt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
tt
146 L47
Code (048) corresponding to character ttort of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
above figure.
PRM.
No. 0156-0163
No.0164-0171
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 2 {n the above figure. Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 3 in the above figure. Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 4 in the
above figure.
PRM.
No.
OL72-0179
No. 0180-0187
No. 0188-0195 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 in the above figure. No. 0196-0203 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 7 in the above fisure. For character codes, refer to the characters-to-codes table in the next page. Setting value 0 is a space.
-4I7-
Code
Conment
Character
6
7
Code
Comment
l i :
065 066
067 068 069
054
055 056 057
i
t ;
8
9
032
033
tl
Space
F
G
070
071
Exclamation mark
Quotation mark
Sharp
072
073 074 075 076
077
tl
$
o/
i
i,
I
J
K
Dollar
Percent
svmbol
.i I
t
1
&
038 039
Ampersand
L
M
N
Apostrophe
040
041
078
o
P
O79 F
080
081 082 083 084
042
043
Plus sien
Comma
0
R S
044
045
046
047
T
U
085
086
!l
Y Y Z
087
088
089
,|
062
UOJ
uo4
I
2 J
09r
A
052
0s3
4 n
-4rB-
{ .:
I
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
CCLMP
.+
POSTNi
5 POSTN2
6 POSTN3
POSTN4
I
0:
1:
INTPLN INTPLN
G17 G18
2:
CCLMP
is selected with power on. is seleeted with power on. Gl9 is selected with power on. Setting value 00 to
cycle
99
POSTN1
Approach amount for single directi-on posi-tioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axi-s and 4th axis
Setting value 0 to 255 Unit 0.0I m (rnetric output) setring value 0 ro 255 unit 0.001 inch (inch output) Note) In increment systern l/10, the uni-t is the same as above. But the Max. value is 163.
-419-
Parameter No.
Remarks
3 AO\IMDR
AOVMDR:
Mininum deceleration ratio of circular cutting speed inside the automatic override-
Setting range: I to 100% Standard preset value: I Set the mj-nimum deceleration ratio (lDR) when the inside circular cutting speed is changed.
4
AOVOR
AOVCR:
Deceleration ratio of inside corner automatic override. Setting Jange: I to 1001l Standard preset value: 50 Set the inside corner override value.
AOVTH
AOVTH:
Inside judgement angle of automatic override at inside corner part. Setting range: I to 179" Standard preset value: 91
'1
f 1 1
-420-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower':
M series)
Remarks
FIDN
FIDN:
Constant to find the feedrate variations when manual pulse generator is rot.at.ed one scale for Fl digit
command.
AF=
Fmax i 100n
Fmax
when
Set n above. In other words, set the feedrate the manual pulse generator is rotated. Preset value
I to
I27
Frnax i in the above equatlon is the upper linit value of feedrate for Fl digit conmand: set it to parameter Nos. 0583/0584.
trhax
Fmax
1: 2:
Upper Upper
linit linit
MCDCNT
9 MCDCNT
MCDCNT: /
I,Ih_en
E
F:
the preset M*cgqg_ig executed, the total- number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted. Settlng value: l_tg 255 (0 is eguivalent to no setting. 98 and 99 cannot be set.)
i]MGCDO
la
0
i
0
II}IGCDO
UMGCD9
----.-
UMGCD9
.-42L-
Parameter
No
Parameter (UPPer
: T series'
Lower
: M series)
Remarks
UMGCDI:
UMGCD2: UMGCD3: UMGCD : UMGCD5: UI"IGCD6: UMGCDT: UMGCD8: U]'IGCD9:
calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling
G code
custom macro bodY 090 10 custom macro bodY 0901r custom uacro bodY 090r2 custom macro bodY 090r3 custom macro bodY 090I4 custom macro bodY 090I5 custom macro bodY 0901 6 custom macro bodY 090i7 custom macro bodY 090r8 custom macro bodY 090r9
Setting value:
l I
UM{CD5:
UWCD6:
UMMCDT: UMMCD8: iD,IMCDg:
UMMCDlO:
UMMCDIl:
UI'IMCD 12 :
UMMCDI3:
code calling M code calling M code calling M code calling 1"1 code calling M code calling M code calling !1 code calling M code calling U cbde calling
1"1
custom macro bodY 09020 custom macro bodY 0902 I custom macro bodY 09022 custom macro bodY 09023 custom macro bodY 09024 custom macro bodY 090 2s custom macro bodY 09026 custom macro bodY 09027 custom macro bodY 09028 custom macro bodY 09029
Setting value:
006 to
(with M00' no
255
cuscom macro
can be
)
*:,
-422-
't.
Paranoe
ter
No.
Parameter (Upper:
Remarks
UMMCDl
0
UMMCDl
UMMCD2
I
UMI'TCD2
UMMCD3
2 UMMCD3
Set up
UMMCD1: UMMCD2: UMMCD3:
to
M codes
1.1
M code M code
code calling custom macro body 09001 calling custom macro body 09002 calling custom macro body 09003
255
be
I.IAITM:
Setting of the mlnimum value of 3-diglt code which waiting M code (only OTT): Input the 3rd figure as a setting value. Up to 100 waiting M codes are available.
becomes a
only
OTT
Exanple) When the setting value = 5, the lraiting M codes are 500 to 599.
-423-
ifJ+*F.+i-a4
i-{F
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
BRATE2 0
L
5
BRATEz
.-
BMTE2:
BRATE3:
Baud rate when the reader puncher interface is used (valid when setting parameEer Ilo is 2). Baud rate when remote buffer (va1id when setting paramete
F*used
The correspondence between Secting No. and actual baud rate i-s as fol1ows.
SettiFg No. t
2 3
Baud rate
50
r00
110
150
4
5
6
7 8.
POFF TPSUP
TPSUP:
-424-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
BKL9
Spindle backlash
amount
Ln the
Data type: Byte type Set value: O - LZ7 : Detection unit Unit
ehanged.
6
MCODE
MCODE:
M-code
mode
Data
Standard
INPX
setting 20 (netric
INFZ
0
5
I
INPY
INP3
0
5
INPZ
3rd axls Ln-posltion width Settlng value O to 32767 detection unit
:.i
INP3
-425-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
INP4
for X, to
Y,
Setting range:
Position deflection
value
32767
Next block
In-position width In position check is performed when the feed mode changes from rapid traverse to rapid traverse, rapid traverse to cutting feed , or cutting feed to rapid traverse.
SERRX
4 SERRX
SERRZ
5
SERRY
SERR3
6
SERRZ
SERR3
3rd axis position deviation linit value Setting value 0 to 32767 detection unit
ril
-426-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
series)
Remarks
r
SERRX,
SERR4
SERRY, SERRZ,
SERR4
Lirnitation value of position deviation amount during movenent for X, Y, Z and 4th axis' resPectively. serring range: 0 to 32767 (detection unit)
(Exarnple) When the rapid traverse rate and the position gain is 30, calculated by:
is
s=-IConversion of 10 u/nin. into pulses/sec. with the detecEion unit of 1u/pulse gives 166,666 pulses/sec. Therefore, E = L66,665/30 - 5'555 pulses.
G
Multiply this value by a factor of 1.5' and set the obtained value 8333 as the
paraueter.
GRDSX
8 GRDSX
a
GRDSZ
GRDSY
.!
GRDS3
U
n
GRDSZ
GRDS3
unit
I
GRDS4
GRDSX, GRDSY,
GRDSZ,
GRDS4
Setting of grid shift amount of X axis, Y axis, Z axis and 4th axis respectively. serring range 0 to +32767 (detect unit). Wtren the reference !'oint is shiftefiTte slgn of
this parameter is
necessary.
-427-
<;;llP
Parameter No.
11
series)
Remarks
(i)
Reference point return procedure Select manual continuous feed mode, and turn signal ZRN on (connect it with +24V) ' When feed towards the reference poi-nt is designaEed with the manual feed button, the moving part of the machine Doves at rapid traverse. When the deceleration limit switch is operated and the contact of reference point return deceleration signal ttDCX, *DCY, i<DCZ, *DC4 opens, and the feed is decelerated. Thereafter, the moving part moves at a Predetermined low sPeed. Thereafter, when the deceleration lirnit switch is operated and the rnoving Part reaches the
electric grid position, feed stops, and reference point return completion signal ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 is outPut. The direction in which an axis is returned to reference point can be set for each axis. Once an axis is returned to reference point and the corresponding signal ZPX, ZPY' ZPZ ot Z{4 is output, jog feed for that axis is invalid until signal ZRN is turned off'
Lock condition
ffi---
+X
/one rotation sisnal I / after *DCX is iurned \
I
V
*DCX
\r
o
tr
t
pL
No.0534)
\
PX
'IDCX
ON
criollllllllllt
(One.rotation signal)
'ii
-428-
{_
.i
Parameter No.
series )
PSANGN 0
I
6 PSANGN
PSANGN
Sets the data for adjusting the gain of constant surface speed control. (analog output) This seEs the data for gain adjustment in analog output' setting range: 700 to 1250 Standard setting value: 1000 (Adjusting nethod) (1)- Set the standard setting value 1000' (2) Designate the maximum S analog value (fOVl ' (3) Measure the outPut voltage. (4) Set this value according to the following
formula. lfeasured voltage (V)
i0
1000
= setting value
(5) After setting the Paramqter.' designate the maximum S analog value (10V) again, and make sure that the outPut voltage is 10V.
LPGIN
0
5
I
LPGIN
LPGIN
Setting of servo loop gain in position control' Setting range: t to- 9i99 (unit: 0.01 sec-1) Note) To set a loop gain to each axis, set No' 5L7 to 0 and set a loop gain of X axis, Yaxis and so on. (The increment system is the same' )
RPDFX
Standard
setting
3000
8 RPDFX
RPDFZ
r.l
RPDFY
-429-
; ,{aE}F.
Parameter No.
Remarks
0
RPDFZ
RPDF4 PPNFY
RPDFY,
RPDF/32,
RPFD4
Setting 30 to 30 to Note i)
range
24000 Unit mm/nin (mno output) 9600 Unit 0.1 inch/min (inch output) Set rrl'r to the FML10 of parameter No. 49 for the other seting values. Note 2) In increment system 1/10, the unit is the
same.
'F
LINTX
LINTX
LINTZ
0
5
LINTY
LINT3
0
5
L
LINTZ LINT3
3rd axis linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (for rapid traverse) Setting value 8 to 4000 Unit msec
-430-
Parameter No.
Par'ameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
LINT4
Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn during rapid
msec.)
THRDT
cycle (G92). Setting range: I to 4000 (unit: msec.) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in combination with the parameter THDFL (pararneter No. 0528)
FEDIO(
FED}fl( FED}fl(
rnn/rnin (m outPut)
Note 1) Set 'r1" to the FMLI0 of parameter No. 49 for the other cutting values. Note 2) In increment system the unit is the same.
THDFL 0
5 2
THDFL
value (FL) of X axis acceleration/ deceleration in thread cutting cycle. (G92) Setting range 6 to i5000 unit: nm/rnin (rnm output) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch output) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in consideration of the parameter No. 0526.
Note 1) In incrernent systen the unit is the
same.
See
parameter
No. 0526
-43r-
Parameter No.
Remarks
9 FEEDT
FEEDT
Time constant of the exponential acceleration/ deceleration in cutting feed and jog feed. Setting range: 0 to 4000 unit: msec Set this to tt0tt, when the exponential accelerati-on/ deceleration is not used.
FEDFL 0
5
3
0 FEDFL
FEDFL
The lor.rer lirnit of feed rate in exponential acceleration /deceleraE ion. SeEting range 6 to t5000 unit: mu,/min (nrn output)
6 to 6000 unit: 0.I inch/nin (inch output) Note)rIn increment system 1/10, the unit is the
same.
SPALW
r'.
!
'1 l/
I
-,
;'-----0
5
/ f--'1:--T--1
J
1
CYCR SPALW
Tolerance (g) at which the actual spindle speed is regarded to reach the command value in the detection
CYCR
of soindle function. Setting range: I to 100 (7") (For constant surface sPeed control) Setting of relief amount in canned cycle G73 (high speed peck drilling cYcle) Setting range: 0 to 32767 unit: 0.001 mn ., / (rnrn input) 0 to 3/767 unit: 0.0001 inch
trf,iii.-i;p'u11
-J
=:=
.,
CYCD
SPLMT
indicated in the detection of spindle fluctuation. Setting range: I to 100 (%) (For constant surface speed control)
speed
-432-
Parameter No.
CYCD
Rernarks
drilling cycte)
O
input)
(inch input)
Note) In increment
same.
RPDFL 0
5 3 3 RPDFL
RPDFL
(Cornrnon to all axis) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: mr/min (mr output) 6 to 6000 unir: 0.1 inch/nin (inch ourpur)
ZRNFL 0
5
J
4 ZRNFL
I
ZRNFL
Low feed speed at reference point return (FL) (Cornmon to all axes) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: rmn/min (mr output)
6 to 6000 unit:
same.
BKLX 0
5 3
BKLX
BKLZ 0
5
J
BKLY
-433-
n+rq'
'ffi*ffftf*
Et,
Parameter No.
Parameter
Remarks
BKL3
0
5
BKLZ
BKL4 BKLX,
I)I\LZ / I t
of X, Y, Z and 4th
0.001 nm
(rnm
axes,
BKL3IZ
BLK4
0.000I inch (lnch output) progranming, set the value of X axis In diameter i-n diameter va1ue. (For T series) Note I) Unit becomes l/tO in increment system LlL}. t
GRIO
GR2O GR3O
output)
3-stage gear
Low
Remarks
Hieh
l'liddle
Hieh
t.
i;
l0v
Voltage (NC) corresponding to the upper limit of the spindle motor rPm
GR2O
(GR2q
, A x 76t5
vmin
*?ffi
lBf V*""
(S code input)
*?0ff
Vmux
Note 2) Set a backlash compensation value with a detection unit when an arbitrary command
multiply is used.
-434-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T seri-es,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
The following values are first. set in the parameters . Constant Vmax regarding the upper limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 542). This constant is obtained by the equation below.
The upper
Vmax
= 4095 x
spindle motor rpm The spindle motor rpm when the command voltage is 10 V
lirnit of
the
. Constant Vmin regarding the lower limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 543)
Vglin = 4095
x
The lower linit of the soindle motor rDm The spindle motor rpm when the comrnand voltage is 10 V
. Spindle rpm A with low gear whei-the comnand vifltage is l0 V (parameter No. 541) . Spindle rpm B with high (or middle) gearwhen the corrnand voltage is 10 V (parameter No. 539) . Spindle rpm C with high gear when the command volEage is I0 V (parameter No. 555) (3-stage gear) (Note) If the sPecified voltage exceeds the allowable input voltage for the spindle drive system' rpu at l0 V is assumed by proportional calculation, and the resultant assumption should be used.
From above, the spindlJ'motor rotation conrmand (0 - 10 V) and the gear selectj-on command (GR30, GR20, GRl0) are outPut for the specified S code, as shom in the Fig. above.
J TU
L\,
GRHYJ,\
SPDLC
Sets the spindle speed offset compensation value, that is, compensation value of zero offset of spindle speed command voltage. (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: 0 to +8191 (unit: VELO)
Maximum
GRH}IA.X
spindle speed (for analog output with spindle funct,ion) at high gear (intermediate gear in case of 3-stage gear).
(Spindle speed with spindle speed voltage of Setting range: I to 19999 (unit: rpm)
10V)
i
I
--'{'+Tc
e{4ilEF:
Parameter No.
Remarks
0
GRHMIN
GRI'fl(2
I
GRLMAX
GR}D{3
SPDMAX
GR}D(4 0
5
SPDMIN
ae
GRI'D(I
The spindle speed corresponding to gears I to when the spindle speed command is lOV. (for constant surface speed control) Secting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rpn) /
when using
GRHMIN
Setting of the lower limit of the spindle speed high speed gear. (Medium speed gear in 3-step gear selection) (for S analog output type B) (for S analog output) Setting range: I to L9999 (unit: rPn) Setting of the max. spindle speed at low speed gear (for S analog outPut). Set the spindle speed when the velocity command voltage is 10V. Setting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rPm) Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) of spindle motor 4095 Setting value Upper limit llax. spindle motor speed x Setting range: I to 4095 Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) Setting value = Lower limit of spindle motor X +uY] Setting range: I ro 4095
GRLMAX
SPDMAX
SPDI'TIN
-436-
.{
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper
: T series,
DRFT3
Lower
M series)
Rem:aft5
i i
I
1
DRFT3
Set a compensation value for drift generated in the Cs-axis servo loop. Setting value 0 to +8191 Unit VELO The value of this parameter changes automatically during the automatic compensation.
JOGFL
(+
JOGFL JOGFL
of jog feed in exponential acceleration/ deceleration (FL) Setting range 6 co 15000 unit: nrn/min (mm oucpur) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/min (inch output)
Note) In increment systen 1/10, the unit is
srme.
Ehe
FINT FINT
AUTO rnode
at turning
po\.rer
Setting range 6 to 15000 unic: mn/rnin (uru input) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch input) (Generally, set ttO" to this parameter and change it by program command. When the feedrate i.s constant and it is not necessary to change, set the feedrate to this paraDeter. )
SEQINC 0 0 SEQINC SEQINC
Setting range:
-437-
,*rf,l|;F*
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
LOI^lSP
Lower
M series)
Remarks
LOWSP
in constant surface
rpm)
speed
BRATEO
This sets the baud rate when the rea_d_e-{puncher interface is used. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0. )
Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:
Settiff
I
2 3
value
Baud rate
50 100
110
4
5
6
7
B
480096 00
2400
-438-
Parameter No.
Remarks
BRATEl
This sets the baud rate r^/hen the reader/puncher ,-\ interface is used. (Effective when the setting paraaeter I/O is i.;,/
Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:
Setting value I
2 3
Baud rate
50 100 110
1)
'k
".t* |. ?
a
4
5
6
7
n/*
ln
-24Sq
l',.2
0
5 5 5
-<-jJgaq) f e600 \
GRTMAX GRTMAX
Setting of the max. spindle speed at high speed gear in 3-step gear selection (for S analog output) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
SCLMP
GRTMIN
SCLMP
Upper linit of spindle speed (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: I to f9999 (unlt: rpn) (Valid both in G96 and G97 rnodes.)
when using
GRTMIN
Setting of the'lower timit of.rhe spindle high speed gear in 3-step gear selection. (For S analog output type B) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
speed
-439-
F,
Parameter No.
Remarks
CRCDL
CRCDL
I{hen tool moves along the outside of an acute angle close to 90" during tool nose radius compensation (T-system) or cutEer compensation (M-system) limitations on ignoring a small movement
amount.
(AY)
If AX < CRCDL and AZ(AY) < CRCDL, the smal1 movement is ignored. This prevents the workpiece from being affected by sEopping the tool at the
corner.
ACALFL
0
5
5
ACAIFL
ebmpensation function (common for a1I axes) ' Setting range: 0 to 15000 unit: rnrn/min (mrn input) 0 to 6000 unit: 0. I inch/min (inch input)
-440-
Parameter No.
Remarks
RPDJX
RPDJZ 0
5 o
0 RPDJY
RPDJ3 0
5 6
1
RPDJZ
RPDJ4
RPDJX,
RPDJZ/Y,
PFDJ3 /2, RPDJ4
4th axis in turn. Setting range: 30 to 24000 unit: 30 to 9600 unir: If 'r0rr is set to these of parameEer No. 0518,
used. Note 1) Set Note 2)
JOG
0. I inch/nin (inch output) parameters, the set vd.lues 0519' 0520 and 0521 are
the FML10 of parameter No. 49 to I for the other setting values. In increment systern l/10, the unit is the
same.
JOGF JOGF
JOG
feed rate when the rotary switch position is I0 in feed rate B specification: Setting value I to 2000 Unit mrn/rnin. deg/nin
(Metric ouEput) Setting value I to 800 Unir 0.1 inch/min deg/nin (Inch output)
Note) In increment system 1/10, the unit is rhe
same.
-44r-
i6;aar*ii,'.
- .....*"crl|ff;F
Parameter No.
Remarks
(eg) When 200 is set to Parameter No. 565: Feed rate becomes geometrlcal series of 200 rnm/min (for rnetric output) or 20 inch/rnin (for inch output) in rotary SW position 10.
Rotarv
los iEion
SW
conditions
hrhen parameter
OVRI=
When parameter
o o
mrn/
inch/
r0
rnn/
inch/
min.
25 35
min.
I
2 3
o o o o o o o o o
o o o o
o
t.0
t4
20 27 37 52 72
t.4
2.O
49
68
4
5
6
7
2.7 3.7
9s
o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o
2.0
t32
r83
250
5.2 7.2
3.0
8
9
o o o o o
o o o
o
o
100 140
t0.0 r4.0
5.0
3s0
490 bdu 950
E
I1
L2
@
270
8.0
rl.0
15. 0
27 .O
o
o
370
520
37.0 57.0
7
l3
L4 15
o
o
r320
I 830
2
o o o
720
2.0
r000
500
100.0
(Note) O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact is open, and Ehe blank shows that it is closed.
-442-
Parameter No.
Parameter
Remarks
5 JOGFAD
JOGFAD
feed rate when rotary SW position is 10 for the additional axis (rotary shaft) in feed rate B specification Setting value 1 to 2000 unit: deg/nin (eg) When 200 is set to parameter No. 566: Feed rate becomes geometrical series of 200 deg/nin in rotary switch position 10.
JOG
Rotarv
Pos t_OVRI=0
SI.I
conditions
When parameter OVRI=I
Manual
I{hen parameter
contin
uous
tion
0
1
feed *ov8 *0v4 *0v2 *ovi *ov8 *ov4 *0v2 *ovl rate
o o
o
o o o o o o o
deg/nir
10
o o
2
3 4
L4
o o o o o
o o
o o
20
ro
27 37
5 6
7
o
o
52 72
o o o
o
8
9
r00
140
o o
o
o o o
o o o
o
o
tr
ll
L2
@
?7i
370 520
o
o o
o
o
l3
l4
l5
o o
o
o
o o o
720 r000
(Note l)
Note
2
O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact Ls open , and the blank shows that it is closed. In increment s stem I 10, unit is the same.
-443-
Parameter
No
Remarks
FEDMAD
FEDMAD
Upper lirnit of feed rate of all axes in case of feed rate B specification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/rnin (rotary axis) 6 to 15000 unit: mm/rnin (mrn outPut) 6 to 15000 unit: inch/min (inch output)
same.
RPDFLAD
RPDFLAD
of rapid traverse override for the axis in case of feed rate B specificaadditional F tion. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/min
Note) In increment systen t/tO, unit is the
same'
ZRNFLAD
ZRNFLAD
at reference point return of the additional axis in case of feed rate B sPecification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/nin
Note) In incremeht svstem 1/10' uniE ls the
same.
SPDLC
SPDLC
compensaEion value for zeto offset of speed command voltage (for 54l55 digits
option)
VELO
-444-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
SLPG},I1
Lower
M series)
Remarks
0
AOVLE
AOVLE:
override at inside corner Part. serting range: I to 3999 Unit: 0.1rnn - Metric inPut 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Le.
SLPGM2 0
5
AOVLS
AOVLS:
override at inside eorner. Setting range: 1 to 3999 Unit: 0.1 rnur'- Metric inch 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Ls.
SLPGI'13
I
SLPGM4 0
5
F1DMAXl
SLPGIN
0 5
F1DMAX2
FIDMAX1
FID}4AX2:
FIDT'IAXI: FID}(AX2:
-445-
!G
Parameter No.
Remarks
Setting value: 0 to 15000 unit I mrn/min (Metric output) I to 6000 unit 0.1 inch/rnin (Inch output) For deviation, refer to parameter No.
SLPGM
{ i
216.
-4
4 in sequence. Setting value = 2048 x (E/L) x a x 1000 where: E = Voltage when spi-ndle motor is rotating at 1000 rpro (V) L = Angle per spindle motor rotation (normally 360) s = Detecting unit (deg)
Spindle loop gain Setting value I to 9999 Unit 0.01 (l/sec)
SRPDFL
SLPGIN
)
SPDI"DI
SRPDFL:
Minimum speed
of spindle rapid feed override Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deg/nin
(FO)
SPD}fiL:
Sets the spindle speed rpm when low- and high-speed gears are changed over. Or set the spindle speed rpm when 1or.r- and medium-gears (3-step gears are used) are changed over Set Spindle changing speed Spindle max. speed
4095
Setting value: 1 to
4095
-446-
t.''-_
ii
_i
Parameter No.
: M serles)
Remarks
5. ll tt I t I I
t 1
6
SPD}O(H
SZRNFL:
s,q
Sets the spindle motor speed rpn at the time of medium- and high-speed gear change when 3-s tep gears are used. Set Spindle changing sp_eed rpm x Spindle nax. sPeed
4095
F-fl
r -.
0
5
F"t
'i
Setting value: 1 to
8
7
4095
'*
MORT
t
+l
i.a
t
i
MORT
I 1
$
-I
MSRES
1'
MSRES
G F:.'E
G',1'
\I
n I' MSINDX
$:
M-code inlrial
Setting value 06 to
#
MSDEG
{9.
MSDEG
Baslc rotatlon angle for M-code lndexlng Settlng value I to 60 Unlt deg
*l
t.i
fG
-447-
itffie:'
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
PDWEL
M series)
Remarks
PDWEL
Dwell time at the tiure of C-axis unclamp the drilling cycle Setting value 0 to 32767 Unit msec
command
in
PECKC
PECKC
Setting of return amount (d) for peck drilling in the drilling cycle Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.001 uun (l'le tric input) Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input) Note) Ifiit b.cor""
1/ 10
STPEX
STPEZ
STPEY
STPE4 0
5
9
STPE4 qTDFY
Z, 3,
h'
Y,
4
Position error i inrit rral-ue during X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, 3rd axis and 4th axis stop in seqr-re;:ce Setting value 0 to 32767 Detecting unit
---*
&
t
-448-
;
t-
I I
I
-t.
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
PCHK
series)
Remarks
J
0 5
9
PCI{K:
in
oply
0TT
TLCNEC
TLCNEG:
No.
PARTRQ
0
PARTRQ
PARTRQ:
9eqs--llrg number
Setting value
of
0_ rg_
machined 99pj
parts required.
PEXPJX
0
6
I l-
PEXPJX
PEXPJZ 0
o
PEXPJY
PEXPJ3
6
PEXPJZ
-449-
I;rF
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
PEXPJ4
M series)
Remarks
PEXPJ4 PEXPJX-
PEXPJ4:
Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant sequentially in manual feed. Setting value 0 to 4000 Unit: msec When no exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, set them to 0.
PFLJGX
0
5
PFLJGX
PFLJGZ
0
6
PFLJGY
PFLJG3
0
6
PFLJGZ
PFLJG4
0
6
PFLJG4
PFLJGXPFLJG4:
Unit: Unir:
rn/min
inch/min
INPDX
0
6 q
INPDX
INPDZ
0
o
INPDY
-4so-
ParameEer No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Rem:rks
INPD3
0
6
I
INPDZ
INPD4
0
6
INPD4 INPDZ
to
INPD4
Sets the in-position width between a feed block a feed block. (Must not be used) (Valid when parameter No. 45 CCINP=l)
and
POFF
TPFDT
TPFDT:
Time constants of spindle and Z-axis aeceleration/ decelerati-on in Ehe tapping in the rigid mode
turned off
(Exponential/linear type is selected by TPSUP.) The threading accuracy is affeeted when the time constant is either too long or too short. ' Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-4000 : msec UniE Standard setting: 200 - 150
POFF
TPFFL
TPFFL:
(valid only when TPSUP = 0) at exponential acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and Z-axis in the rigid tapping. When this is increased, lact time is reduced, but the threading accuracy is affected. Data Eype: Word type Setvalue: 6-15000 : rnm/min Unit
Srandard
settlng:
30
10
-45r-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
POFF
TPLPG
TPLPG:
Spindle and Z-axis Position control loop gain in the rigid tapping. This has a large influence uPon the threading accuracy. Make fine adjustment to obtain the optimurn value by perforrning the cutEing test and matching wiEh the loop gain multiplier. Data type: Word tYPe Set value: I - 9999 -l : 0.01 msec Unit set value: 1500 - 3000 Standard
turned off
POFF LPGM9
LPGM9:
of the spindle in the rigid tapping for the high speed range. This has a large influence upon the thread accuracy. Make fine adjustment Eo obtain the optimum value by peiforming the cutEing test and natching with the loop gain. Data type: Word tYPe Setvalue: I-32767 Calculation = 2048 * E/L * G * 1000' E = Speed comrnand voltage at 1000 rpn L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection uniE Calculation example: trr4ren the configuration is as shown Position in the left drawing: coder E = 1.667 [V]
(motor
SPINDLE
I\'lOTOR
L =
of
6000 rpm
at 10 tvl)
(Spindle is rotated one turn bY one spindle motor rotacion. ) p = la/4096 = 720" 14096 = 0.17578'
La = 720" (Spindle must make two rotations = 360o * 2 for rot.ating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation
360"
l:l;2
-452-
Parameter No.
Gea
serie s )
r ratio
cod er
I I I I
0.17578
1000
= L667
Note) Do not ml-ss to set the gear ratio parameter (No. 0028) between the spindle and the position coder. Decide the detection uniE based on thi-s
parameter.
POFF
TPS}'(
TPSMX:
Maximum
tapping. Data type: Word type Set value: spindle: position coder gear ratio 1: t 0 - 7400
,\"
turned off
l:2 1:4
1:8
t..
Unit
1r'
000-
3600
TPIPZ
TPIPZ:
Setvalue:
l-32767
-453-
G.*96
4{
,fi
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
.: t I
*
9
.x
INP9
I
I
t
INP9:
I
:
Spindle in-position width in the rigid tapping I,'{ren this is too much increased, the threading accuracy is affected. Data type: I^lord type SeEvalue: 0-32767 Unit : DeEection unit Standard setting: 20
.n
:I
:
*
0
TPERZ
TPERZ:
Linit value of position deviation during Z axis in the rigid tapping rnode Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767
Unit
movement
a one-tenth resolution det.ector is used, the unit becomes Een times the detection unit.
When
DetecEion
unlt
-4s4-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
I
TPER9
t
TPER9:
Limit value of position deviation during novement of the spindle (5th axis) in the rigid mode tapping
Data type: Word type Set. value: o - 32767 Calculation = S x 360/60
S:
Maximum
rigid
G:
G:
Spindle:
tapping (Value of paraneter No. 0517) Axis loop gain in the rigid node tapping (Value of parameter No. 06f5) Detection type Position coder Gear ratio
x l/G x l/G x
100
1.5
Calculation example:
G ...
0313deg
s . ..
@...
3600 3000
0.17578
(Gear
TPER5 =
(3600
coder l: 2)
ratio
TPESZ
TPESZ:
Limit value of posiEion deviation during stop of Z axis in the rigid node tapping Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767 Unit : Detection unit
Standard
setting:
500
ril
.ll
if;
jl
il
.t
'l
I
-45s-
FF?9.8!{4S':.
q
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
TPES9
TPES9:
LimiE value of position deviation during stop of the spindle in the rigid mode tapping Data type: Word type Unit : Detection unit Standard value: 500
ttPoFFtt means that power should be
Setvalue:
0-32767
POFF
LGM9M
turned off
LGM9M:
Spindle loop gain rnultiplier in the rigid rnode tapping for rniddle gear. (Set when one or more gears are used). Data type: Word type l-32767 setvalufi Calculation = 2048 x E/L x G x 1000 E = Speed command voltage at 1000 rpra L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection unit Calculation example: trrlhen the configuration is as shown
SPINDLE MOTOR
in the left drawi-ng: E = 1.667 [V] (motor of 6000 rpm ar 10 [v]) L = 720"
G=
T^ Ld-
(Spindle makes two rotaEions when spindle motor rotates one turn. )
= 0.17578"
(Spindle must make two rotations=360"x2for rotating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation Loop gain multiplier = 2048 * * 1.667 |TZO x 0. 17578 * 1000 = 833
2A"
-456-
-t
i
J
J
i
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
POFF
LGM9H
turned off
Spindle loop gain nultiplier for high speed gear in the rigid tapping. (Used for 3-srage gear).Data type : Word type Setring value: I to 32767 (Note) Refer to parameter formula.
No
ERR9
ERR9:
Spindle position deviation value in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : DeEection unit
IPL9
IPL9:
Spindle distribution amount in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : Detection unit
-457-
a=,$*8*.
i'+'
il
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
LTIXl
M series)
Remarks
LTlXI
1
,.
LTTZI
0 0 I
I
;
i
1
LTiYI
.t
.,
LTIZl
LTI41
LTlX2
0 0
4
LT 1X2
LTIZ2
0
7
LTlY2
LTLZ2
LTI42
-4s8-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
Lrlnll
TI-
nth top in
axis
.)v
2
)-t
Set stroke lirnit mentioned above. Serring amount 0 to *999ggggg (unit: 0.001 rnrn in mm output or 0.000I Tnch in inch outpuL) Set with the distance from the reference poLnt. In the case of diameter designation, set the X axis with the diameter designation value. (For OT) The outside of the boundary set with the Parameter is set as the inhibited region. Normally, set at the max. stroke of the machine.
the axis enters the inhibited region' overtravel alarm is indicated. A margin should be provided with respect. to the stroke to cope wi-th ' the fluctuation in the detecting operation. As a rule, in the case of metric designation, multiply the rapid traverse by a factor of 1/5 and set it as the margin.
When
10x115=2nm
differs from the position stored in the CNC unit after the power is turned on, emergency stop is reset' or servo alarm is reset. Therefore, before starting operation, be sure to return Ehe axes to reference point. Otherwise, overtravel detecting position deviates by the value corresponding to the above-described deviation in the position.
LTI
Axis
(Exarnple) LTIZI =
name
-1
and LTIZZ
becomes
infinite.
(Note 1) For the axis whose stroke is infinite, the incremental command can be specified. If the absolute co-mand is specified, the absolute register may overflow and it is not operated normallY. (Note 2) These parameters cannot be set for the rotary axis.
(Note 3) Unlt becomes 1/10 tn increment system 1/10.
-459-
d
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorver : M series)
I
Remarks
'+
{
0
7
PRSX PRSX
'1
PRSZ
PRSY
PRS3
0
PRSZ
AC
PRS4
PRSX, PRSY,
PRSZ,
PRS4
These set the coordinate values of the reference point of the X, y, Z and 4th axes when automatic coordinate system setting is conducted, respec tive ly. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unir: 0.001 rnrn (mm inpur) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inpur) Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in incremenr systen 1/lO.
sfs
-460-
Pararneter No.
Remarks
SPTIME
2
PECINTX
PSGRDX
U
PECINTY
PSGRDZ
I
PECINTZ
PECINT4
SPTIME
Tine (P) when starting rhe spindle speed fluctuation after the comanded speed is not reached a certain time. Serting range: 0 to ggggggg (unit: r"".)' Pitch error compensation Lnterval for each axis Setting range 8000 to 99999999 unir: 0.001 m (m inpur) 4000 to 99999999 unir: 0.000f inch (inch inpur)
Note 1) It zero is set, no compensation is done. Note 2) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/iO.
PECINTX,
PEXINTY, PECINTZ,
PECINT4
PSGRDX,
PSGRDZ
Grid width of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 ro 99999999 unit: 0.001 nn unit:
(run output) 0.001 inch (inch ourpur)
In order to output the position signal securely without any skip when each axis moves at the maximum setting value 24 m/min of the rapid traverse speed, the grid width must be set to be more than 6400.
Note) Unit
becomes 1/10
-461-
F.
rr
I t
t t r
[,
I
Parameter No.
Remarks
MRCCD
U
MRCCD
G72.
MRCDT
Relief amount in multiPle repetitive cycle G7l' Gl2. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0. 001 rnm (rnetric input) | 6 9v999999 unit: 0.0001 ineh (inch input) Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10.
PESCX
PESCZ 0
2
DFC'Y
PESCZ
Relief values in X and Z directions in rnultiple repetitive cycle G73, respectively. Setting range: I to *99999999 unit: 0.001 nn (mm input) 1 ro 1999 99999 uni-t : 0 . 0001 inch (inch input) Note) Unit becomes t/t0 in increment system 1/10.
'462-
Parameter No.
Remarks
PATIM
PATIM
Number G73.
cyc1e.'
GROVE
C75
3
t
THRPT
of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76. Setting range: I to gggggggg
Number
THANG
TIIANG
Tool nose angle in nultiple repetitive cycle Setting value: 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, g0
G76.
-453-
F.
f.r
ti
Parameter No.
Remarks
THCLM
THCLM
l"linimum G76.
depth of cut in multiple repetitive cYcle 0.001 nnn (nmr input) 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
Unit
becornes 1/ 10
TT{DFN
Setting ?.ttg"
0.00I
Note) Unit
I{IMAX
Sets the tolerance value of tool wear offset incremental input. Setting range: I to 999999 unit: 0.001 run (nur input) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
Note)
-464-
Parameter No.
Remarks
WOMAX
Sets the uaximum of the tool wear offset value. Setting range: I to 9999999 unlt: o.ool m (m inPut) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch input) (Check together with pararneter No. 0728 in the case of incremental input)
0
PROTAG
MIRSS
Used for mirror image for opposite tool post. This parameter sets the distance between the tool posts in the shifting of coordinate system. Setting range: I to 9999999 unit: 0.001 m (m output)
unit:
is present at coordinate rotation. Setting value: unlt: 0.00I deg. -360000 to 360000
CANMAX
command
I
PSCRT
GANMAZ
-465-
Parameter No.
GAN]"IAX,
GANMAZ
Remarks
The value of e on the X ar.d Z axes in the automatic tool compensation function' respectively. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0.001 uun (mn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
Parameter of magnifLcation value used when no rnagnification command is present in scaling. Setting value: I to 999999 (Unit depends on parameter) Unit: x0.001, x0.00001
EPCX
EPCZ
EPCX,
EPCZ
The value of e on the X and Z axes, in the autornatic tool compensation functi-on, respectively. Setting range: L to 99999999 unit: 0.001 nun (urn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
REF2X
REF2Z
0
REF2Y
-465-
GF
Parameter No.
Remarks
REF2Z
REF24
REF2X, REF2Y,
REFZZ,
REF24
Distance from the reference polnt to the 2nd reference point for X, Y, Z, and 4th axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unit: 0.001 rnm (mm ourpur) O to Tgggggggg unir: 0.0001 inch (incir output) 0 to ;9999999 unit: 0.001 deg (rotary a*il)
ABSXP
ABSZP 0
l
0
ABSYP
F,
I
ABSZP
ABSZP,
ABS4P
absolute pulse coder is used. These parameters are automatically set when the tool has ret.urned co the reference point. So it is not necessary to set values to these paiameters.
-467-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
TLSXP
M series)
Remarks
LT2X1
TLSXY
0
7
LT2YI
TLSZP
0
7
{+
LT2ZI
TLSZM 0
7
q
LT24I
LT2Xl
0
7
LT2X2
LT2ZI
0
1
LT2Y2
0
7
LT2Z2
LT242
LT2X2
5
I
EXOFS
-468-
;l
Parameter No.
Remarks
LT222
0
5
a
EXOFS2
LT2
FF
T
'
Apex No.
of square area Represents the axis Set the stroke limit represented above. Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001
Setting value
0
to +99999999 Unir
(l"letric output)
urn
Set the stroke lirnit by the distance from the reference point. For the designation of dianeter, set X-axis sith the diameter.designated value. Use parameter INOUT (No. 24) to set the forbidden area to the inside or outside.
Note) Unit becoines l/t0 in increment system l/10.
TLSXP TLS)O{ TLSZP TLSZM
(Zrn)
value.
X axis
surface
Z axis
,J
X axis
,_1)
contact surface
-469-
T
I
T
Parameter No.
Remarks
,?
LT2XI
Check stroke lirnit using these parameters, not parameter Nos. 0700 to 0707 when EXLM2 (G129.6) LT242: (M series) signal is ON.
j
t .,
;
LM2=1
J
EXOFS3
4 EXOFS4
EXOFSI
External work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and th-axis in sequence. Setting value 0 to +7999 Unit 0. 001 rmn (Metric output) serring lalue 0 to +7999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output)
Note) Unit becoures 1/10 in incrernent system 1/10. This parameter sets the zero-point position of work coordinate system (G54 to G59). The work zeropoint offset amount is different for every work coordinate system, but this parameter sets the offset amount colnmon to all work coordinate systems. Normal1y, machine-side input (external data input) is used for automatic settl-ng.
ZOFlSl
PECINTX
U
ZOFlS2
PECINTZ
0
7
ZOF
S3
-470-
Parameter No.
series)
PECINT3
0
7
zoFls4
PECINT4
0
7
ZOF2S
zoE2s2
t
zoF2s3
zoF2s4
-4
zoFlsl
1st work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs4)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 mm (Metric output) setting value 0 ro +99999999 unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Normally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/10.
-47r-
Parameter
PECINTX, PECINTZ, PECINT3, PECINT4:
No.
3
Q
Remarks
1it
*
.
ZOF2S
-4
Setting value: hrlren the radius is designated 8000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 4000 - 99999999 (Inch outPut) Ilowever' set in diameter value for the diameter designated axis. hhen the diameter is designated I6000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 8000 - 99999999 (Inch orrtPut) 2nd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis' Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. Setting value Setting value
(css )
0
0
...tr
*
I
to
+99999999 +99999999
(Inch output) Nornally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becornes l/10 in increment system 1/10.
to
z0F3s
4 ZOF3S2
ZOF3S3
ZOF3S4
ZOF35
-4
3rd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs6)
Unit 0.001 unt (Metric input) unir 0.000I inch Set t ing value 0 to +99999999 (Inch input) Normally' data are input from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10'
-472-
Parameter No.
Remarks
zoF4s
IDSTX
0
6
8
zoE4s2
IDSTZ
0
7
zoF4s3
ZOF4S4
z0F4s
-t+
4th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
Serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 ffi (Metric input) Setring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input) work coordinate Normally, data are input from the system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.
(cs 7)
IDSTX:
Distance from the first. tool head standard point the 2nd tool head standard point on the X axis.
t.o
only only
0TT
IDSTZ:
Distance from the first tool head standard point to the 2nd tool head standard point on the Z axis. Setring 0 ro +99999999 Unit:0.001 umr (mn output) 0.0001 inch (Inch output)
0TT
-473-
's
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
q
t 0
7
I
-j
ZOF5S
0 ZOF5S2
zoF5s3
ZOF5S4
zoF5s
-4
5th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis , Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs8) Serring value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 rm (Metric output) serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Norma11y, data are input frorn the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system i/10.
ZOF6S
ZOE632
474
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
zoF6s3
ZOF6S4
ZOF6S
1
-4
6th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cse)
serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 urn (Metric output) Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unir 0.0001 inch
Normalty, data are inpur from the system setting screen.
ri:1":":::il:1"
PARTAI
0 REF3X
-475-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
REF3Z 0
B
I
REF3Y
REF33 0
7
2
I(-L.r
JZ
REF34 0
1
REF34
REF3X REF34:
Sets distance of 3rd reference point on X axis to 4th axis from lst reference point sequentially.
Set t
REF4X
REF4Z 0
7
tJ
REF4Y
REF43 n
7
REF4Z
476
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
series
Remarks
REF44 0
1
REF44
REF4X REF44:
Sets distance of 4th reference point on X axis to 4th axis froro lst reference point sequentially.
FIDFl
9
F
IDF2
FlDF3
IDF4
-,
2
F
1DF5
IH
|[
iii
il
ii
tl
rl
-477-
ll
Parameter No.
Remarks
J F
IDF6
FIDFT
9
F
IDFS
?
6, Setting value
FIDF9 coflrmands
FlDFI,2,
3, 4, 5,
FI to F9 in
sequence
7,8,
9:
When
the manual pulse generator is rotated to change the feedrate for Fl digit comnand, the value of this parameter changes accordingly. This parameter can be set even in setting.
A3S9 ABS9:
Spindle distribution cumulative value for the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) data type: 2-word type Unit : Detection unit
478
Parameter No.
Remarks
PECORGX
I
0
PECORGX
PECORGX
PECORGZ 2
n
PECORGY
PECORGY
PECORGZ
to
2
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Y axis (for M series), Z axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7
PECORG3
3
0
PECORGZ
'
PECORGZ
PECORG3
-479-
Parameter No.
Remarks
.)
to
3
I
Setting of picch error compensation amount for Z axis (for M series), 3rd axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7
8
PECORG4 4
0
PECORG4
PECORG4
4th axis zero point of pitch error compensation. Setting range 0 to L27
0
1
to
q
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for 4th axis. Setting range 0 to +7
PECORG5
0
PECORG5
PECORG5
I
<
t+'
t
5
PECORG6 6
0.
PECORG6
PECORG6
-480-
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
0
)
DECIS
7
SCWS SCI^IS
DECIS
Blr
No. 1:
76543210
Machine decelerates when deceleration signal is I
1n
DECIS
0:
reference point return. l'lachine decelerates when deceleration signal is reference point return.
Miniuum comand.increment is the inch system (Machine inch system). Minimum cowtand increment is the metric system (Machine metric systeur) .
0 1n
scws l:
0:
PPDS
7
2 PPDS
Bir
No.
43
Relative coordinate setting. Relative coordinate setting.
IS
zr0
PPDS
1:
0:
l-s
ZYL6
7
zt't5
ZYL1
J
ZIT6
Bit No.
543210
5th/6th axes reference Point return direction and backlash initial directlon at Power 0N in the order of ZM5 and ZM61: Minus direction 0: Plus direction
1
Ii
I
I
-48r-
t"
.ry'
Parameter No.
Remarks
'l
D!{R5 0 0
DMR5
GRD5 GRD6
Bit
No.
654
32t0
DMR5
and
0
DMR6
Bir
No.
765
43
2L0
GRD5
0
APRSS
g
)FFVYS
Bir
No. 1:
76543210
Sets automatic coordinate system at reference point reEurn. Does not set automatic coordinate system at
APRSS
0:
OFFVYS
l.
0:
Servo alarm d.oes not occur even when VRDI is ON before outputting PRDY. Servo alarm occurs when VRDY is ON before outputting
PRDY.
SUB
7 U
I
1
APC6 APC6
APC5 APC5
I
SUB
BiI
APC5/
APC 6
NO
1: l,ihen the absolute pulse coder detector is rnounted. 0: When the absolute pulse coder detector is not
mounted.
SUB
l: 0:
.1
PMC PMC
axis control is the 5th axls. axis control is the 5th/6th axes.
APC5,
APC6
t'
: :
:
-482-
Parameter No.
series)
ABS6
0
2
A3S5 ABS5
ii:
ABS6
Bir
ABS5,
ABS6
No. 1:
defined.
0:
not defined. (The signal becomes r'1r' automatlcally if the reference point return is performed by Pl'tC axis control. Do not change setting by the time the detector is replaced.) When installing the CNC or replacing the position detector, always set these Parameter to 0, turn off and on the power then perforn manual reference point return.
PNGMLK
ROT6 ROT6
ROT5
ROT5
2 PNGMLK
Bit
No. MLK
PNGULK 1: 0:
signal is invalid for the 5th/5th axes. MLK signal is valid for the 5th/6th axes. ROT5,6 1 : The 5th/6th axes is a rotary axis. 0: The 5th/6th axes is a linear axis
CMR5
I
0
CMR5
CMR6 7
1
t
CMR6
Comnand
Cl,lR6.
multiplier
CMR5 and
DSPSUB
7
I
I
0
DSPSUB
-483-
F-
ilt?
#'
Parameter No.
Remarks
DSPSUB2
t
DSPSUB2
DSPSUBl,
2z
Set the axis names of the 5th/6th axes in sequence. The setting code shall be in accordance with the general switch code on the operatorrs panel.
Usable characters:
(x, Y, z, u, V, w, A, B, C, H, 0 - 9, O, N, D, -, .)
When
Note)
displaying the 5/6th axis posi-tions, the run hour, for example, is displayed on the overall position display screen.
INP5
INP5
u
7
rNp6
INP6
In-position width for 5th/6th axes in the order of INP5 and INP6.
SERR5
1
5LKK]
SERR6
5
SERR6
Lirnit val-ue of rnoving position deviation for 5th/6th axes in the order of -'SnnnS and SERR6.
GRDS5
7
8 GRDS5
-484-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
GRDS6
7
GRDS6
GRDS5 and
LPGINS
5
7
LPGINS
RPDF5
RPDF6
1
RPDF6
LINT5
LINT6
7
LINT6
Time constant of linear acceleration and deceLeration for 5th/6th axes in the order of LINT5 and LINT6.
!
;
I
I
-485-
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
l'1
series)
Remarks
FEEDTS
7 2
FEEDTS
common).
FEDFLS
7
0 FEDFLS
Lower lirnit speed of cutting feed exponential acceleration and deceleration (FL) (5th/6th axes in common). Usuallv set this parameter to 0.
ZRNFLS
5
4 ZRNFLS
Low feedrate
common)
.
l-n
BKL5
1
BKL5
DT\LO 7
t-*
BKL6.
STPE5
7
STPE5
-486-
Parameter No.
Remarks
STPE6
5 9
STPE6
Linit value of positional deviatlon for 5th and 6th axes at stop in the order of STPE5 and STPE6.
PSANGNS
5
6 PSANGNS
PSAI{GNS
Subspindle 54/55 digit control (Analog output). Analog output gain adjusting data. (Set the data for gain adjustment at analog output.) The setting range, etc. is the sarne as with the main spindle parameter (No. 5f5).
SPDLCS
9 SPDLCS
SPDLCS
Set Ehe subspinble speed offset compensated valuel the zero offset compensation value of subspindle speed corumand voltage.
LTI5 I
LTI5 I
LTI6l
1
LTI6I
LT152
7
1
LT152
-487-
1q*[ *!flprr{pee
!
I
.i
_"-
Parameter No.
Remarks
LTI62
7
7
LTI62
LT151, 161, L52, r52 Stored st.roke lirnit of 5th and 6th axes.
PRS5
1 7
8 PRS5
PRS6 PRS6
PRS5,
PRSS
-488-
servo
are
Product
OT/OG
OM
The
lst axis
8100
8165
8200
8265
or/oc
OM
Z axis
Y axis
8300
8365
OT/OG
OM
8400
8465
OT/OG
OM
Cf axis, PMC axis Z axis Cf axis, PMC axis The fourth axis
sBoo
BirNo.
DGPRM
While the power is turned orlr the standard values of parameters related to Digital Servo are ' 0: to be set l: noE to be set When this parameter is set to 0 after seEting the motor tyPe' the standard values which have been set corresponding to the motor type of the parameter 8 * 20 are automatically set and this parameter becomes ttltt.
Data
AMR5
Parameter No.
8Eo
l
Bit
No.
AMR4
AMR3
AMR2
AMRI
AMRO
-489-
_r'
,'d
AMRO
AMR5
Motor type
&
10,
AMR
q
I
0
I
2-0, 1-0: 0, 5,
0 0
0
I
I
0 0 0 0
t I
i
0 0
1
I
I
0
20,20M,30,30R
I
1
0
I
4-0,
5-0
3-0
2000 1000
I 2500
0 0 0
i
t
0
l.
0 0 0
I
1
0
I
20000 25000
I
I
I
t
I
0
I
0
Parameter No.
Data
8E oz
Btr No.
7
6s
t
The
Since the set value has been fixed as in the following, never change lt. setting value of the PSSEL is 1, While that of the VFSEL is
Parameter No.
Data.
8Bo3
Bit
Parameter No.
No.
Data
sEo4
Bit
No.
-490-
Parameter No.
Data
8E2o
t'totor type
Parameter input Data type : Word axls type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767 The standard values of the parameters related to the Digital Servo are stored in the menory of the NC corresponding to each motor type. Set them for each
i
)
1
I :
axis.
When
Motor type
3-0
5
2-O
6
t-0
7
sIz
Parameter No.
0
5
9
Motor type
t0
20M
11
20
L2
eflz
i0 Motor type
Parameter No.
30 30R
L4
aIz
13
Parameter No.
Data
sEzL
Parameter input Data type : I^Iord axis type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767
When
Digital Servo is to be used, calculate the inertia ratio of the load inertia and motor rotor inertia according to the following expression and set lt for each axis. Load inertla ratio = load ir-rerti+ x 256 Rotor lnertra
-491\'I
Paraueter
No.
Data
-sE
22
(DIRCTL)
Parameter input
Set the rotating direction of a motor. The motor rotares in the positive direction (Viewed from the motor llI: shaft side, it rotates in the CCW direction.) -111: The motor rotates in the negative direction (Viewed from the motor shaft side, it rotates in the CW direction. If a value exceDt the aobve has been set, an alarm results.
Parameter No.
Data
8Ez3
Parameter input
(PULCO)
Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Dara range: I to 32167
When
B.
Digical Servo is to be used, set the number of pulses per rotation of the motor of the detector to be used for the velocity feedback. Perform calculaEion supposing-ttrat there are four pulses per pulse cycle phases A and
However, when a pulse coder of 0.lu is to be used, set l/10 data. If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results. Parameter No.
Data
BEz4
(PPLS)
Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Data range: I to 32767
When
Digital Servo is to be usedr st the number of pulses per one rotation of t.he motor of the detecEor to be used for the position feedback. Perform calculation supposing that there are hour pulses per pulse cycle of phases A and B. (Exarnple, 2,000 x 4 = 8,000 for a pulse coder of 2,000 p/r.) However,whenapulsecoderof0.liristobeused,Set1/l0data If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
-492-
Parameter No.
Data
8E 40
a $50
s
Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : Data range: Parameters related to Digital Servo
Note) I{hen parameter No. 8 * 0O bit I (DGPRM) is set to 0 and rhe moror type is set to parameter No. 8 * 20, the standard value is autonatically set. Norma11y, it is not necessry to change this parameter.
Parameters which can be determined by the motor to be applied. (Data type: Word axis rye) (l) Parameter No.
5-0
AC servo
uotor
3-0
669
co
be applied
2-O
322
4-0
460
t-0
469
a[+
a
241
828
pa
-527
-L467 -2373
r04 -517
0
-2I26
-237 4
96
-1 103
-1625 -2503
-2782
-2457
226
-i873
80
-2488
267
2I7
- 1082
0
-300
0
-47
-1330
0
-1t27
0
-1647
-1647 |
0 0
0
-1647 I
0
-1547
-1647
-1647 r
afla afl+
a
z
a
22556
r 3582
4t73
LO24
0 0
0 0
ra24
22552
2607
ro24
13679
2607 5560
0 2T
fla afls
aEs
s
o
4t7 2
2607 5560
0
2T
2607
2607 5560
0
2L
2607
5560
0 2L
5560
0
5s60
0
2I
3787
319
0
2l
3787 319
0
3787 319
0
3787 319
0
3787
319
0
3787
3r9
0
ps
-493-
Falxlrr: -'r{.i6*r.tdffir"
AC servo motor
Co
be applied
2-O
Parameter
No
5-0
4-0
2330
57
0
0
3-0
2330
(7 0
1-0
2330
57 0
s[s
e[s e[s
a
z a
e
2330
2330
57
U
2330
57
0
7
a[o
flo
282
7282
32256
3257 6
7282
7282 32256
282
r
z
32256
32256
32507
32256
327
af,o
325t4
317 3
325r9
t2
:
+
28t7
225
83 75
2401 475
7
3265
853
97 L3
3Lt2
L7
85
28
9437
136
9256
Pararueters which can be determined by the motor to be applied, (Data type: Word axis type) (2)
AC servo motor fo be applied
Parameter No.
5
l0
Y44
20r4
20
30
I
30R 705
afl+ o
t7 20
808 -307
4
970
t,<)
6
s[+
-27 8r
-3532
-2622
654
-3682 -2646
535
-557
-27
16
-30s
-2649
824
-2665
s05
-2669
674
3s9
-L7 89
0
-3259
0
-4103
0
-2666
0
-25L6
0
-JJ)O
0
-1647
-1647 r
835
LO24
-t647
-1647
-t647
-r647
t 941
491
49r
1024
348
1024 348
2607
348
l024
L94L 2607
55 60
t024 49r
zou I
55 60
U
834
/-6U
T
49r
2607
55 60
5560
0
5560
0
-494-
I
AC servo aot.or t,o be applied
i {
Parameter
No
5
i
30R 2L 2L
10
201.1
20
30
a[s r a[s eIs s aIs aIs z aIs e aIs s aIo o a[o r aIo z aIo r eIs sIo s
+ o +
2l
3787
2L
2L
2I
3787 319
0
I 1
t t
t
3787 319 0
3787 319
0
3781
3787 319
3r9
0
3r9
0
2330
57 0
2330
57 0
2330
57
0
2330
57 0
2330
57 0
2330
57 0
7282 32256
6918
6918
6554
32256
32509
32256 32452
3947
32256 324L9
4366
32r55
7
539
6s9
r
3242
95s6 9644
312
r2705
22907
29250 LL752
21926 r3005
4567
Note 1) The parameters marked by * are not used currently. Note 2) Wtren a pulse coder of 0.1u is used, the values of the paraneters marked by /l are to be changed to 1/10.
Co'nnon parameters
Parameter No.
It7 It6 0
tt\
#4 0
#3 0
ll2
0
0
tfL
0
ll0
aPo:
sSo
a
0 0
0
0
I
0
-495-
APPENDIX
Character
A
B
D E
Code
Comment
Character
6
7
Code
Comment
8
9
tt tl
032 033
Space
I
J
034 035
036 o37 038 039
c
&
Dollar svmbol
Percent
Ampersand
Sharp
L
M N
0
P
O
Aoostrophe
030
) 041
o42
+
t
043
044
045
D
S
T
U
\/
w
X I
I
3
082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 048 o49 050
051
|linus sign
Period
SIash
Co
046
047 058
lon
059
060
Semi-colon
uol 062
? G
063 .064
091
t
t\
Left ansle bracket Sien of eaualitv Rieht angle braeket 0uestion mark Coumercial at mark Left square bracket
Yen svmbol
092
093 094 095 000
052 053
')
-496-
<-4rn
3a&a
APPENDIX 9
ERROR CODE LIST
1)
Program
off power.
TH
off
was
input,
curn
alarn (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.
TV alarrn (The nunber of characters in block is odd). This alarm will be generared oniy when a the TV check is effective. Correct the tape.
Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. prograrnnabie
dimensions. )
A nuueral or the sign tt-tt eras input without an address at the beginning of a b1ock.
The address was noE followed by Ehe appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB cod.e.
sign rt-tt i-nput error (sign tt-tt was i-nput af Eer an address with which i.t cannot be used. Or two or more,r_r, were input. ) "1rrr"-Decinal point tt.,t input error (A decinal point was. after an address with which it ean not be used. Orinput two decimal points were input.)
Unusable character was
An unusable G code
was
Feedrate was not cornmanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate.
command value or a conmand such that the lead negative value is given.
In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental outputted by idd.""" K exceed the maximum
becomes
T only
A synchronous feed is specified without t.he option for threading /synchronous feed.
The nunber of the corqmanded axes exceeded that bf simultaneously controlled axes An axis not included in the selected plane (by using GI7, Gl8, Gt9) was commanded in ci-reular interDolation.
M only
In circular interpolation bv radius designation, negative value was corr-andei for address R.
Note) ttTtt is a general term for OT-B and OOT-8. ttMtt is a general term for OM-B and OOM-B.
-497-
|;;rF.#
,e.&
;
! i,
Number
Contents The
Remarks
029
H code
is
Eoo large.
M only
T only
M only
The offset number specified by H code for tool length offset only or cutter compensation is too large. The offset number in T function specified for tool
T only
03r
In setting an offset arnount by G10' the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified. In setting an offset amount by GIO, the offset
\itaS eXceSSive. amount
032
033
M only
T only
M only
radius comDensation.
034
The start up ror cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 rnode in cutter comPensation C. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation.
T only
M only
035
G39
is
commanded
T only
M only M only
037
G40 (offset cancel) is commanded at the plane other than offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected by using GI7, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensati-on C mode.
038
Over.outting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end ooint coincides with the arc center.
M only
0vercuttlng will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides wi-th the arc center.
039
T only
Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a chncel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R.
T only
-498-
Number
ConEents
Remarks
040
overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in a canned cycle G90 or G94.
Overcutting vill
occur in cutter compensation
C.
T only
M only
041
One
of
is
cycle
mode. and
Other than P2, P3 and P4 are comnanded for 2nd, 3rd 4th reference point return command.
The chanfering or a corner R was specified in a block which includes a thread cutting command. The block after a block containing a chamfering or corner R specification e/as not a GOl cornmand. The nove direction or the move amount in a block following chaufering or a corner R command was not adequate.
a
T only
T only T only
051
052
053
2 or more of IrKandRare directed in chamfering and corner radius R corrmand or C or R does not come after a con-a (, ) in direct drawing dimension programming.
A block in which the chamfering or the corner R was
T only
054
T only
corrmand.
055
The uove distance in the block which includes the chamfering or the corner R specification is sualler than
T only
R.
0s6
Both end point and angle are not designated in the next block comrnand of the angle designation block (A ).
commanded
command.
T only
to X-axis (Z-axis) in
chamferin=g
-i
'--i
I
t
i
057
T only
T only
0s8
059
cannot be searched,
060
number search.
061
command
not found
in the
sequence
G73
T only
-499-
nGY
Number
Content s
Remarks
062
G72
is zero or negative
T only
o The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value. o The negative value is specified to Ai or Ak in G74 or G75. o A value other than zero is specified to address U or W, though Ai or Ak is zero in G74 or G75. A negative value is specified to Ad, though the o relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined. o Zero on a negative value is specified to Ehe height of thread or depth of cut of lst time in G76. o The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height of thread. o An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
063
The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G7L, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched.
T only
.l
.*
065
at the block with the sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command. o Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, rejlpectively.
commanded
T only
(r
:ia 1;
066
An unallowable G code was comxnanded between two blocks specified by address P and Q in G7l, G72 or G73.
T only
067
T only T only
069
The final move command in fhe blocks specified by P and Q of G70, G7l, G72 and G73 ended with chamfering or
corner
R.
070
The memory area is insufficient. The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in progran number search. The number of programs to be sEored exceeded 63 or I25
07r
(option).
The commanded program number has already been used. The'program number is oEher than I to 9999. Address P was not commanded in the block which includes an M98 command or a G65 command. The subprogram was called in three or five folds.
-500-
Number
Contents
Remarks
I
078
A prograu number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99 or G56 was not found.
The contents of the program stored in the memory did not agree r^'ith that in tape in collation.
t
I
I
079
080
In the area specified by parameter e, the ueasuring posicion reach signal does, not come on. (Autornatic tool compensation function) Autonatic tool compensation was specified wlthout a code. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T
T only
08I
082
T only T only
t
T code and automatic tool compensation were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function) In automatic tool compensation, an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. (Automatic tool compensation function) entering data in the meuory by using ASR or Reader/ Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error lras generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate is incorrect.
When When
083
T only
t
i
I
085
086
entering data in the memory by using Reader/Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader/puncher was turned off'. I
087
When
read.
090
entering data in the memory by using Reader/puncher interface, though the read terninaEe command is specified, lnput is not interrupted after 10 characters
The reference point return cannot be performed normally because the reference point return start point is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow. The commanded axis by G27 (Reference point did not return to the reference point.
092
094
return
check)
M only
P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the coordinate system setting operation was perforned.)
P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the external work offset amount changed.) P type cannot be specified when che program
095
M only
096
M only
*t
-501-
ffi
Number
097
Contents
Remarks
P type cannot be'directed when the prograrn is re-started. (After power 0N, after emergency stop or P/S 94 to 97 reset, no autonatic operation is performed.)
M only
t:
098
A command of the program re-start was specified without the reference point return operation after power 0N and emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.
M only
099
After completion of search in program re-start, command is given with MDI. Setting data the system.
PWE
move
I"1
only
100
is set to 1. Turn it to 0 and reset rewriting the contents of storage & editing generated, set the on the po\rer while
memory.
101
The power r{tas turned off while the memory in the part program operation. I{hen this alarm is setting data PWE to I and turn pushing the DELET to clear the
110
The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable ranse. The calculatlsn result of macro instruction exceeds the allowable range Gzsz to 232-1).
111
Lt2
1r3
1i4
For custom
l"lacro
A
ti6
For custom
macro
A
rl8
(quintuple)
iI9
For custom
Macro
A
The
on
-502-
Number
Rem:rks
M only
L22 L23
specified in double
used.
control
cornmand
is
t24
L25 126
DO-END
<Formula> format
is
erroneous.
In
DOn,
lcn<3is
t27
128
The sequence number specified in the branch not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. An addres3dni"n is nor allowed in <Argument Designation> is used.
lzg
r30
In 3rd axis control-, a 3rd axis control command was n given by PMC during Cf control. On the contrary, an attenpt was made for Cf control fron PMC during axis contro l. Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm
message.
T only
i31
L32
clear.
133
message
135
Snall section data is erroneous in external alarn or external operator message. T only
T only T only
M only M only M only
M only
Without any spindle orientatloD, an attempE was made for spindle indexj-ng.
A move command of other axes was specified to the block as spindle indexing addresses C, H. A move command of other axes was specified to che block as M-code related to spindle indexing.
same
136
t37
141
same
t42
143
1S
commanded
in other than
The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum conmand value.
The coordinate rotatlon plane and arc or tool offset plane differ from each other.
C
144
148
AutomatLc override deceleration is out of the settable range of judgernent angle. Check parameter No. O2l3'
M only
02L4,02I5.
-503-
*{H*.
s
*
Number
Contents
Remarks
r50
151
maxi-mum
a11owable va1ue.
M only
M only
M only M only M only
t52
153
value registerable.
The program setting the tool group is not entered in block to store T code.
When the group commanded.
<,/,
is not
commanded, H99
or D99 was
same
i55
156
In the machining program, M06 and T code in the block do not correspond to the group in use.
M only
P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set.
The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxinum a1lowab1e va1ue.
M only
r57
158
M only
M only M only 0TT only
Different M code is
M code.
commanded
r65
199
An attempt was made to execute a program of an even number in Head I or an odd program number in Head 2.
0TT only
commanded.
200
In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. (programming error)
error
20r
202
(progranming
In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (system error) In the rigid tap, position for incorrect .
M29 and G84 (G74)
1429
203
or an S command is
between
204
205
In the rigid tap' an axis rnovement is specified blocks. (programrning error) In the rigid tap, no rigid desoite M29 is specified.
mode
DI signal is turned
on
-504-
(APC)
Contents
Renaiks
X-axis.
311
APC communication
error
312
313
APC
APC
Failure in data
transmission
transmi-ssion
314
APC
parity error
pulse miss alarm
a
Failure in data
APC
3r5
316
APC
alarm
X-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to level so that the date cannot be held.
low
APC
alarn
alarm alarm
317
X-axis APC battery voltage ac a level where the battery must be renewed. X-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level where the batterv musE be renewed (including when por./er is OFF) .
Manual reference point return is required for the Z-axis (T) or Y-axis (M).
APC
318
APC
-l
I
320
321
I
Z-axis Y-axis
Failure in data
transmission
I
{
I
(M)
322
Z-axis Y-axis
overtirne
error
Failure in data
transmi-s
s
overtine error
ion
323
Z-axis Y-axis
Failure in data
transmission
324
Z-axis Y-axis
(T)
(U)
Failure in data
transmiss ion
APC
325
Z-axis Y-axis
APC APC
alarm
326
Y-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a lott level so that the date cannot be held.
APC alarm
-505-
Number 327
Contents
Y-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the batterv must be renewed. Y-axis APC battery volcage has reached a level where the batterv must be renewed (including when
porder
328
APC
alarm
is
OFF) .
330
(M)
33L
APC communication
error
(M)
(I'1)
Failure in data
transmission
t
332
333
APC
Fai-lure in data
ransmission
APC
(M)
Failure in data
transmission
Jc+
APC
parity error
(M)
Failure in data
transmi-ssion
(M) a Iow
335
JJO
APC
Z-axis APC bfttery voltage has decreased to level so that the date eannot be held.
APC I
alarm alarm
337 | Z-axis
338
APC
Z-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level the battery must be renev/ed (including when power is OFF).
Manual reference ooint return is required for the
APC alarm
340
(M)
341
APC communication
error
(M)
(M)
Failure in data
transmiss ion
342
APC
overtime error
frarning
Failure in data
transmission
343
APC
error
(I'1)
Failure in data
t ransmis s ion
344 345
346
4th-axis th-axis
APC
parity error
(l'1)
Failure in data
transmission
APC alarm APC
(M)
APC
4th-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held.
alarm
-506I
Number 347
Contents
Renarks
APC a1-arm
4th-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the battery must be renewed. 4th-axis APC batLery voltage has reached a leve1 where the battery must be renewed. (including when
por^rer
348
APC
alarm
is
OFF.)
3) Servo alarms
Number
Contents
Remarks
400
401
turns off.
signal
(VRDY)
402 403
on.
READY
signal
(VRDY)
404
Position control READY signal (READY) turns off, while velocity control READY signal (VRDY) does not turn off, or velocity control READY signal (VRDY) turns on' although READY signal (PRDY) is not turned on yet when turning on the power supply.
A position control system error. A reference point return failure due to a trouble in CNC or servo systtem.
405
manual
again.
410
(Note)
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue.
411
The position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in X-axis. The content.s of the X-axis error register exceed "32767,
413
or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures.
An
4r4
error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of the X-axis. Details of the error are output to the DGN0S
No. 720.
-507-
F*.
""i-w
Number
Contents An attempt \.ras made to specify a velocity of exceediirg 5f1875 detection unit/sec in X-axis. This error is usually caused by a CIIR setting failure. An error in the position detection system of X-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
When
Remarks
415
4t6
417
the X-axis enters any of the conditions shovm in the following, this alarm results. 1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8120 for motor type. 2) A proper value (l1I or -I1I) has not been set to the parameter 8122 for the rotating direction of the
motor.
.;
,};
fg
it
,::
'i
3) An inproper data such as 0 or less has b..n set to parameter 8123 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of. the motor 4) An improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8124 for Ehe number of positi-on feedback pulses pef rotation of motor.
/,') i
.!
i
a
4,
g,
(Note )
In Z-axis; the position deviation amount during scop is greater than the setting value In Y-axis" the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.
421 | The position deviation amount is larger than the set I value during move in Y-axis (M) or Z-axis (T).
423
(M) or Z-axis (T), or the velocity couunand value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures.
An error has occurred in Ehe DigiLaI Servo system of rhe X(0II) or Z(OT) axis. o The details of the error are output to the DGNOS 721.
424
14
25
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in Y-axis (M) or Z-axi-s (T). This error is caused by a CMR setting failure.
4LO
error of the position deEection system of Y-axis pulse coder (M) or Z-axls pulse coder (T) (break alarrn)
An
-508-
Number
Lal
Contents When-the
Remarks
Y-axis (01,I) or Z axis (0T) encers any of the conditions shorsn in the following, this alarm results. 1) A value which is out of the specified range has been ' set to the parameter 8220 for motor type. 2) A proper value (lI1 or -fll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8222 for the rotating direction of the
moE.or.
3) An improper data such as 0 or less has been sec to paraueter 8223 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8224 for the nuuber of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor.
430
(No te )
In 3rd axis, the position deviation is greater than the setting va1ue.
amount
during stop
In Z-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue.
431
Position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in Z-axis.
The position dqvi.ation amount exceeds "32767 in Z-axis
M only
M only
433
or the velocity command value af DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usuallv caused by various setting failures.
434
An error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of Ehe Z(oM) or 3rd (OT) axis. The details of the error are
output to the
DGNOS 722.
435
An attenpt was made to specify a velocity.of exceeding 51 18 75 detection unit/sec i.n Z-axis. This error l-s caused by a CMR setting failure. An error of the position detection system of Z-axis pulse coder (break alarrn).
only
436
M only
-509-
roFF
Nurnber 437
Contents
When
Remarks
conditi-ons
the Z (0M) or the third (OT) axis becomes any of the shown in the following, this alarm results.
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8320 for motor type. 2) A proper value (111 or -I11) has not been set to the parameter'8322 for the rotating direction of the
motor.
3) An
inproper data such as 0 or less has been Set to parameter 8323 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of Ehe motor.
data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8324 for the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of the motor.
T
4) An improper
440
(Note)
In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value. In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop ts greater than the setting va1ue.
44L
Position devfition amount is larger than the set value during move in the 4th-axis.
The position deviation aurount exceeds !32767 in the
M only M only
443
4th-axis or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting faj.lures..
An error has occurred in the Digital
444
Servo system of the fourth axis. Details of the error are output to the DGNOS No. 723.
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in the Ath-axis. An error of the position detection system of the 4th-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
I'1
445
only
446
M only
-510-
Number
Content s
When
Remarks
shown
447
the fourth axis enters any of the conditions in the following, this alarm results
1) A value whieh is out of the specified range has set to the parameter 8420 for motor type.
been
2) A proper value (1ll or -tll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8422 for the rotating direction of the
motor
3) An improper data such as 0 or 1es6 has been set to the parameEer 8423 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor. 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8424 f.or the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor. 4) Overtravel alarms
Number
Contents
Remarks
510
511
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke l_init of X-axis. Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke limit of X-axis.
2nd stroke
5r2
513
T T (M)
520
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke lfuoit of y-axis or Z-axis (T). Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit or Z-axis (T).
2nd stroke linit
521
of y-axis
(M)
T.
M only
M only
of Z-axis.
540
4th-axis.
M only
M only
541
4th-axis.
of the
- 5lr -
:,#
r!
5) Alarm in
Number 600
Contents
Remarks
Interruption by illegal
PMC RAM PMC
PMC
command
is occurred
60r
602 603 604 605
is exceeded.
5) Overheat alarm
Number
700
Contents
Remarks
704
detection.
7> System
Number
alarm
F
Contents
Remarks
PCB
9r0
911
RAII
RAM
Replace master
Replace master
PCB.
9t2
913
(LOW). (HIGH)
RAM
9t4
920
930
RAM
of digital servo.
PCB.
Reolace master
Replace master
PCB.
940
This alarm results when any of the following conditions is encountered: 1) A PCB used for Digital Servo system is
malfunctioning.
2) Evel when there are more than two control axes, the third axis (the third/fourth-axes) control printedcircuit board is not mounted. Example) The Z-axis of the 0M becomes the Chird. :) fhe master printed-clrcuit servo is in use.
board for the analog
-5L2-
Number 950
998
Content
Remarks
paritv error.
(BP/S)
Contents BP/S alarm ls produced with the same nunber as P/S alarur taking place in normal program editing. (070, 071, 072,
Remarks
t
l
140
Note) An alarm on background editing is displayed on the key input line of background editing screen, not on a normal alarm screen. It is possible to reset it by some following MDI key operation.
The details of Digital Serv.o system alarm No. 4t 4 are indicated at the diagnosis numbers 72O,721,722, and 723 in order for the X, Y(Z), Z(C and PMC) , and the fourth (Y and PMC) axis.
w;4
DGNOS No.
OVL
LV
0vc
HCAL
HVAL
DCAI,
I
FBAL
OFAL
OFAL: An overflow alarm has occurred. FBAL: A wire disconnection alarm has occurred. DCAL: An alarm of regenerative discharge circuit HVAL: An overvoltage alarm has occurred. I{CAL: An improper current alann has occurred. OVC : An excessive current alarm has occurred.
has occurred
LV : A voltage shortage alarm has occurred. OVL : An overload alarn has occurred.
-513-
APPENDIX
10
LIST OF OPERATION
Key
Func t i on
SETTING
Mode
switch
PI,JE=l
o
swi rch
button
Power
0N
Operation
and
Clear
Mernory
all
clear
Cleari.ng
Parameter
o
Power
ON
I DFeFT
Clearing
s
Power
ON
to red
Program
Parameter
ED
IT
PARA}I
I Tf,lDIIT
(Tape
MemorY)
Offset value
Program inPut
o
EDIT EDIT/AUTO
MDI
OFSET
PRGRM
firlpUrl
flNPUfl
+ Parameter No. PWE=0+
+
Parameter
PARAM
1:t ?
Offset value
OFSET
+ of fser
11e.
+
* FfrFffl
+0-
+ Data
Tape Punch
Parameter
EDIT
ED
PARAM
I ETADT
Offset value
1T
OFSET
PRGRM
fsTFR-f]
A1l program
One Prograrn
EDIT
LUII
ED
Io
l.
-9999 + | srARr
PRGR}I PRGRM
El .
[-1-l
Search
IT i AUTO
xo. *
fII
TE=unson)
AUTO
PRGR}4
sequence
number search
(cuRSoR)
Address r,rord
search Address search
ED
IT
PRCRM
Searching address and data input + l-Il (cunson) Searching address [-b-l
EDIT
PRGRM
l-T-l
(CURSOR)
ED
IT
PRCRM
-eeee *
rcE
ET]
-5r4-
Func t
lon
a
Key
SETTING
PI.JE
Mode
switch
o
= I
Func t
ion
but ton
PRGRM
0pera t ion
Deletion of
progran
EDIT
PRGRM
[-N-l
locks
o
Deletion of a block Deletion of a word Alternation of a word lnserti.on of a word CoIIation Collacion in
menory with
taPe
EDIT
PRGRM
f-mfr-l
'
l-5ErET-l
EDIT
PRGRM
deleted
o
'
I-bEIEfl
EDIT
PRGRM
deleted+Addtess+Data
*
o
|-TITEE-I
EDIT
PRGRM
Search the word before the pLace in the program + Address + Dara * fTfrSItl
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
f ilreur
Input / Output
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
File tqo.
with
. FIFFI
FANUC
Cassette
EDIT
PRGRM
outPut
Program
one
EDI,T
PRGRM
ffl i
etog.am No.
* I-sreETl
-9999 or
Searching
a head of
ior
a
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
file
EDIT
PRGRI.l
ED
IT /AUTO
PRGRM
I t
I I
---l
-515-
/..r*#*.;".
"
;.d!e*l,
-r1*q
.l
APPENDIX
.g
11
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
f;
Optional
is required
Name
Specification
Reference itern
Concrolled axis
3 axes (X, Y' Z) * 4 axes (4th axis/PMC axis) * 5 axes (PMC axis) * 6 axes (PMC axis)
2 axes 3
fi
rr-2
rr-2. i
Simultaneously
controlled axes
axes axes
o
rr-2.1
Appendix
3
0.00t
mm/O.0001 inch
Least command
increment
Appendix
Increment system
Tr-2.2
Appendix
I
3
r/r0
Max. Programmable
dimension
digi ts
I-5
1002
TT-5.3.2
Tr-5 .2.3
Perminutefeed
I 0 .0
Per-
revolution
feed
*1 -
rr-5 .2.4
9.9999 inch/rev
Provided
rr-5.4
deceleration
-516-
#
PMC
Name
is required
Specification
Ref,erence
itern
0-
1502
o
rr-5 .3. 1
,
* Provided
Provided
Override cancel
Manual continuous feed
TTI-4.2
Positioning
rr-4. i
Tr-4.2
rr-4.3 rr-4.4
rr-4.5
rr-5
. 2. 5
II-6. I
rr-6.2
o
2nd reference
Provided
rr-6.3
* Provided
9tt
monochrome
III-2
IIT-2
CRT/MDI CRT/MDI
III-2
III-2
MDI
soft
*'5 + 2 pcs.
2 units 3 units
rIr-2.
1.1
I unit
III-4 .4
-517-
ffi
*iil
o; ,
Name
PMC
is required
Specification
Reference
item
magnifying factor
Handle interrupt
xl,xI0,xM *
Provided
III-5
.6
the
Provided
same mode
Incremental feed
x 1, x 10, x 100, x
* Provided
*'Provided
1000
Rigid tap
Program restart Reader puncher
III_5 .5
inEerface
* Reader puncher interface (1st channel)/ASR33 interface *' Reader puncher interfaee
(2nd channel)
Dwe1l time
(every seeond)
rr-5 .6
Machine lock
III-6.
* Provided
Provided Provided
Z-axis
ignored
command cancel
Additional axls
III-I5
Skip function
Exact stop
mode
rr-i5.1
rr-5
.5 .2
5.
Exact stop
S
rr-5.
ervo-of f
Manual absolute
Provided
* Provided
rrr-10.
-518-
*3*
?o; ,
Name
PMC
is required
Soecification
Reference
i teirn
Clock function
MDI ooeration MDI operation
B
* *
Provided
III-II.9 III-5.1.I
rrr-5
.
Provided Provided
I .3
0rder-made macro
Reset
* Provided (64K8/128K8)
Provided
rrr-5. 4.5
Optional
CMR
Rapid traversing
signal output.
Dry run
III-6
.6
Single block
Program protect signal
III-6.7
Self-diagnosis function
Emergency stop
III-7 . I
St.atus output.
ready signal, servo ready signal, alarm signal' distribution end signal, automatic operating signal, automatic operation starting signal,feed hold larnp signalr power supply ready signal and resetting signal
CNC
*'4000 rpn
6000
rpur
560(W) nn
x 400(n)
rolo
200(D) nn
It
F:'
Power supply
I
or
t:
I
I.
1,
Fz +t
-L57"
ttz
-157"
FANUC FANUC
motor, etc.
rl
,l
-519-
o: t
PMC
is required
Specification
s
Reference
i i6m
ITT_2
LLL-L.L
. Position Detector
Name
PMC
is required
Specification
Provided
Reference itern
required
Speci
fi cation
* * * * *
No. of DI/DO
* *
-520-
Program Inpu
Name
o: t
Speci f icat ion
PMC
is
required
Reference
item
Provided
rr-7. I
rr-7 . I .2
Provided
rr-7.1.I
rr-8.3 rr-8.3
Provided Provided
* Provided
:k Provided
II-I6 III7
(F10/fl
* Provided
rr-8.2 II-T4.2
rr-14.3
rr-13. I
* Provided * Provided
rY Provided
Playback
I
I
i
1
* Provided
Provided
* Provided
Provided
o
Mirror
image
rr-14.5 rr-14.5
rrr-9.
II-18
14
Ff0/ffl
tape format
* Provided
'l
;|
I
.521
o: t
Name
PMC
is required
Soecification * Provided
*'Provided
Reference
item
Conversational center
*'Provided
Ilacro execucer
64KB/*i28KB
r rt. Auxiliary
lunction
o; , Specification
M2
M3
PMC
is required
Name
Reference item
Auxiliary function
digits
rr-11.1
o
o
digits
86 digits
Provided
III-6
.3
PMC
s requlre
Specification
Reference
item
S2 digits
s4ls5 dlgirs
rr-9.1. i
* Provided t, 50 l2O%
o o
by
Provided
-522-
. Tool Function
Name
s
item
requ
Specification
T2
Reference
Tool function
II-10
o
T4
Tool offset
memory
Tool length
comoensation
rr-14. I
* Provided * Provided
*'Provided
o o
Tool life
management
rr-10.2
o; ,
Specification 10n *.20 n
PMC
is required
Reference
item
rrr-9. l8
rrr-9.
l7
rrr-1 I . 2
III-9.9 III-9.4
rr-13 .4.4
o
I block
9 blocks
rr-I3.4.4
Sequence No.
* Provided
-523-
o:
Name
PMC
is required
Speci
No.
fication
Reference item
External work
search
Provided (15)
Provided
* Provided
rrr-9. I 3
, PMC 1S
. Dlspl.a Di
Name
req u ired
Speci
fication
Reference ltem
Languages
* * * *
Run tine/No. of parts
Italian
display
'. t
Provided
-: .j
III_I
I .6
Graphic display
* Provided
Provided
III-14
rrr-1 1 .4 rrr-13.7
* Provided
o:,
PMC
is required
Specification
*'Provided
o o o
Reference item
o,
buffer
A
':t Provided
High-speed remote
buffer
* Provided
-524-
is required
Name
Sp
ecifi cation
Reference
item
buffer
High-speed remote
B
* Provided * Provided
o
-525-
&:
a'
n1
,.t
-l
II
i) i
I
o O
uJl
sl
(Y)
I g
Jl
It
-t
<l
o (l,
I
fl zl <l
E.
cc
EI
chl
I
o
u,
(D
o
cc
uJ
o
co
= o o o
I
F.
irA
2o>
o
po
o! !o o6 CD 6ko
:!
(J
l+' lrt
i,
I
t'
i_
=qlltrF-:#.;.'
""*r{fff
'ir S.t
'i:,
lf,'-c-:.,{41 :
^.\ \*'
\rI\
i.
\\.
ut
\
't
ii
'a
.*
;:i
ll#+-;r-ieK;ll.*,
-\l-./t#
\ '. :,.
'.
.,
'tt